Explosion Protected Products

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH 

Explosion Protected 

Products 

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH 1

CEAG 

Sicherheitstechnik GmbH: 

the factory in Soest. 

II EE FF II DD 

TT RR EE CC DIN EN ISO 9001 

Q UA LITY SYS TE M 

Quality management 

with DIN EN ISO 9001. 

CEAG company standard 

since 1992. 

CEAG – A Strong 

Partnership 

Ahead of the Market 

A combination ideally blending decades of 

experience and consistent innovation. 

With the integration of CEAG Sicherheitstechnik 

GmbH into Crouse-Hinds ® , a powerful 

partner for emergency lighting systems has 

been created and has become the market 

leader in explosion-protection equipment. 

This strong partnership offers a comprehensive 

and technologically innovative range of 

explosion protected equipment and intrinsically 

safe interface technology, complying with all 

common international standards. This combination 

provides access to all the significant 

markets. CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH 

is a synonym for a secure future and continuity 

in quality and service throughout the world. 

Product solutions are developed jointly, in 

dialogue with the user, to completely meet 

all practical daily requirements. 

The company is setting new quality standards 

with intensive research and development 

activities. 

Starting with the search for made-to-measure 

customer concepts and customer-oriented 

quality management, right through to the CEAG 

tradition of staying in close contact with 

customers and providing a worldwide presence. 

The guaranteed CEAG benefit: well-thoughtout 

logistics, production, “just in time” delivery 

are the basis for all-round success. With wellqualified 

and motivated members of staff, CEAG 

provides comprehensive reliable and friendly 

service in close contact with the customer. 

The comprehensive range: 

• Ex-protected luminaires and equipment 

• Ex-protected components for process 

automation 

• Emergency lighting and group supply 

systems in accordance with DIN VDE 0108 

® Crouse-Hinds is a registered trademark 

of Cooper Industries Inc., Houston, USA 

The factory in Eberbach 


Explosion-Protected 


Contents 

0 Regulations 

1 

2 

and 

Information on 


Regulations and information on 

explosion-protected ......................... 0/1-0/10 


Portable Lamps 

Regulations for the Use and Safety of 

Explosion-Protected Portable Lamps ........ 1/2 

Lighting and Battery Technology for 


Intelligent Lighting Electronicy for 


Possible Applications for Explosion- 

Protected Hand Lamps ............................ 1/5 

Stabex mini 

Stabex HF ......................................... 1/6-1/7 

Stabex MO (Zone 0) .......................... 1/8-1/9 

HE 5 EN ........................................ 1/10-1/11 

HE 8 N EN ..................................... 1/12-1/13 

HE 8 EURO/ 

HE 8 EURO PLUS ......................... 1/14-1/15 

SEB 8 L / SEB 8 ............................ 1/16-1/17 

HLE 7 L EN ................................... 1/18-1/19 


Light Fittings 

Light Fittings of the Series eLLK 92 – 

„Easy to See Through“.............................. 2/2 

Ergonomically Designed 

Explosion-Protected Light Fittings ..... 2/3-2/4 

Regulations and Lighting Engineering - 

More Light, Less Energy ........................... 2/5 

EVG Technology 

Developed for Practical Operation ............ 2/6 

Centrally Controlled 

Emergency Lighting Supply ...................... 2/7 

Ex-Light Fittings eLLK 92 ................. 2/8-2/11 

Ex-Pole Mounted Light Fittings 

eLLM 92 ........................................ 2/12-2/13 

Ex-Light Fittings for Emergency 

Lighting eLLK/M 92 Ni ................... 2/14-2/17 

Ex-Light Fittings for Zone 2 

nLLK 98 ........................................ 2/18-2/23 

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH I



Contents 

3 Explosion-Protected 

Flameproof Light Fittings 

for Fluorescent Lamps 

Ex-Light Fittings 

dKLK 88110/dKLK 88110 CG ........... 3/2-3/3 

Ex-Emergency Light Fitting 

AB 12108-EVG .................................. 3/4-3/5 


EE 11 PL ........................................... 3/6-3/7 

Ex-Light Fittings AB 12 .................... 3/8-3/10 

4 


Pendant Light Fittings and 

Floodlights for Incandescent 

and Discharge Lamps 

Ex-Protected Ceiling Light Fitting AB 80 ... 4/3 

Ex-Protected Pendant Light Fittings 

AB 50 and SPG 1N .................................. 4/4 


Serie EV.. ........................................... 4/5-4/6 


for High Pressure Discharge Lamps 

Series EV.. ......................................... 4/7-4/9 

Ex-Pendant Light Fitting 

dHLS 85250/dHLS 85400 ............. 4/10-4/11 

Ex-Floodlight 

dTLS 85250 .................................. 4/12-4/13 

Ex-Protected PX Floodlights .......... 4/14-4/16 

Ex-Vessel Light Fitting 

KFL .. TIM ...................................... 4/18-4/19 

Metal Pendant Light Fitting Zone 2 

NVMV 70 W-150 W CHAMP ......... 4/20-4/21 

Metal Pendant Light Fitting Zone 2 

NVMV 250 W-400 W CHAMP ....... 4/22-4/23 

Metal Floodlight Zone 2 

NFMV 250 W-400 W ..................... 4/24-4/25 

5 


Installation 

and Control Units 

Information on Explosion-Protected 

Plugs and Sockets and Switchgear .......... 5/2 


Plugs and Sockets, Terminal Boxes 

and Switchgear ........................................ 5/3 

Ex-Installation Switches and 

Ex-Pushbuttons ................................. 5/4-5/5 

Ex-Plugs and Sockets for Zone 1 .... 5/6-5/17 

Ex-Plugs and Sockets for Zone 2 .. 5/18-5/21 

Complete Socket Distributions ....... 5/22-5/23 

Ex-Junction Boxes ........................ 5/24-5/26 

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH II



Contents 

Terminal Boxes .............................. 5/27-5/37 

Ex-Protected Terminal Boxes STB ... and 

NEXT ... made of Stainless Steel.... 5/38-5/42 

Ex-e/Ex-i Cable Entries 

and Accessories ............................ 5/44-5/51 

Moulded Plastic Apparatus Mounting Plates 

for Mounting on Walls, Trellis Work, Pipes and 

Square Tubing ............................... 5/52-5/57 

Ex-Control Units 

P 411, P 412 and P 413 ................ 5/58-5/65 

Universal Ex-Control Station Range in 

New GHG 43 Design ..................... 5/66-5/73 

Ex-Control Stations 

GHG 44 ......................................... 5/74-5/76 

Explosion Protected Control Units 

made of Stainless Steel ................. 5/77-5/78 

Components for Control Stations .. 5/79-5/85 

Ex-Control Switches and 

Ex-Control Switches with 

Measuring Instrument .................... 5/86-5/89 

Ex-Safety Switches ........................ 5/90-5/97 

Ex-Power Circuit Breakers and 

Manual Motor Starters ................. 5/98-5/100 

Ex-Control Units Program for 

Panel Mounting ......................... 5/101-5/108 

6 


Switchgear and 

Distributions in Plastic 

and Metal Enclosures 

Moulded Plastic Ex-Distributions in 

Modular Design ............................... 6/2-6/17 

Explosion-Protected Fuse and 

MCB Distribution Boards made 

of Stainless Steel ........................... 6/18-6/20 

Ex-Components in Moulded Plastic 

for Distributions ............................. 6/21-6/26 

Metal Ex-d Enclosures and 

Distributions .................................. 6/27-6/37 

Ex-d Distributions and Frameworks 

with Metal EJB Enclosures for Gases 

of Explosion Group II B .................. 6/38-6/47 


III

You will find our comprehensive 

product range of „Intrinsically Safe Products” 

in our CEAG Apparatebau Hundsbach GmbH & Co. KG 

catalogue 


CEAG Apparatebau Hundsbach GmbH & Co. KG 

The two companies stand for decades 

of experience and powerful innovation 

impetus. With the integration of CEAG 

Apparatebau Hundsbach into the group – 

that also took over CEAG digi table some 

years ago, a valuable addition in the field 

of intrinsically safe signal conditioning – 

CEAG now presents itself as your 

resourceful and proficient partner in the 

design of explosion protection systems. 

As part of the Cooper Crouse-Hinds group 

of companies, the leading, globally active 

suppliers of emergency lighting systems, 

explosion-protected lighting fittings, switch 

gear, distribution units and instrumentation 

and control components, it is possible 

to supply everything from a single source. 

CEAG operates in all important markets 

of the world, meets all current standards 

and has obtained all the required international 

approvals. 

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik and CEAG 

Apparatebau Hundsbach constantly 

warrant highest quality and reliable 

service on a long-term basis. 

Long-term availability means all products 

previously furnished by CEAG 

or Apparatebau Hundsbach will remain 

in our scope of supplies for all future 

application needs. 

It goes without saying that CEAG 

Apparatebau Hundsbach will continue 

their efforts to provide innovative technological 

solutions to satisfy your 

requirements as cost-efficiently as 

possible. By vigorously advancing 

R & D activities the company sets new 

standards. Efficient quality assurance 

according to DIN EN ISO 9001 is, of 

course, our first priority. 

CEAG Apparatebau Hundsbach GmbH & Co. KG 

Leisbergstraße 21 

D-76534 Baden-Baden 

Phone +49 (0) 72 23/99 09-117 

Fax +49 (0) 72 21/99 09-140 

Internet: http://www.apparatebau-hundsbach.de 

http://www.ceag.de 

e-mail: info_ah@ceag.de 

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH IV




catalogue 

Eurocards 

Digital input 

Frequency, rotation 

NAMUR switch, optocouplers 

Switch amplifier transistor output 

Switch amplifier relay output 

Digital output 

Solenoid valve driver, sounders, LEDs 

Temperature 

RTD transmitter, 

Thermocouple, mV 

Trip points 

Trip amplifier 

4 configurable trips 

TÜV approved safety trip amplifier 

Signal trip amplifier 

DIN rail devices 

Digital input 


Switch amplifier transistor output 

Switch amplifier relay output 



Temperature 



Trip points 


Transmitter power supply, input isolator 

HART Transmitter power supply 

Transmitter power supply trip amplifier 

Analog output isolator 

Loop powered analog output 

HART analog output isolator 

Output isolator / level shift 

Pneumatic converter 

I/P converter 

P/I converter 

Accessories 

Analog calculator 

Square root option 

19” rack 

Backplane 

Enclosures, cabinets 




Loop powered analog output 


Output isolator / level shift 

Pneumatic converter 

I/P converter 

P/I converter 

Accessories 

Backplane 


Safety barriers 

Digital input 





Temperature 







Accessories 

Backplane 


CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH V




catalogue 

BUS Systems for control room 

Digital input 





Temperature 



Trip points 


Transmitter power supply, Input isolator 

HART transmitter, power supply 



Accessories 

Backplane 


Converter for temperature 

Housing 

Head mounting size B 

DIN rail 

Eurocard 

Communication 

HART 

Line monitoring 

Sensor breakage, 

Open circuit 

Short circuit 

BUS Systems for Zone 1 

Digital input 





Temperature 



Trip points 


Transmitter power supply, Input isolator 

HART transmitter, power supply 



Accessories 

Backplane 


CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH VI

Advantages 

Planning 

Detail engineering 

CAD documentation 

Production 

PC recorded functional testing 

Options 

Cabinets, mounting racks 

Wall-mounted enclosures, desks 

Instrumentation panels 

Marshalling units 

19" subracks for swing frames or 

wall mounting 

System racks 

Connections 

Termi-point 

Wire-wrap 

Crimp 

Soldered 

Screw/plug-type 

Honeycomb backplanes 

Inhouse Surveyor 

for explosion protection systems 

acc. to § 4, section 5 of the 

decree governing explosionprotected 

systems (11.GSGV) 

Expert opinions on intrinsic safety 

in case of interconnected systems 

Installation certificates acc. to 

§12 Elex V and ATEX100a 




catalogue 

CEAG Apparatebau Hundsbach 

GmbH & Co. KG 

For more than 50 years CEAG 

Apparatebau Hundsbach has been 

active in the instrumentation and control 

sector. The comprehensive experience 

thus gained is available to you. 

Our scope of work spans consulting 

services, professional bid preparation, 

project attendance as well as assistance 

in commissioning – all that is required 

for your valuable plant and to support 

planning companies and system resellers 

you are cooperating with. 

You can rely on us meet all your order 

deadlines on time. If desired, you may 

witness inspections in the factory or be 

provided with the required test certificates. 

Description 

The compact signal 

conditioning system 

in modular backplane 

design for all instrumentation 

and control applications. 

It can be installed 

in switchboards or be 

supplied as wall-mounted 

units. In addition to ISES/IMAH 

backplane type units we 

offer enclosures and subracks 

tailored to customer 

needs for various wiring 

systems. 

Non-intrinsically safe 

designs are available 

on request. 

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH VII

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH VIII

Regulations and 

Information on 

Explosion-Protection 

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH 0/1 

0

Regulations and Information 

on Explosion-Protection 

Regulations on Explosion-Protection: 

Electrical apparatus for use in hazardous areas 

must be explosion-protected in design and 

must comply with the regulations on Explosion- 

Protection. In order to establish a requirement 

and safety level that is the same throughout 

Europe, the EC Commission has compiled 

product-related “European Directives” for all 

types of products. 

In 1975 the Council of the European Community 

issued basic directives on Explosion-Protection. 

These were converted into national law in 

Germany in the “Regulations concerning 

electrical installations in explosive atmospheres 

(Elex V)” issued in February 1980. 

CENELEC, the European committee for 

electrotechnical standardization, worked 

out European standards for apparatus for use 

in hazardous areas. These standards DIN EN 

50014 to 50020/VDE 0170/0171, Parts 1 to 7, 

designated as VDE regulations, came into force 

on 1.5.1978. They contain constructional and 

test requirements for explosion-protected 

electrical apparatus for Zone 1. 

The certificates of conformity or inspection 

certificates issued by notified bodies of member 

states of the EC, which are issued on the basis 

of the tests carried out, are recognized by all 

member states of the European Union as type 

examination certificates. 

Explosion-protected apparatus according to the 

directive 76/117/EEC bear the Ex-symbol. 

After a transition period, as of July 1, 2003 the 

directives 94/9 EC of the European Parliament 

and Council for the harmonization of the 

statutory provisions of member states on 

apparatus and protective systems intended 

for use potentially explosive atmospheres dated 

23.3.1994 (directive 94/9/EC) will replace any 

existing directives on Explosion-Protection on a 

European level. 

This new Ex-directive was converted into 

national German law by the new “Explosion- 

Protection decree (ExVO)” issued in 

December 1996. 

Parallel to this, a revised version of the 

“Regulations concerning electrical 

installations in explosive atmospheres 

(ElexV)” was also issued in December 1996. 

Among other things, the new ATEX directive 

newly regulates the classification and marking of 

apparatus for use in hazardous areas. 

Apparatus is now classified as: 

Apparatus for mining 

operations: Apparatus Group I 

Apparatus for use in all other 

hazardous areas: Apparatus Group II 

This is divided further into apparatus categories 

that regulate the safety level of the apparatus for 

the respective zone: 

Categories 1, 2 and 3 

In addition to this, distinction is also made 

between apparatus for use in hazardous areas 

due to the presence of explosive gases, 

vapours or mists, code letter “G”, and 

apparatus for use in hazardous areas due to 

the presence of dust, code letter “D”. 

Apparatus for hazardous areas with the 

presence of explosive gases, vapours or mists 

Zone Apparatus category Marking 

0 1 II 1 G 

1 2 II 2 G 

2 3 II 3 G 

Apparatus for use in hazardous areas 

caused by dust 

Zone Apparatus category Marking 

20 1 II 1 D 

21 2 II 2 D 

22 3 II 3 D 

After successful completion of the type test 

within the scope of the conformity evaluation 

procedure, the authorized testing stations, now 

called notified bodies, issue an “EC Type 

Examination Certificate”. 

The majority of the products in this catalogue 

have already been certified in accordance 

with the new Explosion-Protection directive 

ATEX 100a or a certificate has been applied for. 

All the explosion-protected CEAG apparatus 

in this catalogue complies with the European 

standards EN 50014 to EN 500128 and can, 

therefore, be used in almost every country on 

earth. 

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH 0/2



To fulfil all requirements of the Explosion- 

Protection directive 94/9/EC (as well as of any 

further EC-directives which is applicable), 

the manufacturer issues an “EC Declaration 

of Conformity”. 

To allow free movement of goods throughout 

Europe, the CE marking 

shall be affixed to all apparatus to which this EC 

declaration of conformity applies. 

Hazardous areas due to the presence of 

explosive gases, vapours and mists 

Hazardous areas due to the presence of explosive 

gases, vapours and mists are classified into 

three zones. This classification depends on the 

probability of the occurrence of an explosive gas 

atmosphere. 

What electrical apparatus may be used in the 

individual zones? 

Zone 0 covers areas in which an explosive 

atmosphere caused by a mixture of air and 

gases, vapours or mists is present 

continuously, for long periods or frequently. 

Zone 0 mainly encompasses the areas inside 

closed containers, pipelines and apparatus 

which contain inflammable liquids. The 

respective operating temperature lies above the 

flash point. The hazardous area is above the 

liquid level and not within the liquid. 

With apparatus in the category 1 G (for 

Zone 0), in order to avoid ignition hazards 

resulting from electrical circuits of the apparatus, 

it is necessary to guarantee the specified degree 

of safety 

❒ in the event of two independent faults when 

only one protection measure is applied, or 

❒ in the event of the failure one protection 

measure, by means of a second, independent 

protective measure. 

These conditions are deemed fulfilled if, for 

example, the apparatus 

❒ is designed in the type of protection “ia” to EN 

50020, or 

❒ intrinsically safe apparatus to “ib” is also 

potted according to EN 50028. 

The requirements on apparatus with regard to 

electrostatic charges are considerably higher 

than those for Zone 1 or Zone 2. 

The constructional and testing requirements for 

electrical apparatus in apparatus Group II 1 G 

have been newly regulated in Europe. 

EN 50284 / VDE 0170/0171, Part 12 replaces 

special national arrangements as defined by the 

ATEX directive. 

Zone 1 covers areas in which the occasional 

occurrence of an explosive atmosphere due to 

the presence of gases, vapours or mists is likely. 

Inflammable or explosive substances are made, 

processed or stored in Zone 1. This includes the 

area surrounding charging doors, the immediate 

vicinity of filling and emptying devices, the immediate 

vicinity of fragile equipment and lines, 

as well as around cable glands on pumps and 

slides that do not seal adequately. The occurrence 

of an explosive atmosphere is likely during 

normal operation. 

With apparatus of the category 2 G (for Zone 1), 

it is either necessary to ensure that the occurrence 

of an ignition source is excluded, or the 

ignition source must be encapsulated by a 

recognized type of protection in such a way that 

the ignition of an explosive atmosphere 

surrounding the apparatus is prevented. This 

applies in Zone 1 for both normal, trouble-free 

operation and for the operating faults that 

commonly occur. The constructional and 

test regulations for the permissible types of 

protection are laid down in EN 50014 ff. 

The table on page 0/6 is a comparison of these 

types of protection for Zone 1 apparatus. 

Zone 2 covers areas in which the occurrence of 

an explosive atmosphere due to the presence of 

gases, vapours and mists is not likely, but if one 

should occur, then only rarely and only for a 

short period. 

Zone 2 encompasses areas around Zones 0 and 

1 and areas around flanged joints of pipelines in 

closed rooms. Furthermore, it includes areas in 

which, due to natural or forced ventilation, the 

lower explosion limit is reached in exceptional 

cases only, e.g. the surroundings of outdoor 

installations. 

Inflammable or potentially explosive materials 

are made and stored in Zone 2. In such a way 

that the probability of the occurrence of an 

explosive atmosphere is rare, and then only for a 

short time. 


0



Apparatus in the category 3 G (Zone 2) must 

be designed in such a way that it is safe during 

normal, trouble-free operation. All apparatus that 

fulfils the requirements for Zone 0, Zone 1 and 

Zone 2 may be used. The require-ments for 

electrical apparatus specially designed for use in 

Zone 2 have been newly regulated in EN 50021. 

In future the previous practice of also using 

apparatus of “good industrial quality” in Zone 2, 

a common practice in some countries, will not be 

possible without additions. Zone 2 apparatus to 

EN 50021 provides a level of protection that is 

considerably higher than that of standard 

industrial apparatus. 

Similarly, in the new standard , the requirements 

for Zone 2 apparatus according to previous 

national standards are considerably higher. 

The type of protection “n” applies for Zone 2 

apparatus: apparatus that cannot ignite a 

surrounding explosive atmosphere under normal 

and certain abnormal operating conditions. 

In addition to this, distinction is made between 

apparatus that does normally not produce arcs/ 

sparks and/or hot surfaces “non-sparking 

apparatus” and apparatus that produce sparks/ 

arcs and/or hot surfaces “sparking apparatus”. 

The Explosion-Protection methods resulting from 

this were derived, in part, from the types of 

protection for Zone 1/category 2 apparatus, 

whereby they were adapted for Zone 2/category 

3 apparatus on a lower level. 

Non-sparking apparatus “nA”: 

The risk of the occurrence of sparks/arcs and/or 

hot surfaces during normal operation is minimized 

by constructional measures. 

Sparking apparatus: 

Here sparks/arcs and/or hot surfaces occur 

during normal operation: The following protection 

methods are permissible: 

Apparatus with protected contacts: “nC” 

This includes enclosed switchgear, non-ignitable 

components, hermetically sealed, sealed and 

encapsulated devices. 

Restricted breathing apparatus: “nR” 

Apparatus with simplified pressurization: “nP” 

Limited power apparatus: “nL” 


dust/air mixtures: 


inflammable dust/air mixtures are also subdivided 

into 3 zones that are comparable to the zones for 

explosive gas atmospheres. 

Zone 20 covers areas in which an explosive 

atmosphere due to dust/air mixtures is present 

continuously, for long periods or frequently. 

If these conditions occur, they are usually found 

in closed containers, pipelines, apparatus, etc. 

Zone 21 covers areas in which the occurrence 

of an explosive atmosphere due to dust/air 

mixtures is to be expected occasionally. 

This can, for e/xample, include areas in the 

immediate vicinity of dust extraction or filling 

stations and areas where dust deposits can 

occur and can form a potentially explosive 

concentration of inflammable dust mixed with 

air under normal operating conditions. 

Zone 22 covers areas in which the occurrence 

of an explosive atmosphere due to whirled-up 

dust is not likely, but, if it occurs, then in all 

probability only rarely and only for a short 

period. 

This can, for example, include areas in the 

vicinity of apparatus containing dust if dust can 

escape from leaks. 

In future only apparatus that fulfils the conditions 

of the directive 94/9/EC shall be used in these 

areas. Electrical apparatus in the type of 

protection “dust Explosion-Protection due to 

enclosure” must be built and tested in 

accordance with EN 50028-1-1, whereby, for 

the most part, this was based on the general 

requirements in accordance with EN 50014 for 

explosion-protected apparatus for gases, 

vapours and mists. 




With such dust explosion-protected apparatus, 

there are, among other things, given surface 

temperatures and minimum IP degrees of 

protection required. 

The approval amendments for dust Explosion- 

Protection in accordance with directive 94/9/EC 

are already available for many of the explosionprotected 

light fittings and apparatus in this 

catalogue, or they have been applied for. 

Classification of apparatus 

In accordance with the various properties of 

gases with regard to ignition temperature, 

ignition capability and flame transmission 

capacity, explosion-protected electrical 

apparatus is divided into explosion groups and 

temperature classes. 

Division of explosion-protected apparatus 

into explosion groups 

To specify the scope of application of explosionprotected 

electrical apparatus, it is sub-divided 

into two groups: 

Group I: Electrical apparatus for use 

in mines susceptible to the hazard of 

firedamp 

Group II: Electrical apparatus for use in all 

other hazardous areas 

A further sub-division of the Explosion Group II 

into “A”, “B” and “C” is prescribed for the types 

of protection “flameproof enclosure” and 

“intrinsic safety”. 

With the type of protection “flameproof 

enclosure” this sub-division is made according 

to the maximum experimental safe gap for the 

non-transmission of an internal ignition (MESG), 

whereas with the type of protection “intrinsic 

safety” this sub-division is made according to 

the ratio of the minimum ignition current of the 

mixture being tested to the minimum ignition 

current of a mixture of laboratory methane and 

air (MIC). Group II C apparatus is suitable for 

use in all types of gas atmospheres. 

Division of explosion-protected apparatus 

into temperature classes 

The ignition temperature is the lowest temperature 

of a surface at which an explosive 

atmosphere will ignite. 

Gases and vapours can be divided into 

temperature classes according to their ignition 

temperatures. This results in a sub-division of 

explosion-protected electrical apparatus into the 

temperature classes T1 to T6. This classification 

allows explosion-protected apparatus to be 

used economically. 

The maximum surface temperature of an 

apparatus must always be lower than the 

ignition temperature of the gas/air or vapour/air 

mixture. 

Generally speaking, explosion-protected 

apparatus must be suitable for an ambient 

temperature from -20 °C to +40 °C. 

The following tables show both the division of 

explosion-protected apparatus according to 

the temperature classes and examples of 

the classification of gases and vapours in 

accordance with the explosion groups and 

temperature classes. 

Temperature class Max. surface 

temperature 

T1 450 °C 

T2 300 °C 

T3 200 °C 

T4 135 °C 

T5 100 °C 

T6 85 °C 

Classification of gases and vapours into explosion groups and temperature classes 

T 1 T 2 T 3 T 4 T 5 T 6 

I Methane 

II A Acetone, Ethane, Ethylalcohol Petrol Acetaldehyde 

Ethylacetate, Ammonia, i-amylacetate Diesel-fuel Ethyl-ether 

Benzol, Acetic acid, n-butane Aviation-fuel 

Carbonmonoxide, n-butylalcohol Heating-oils, 

Methanol, Propane, Toluene n-hexane 

II B Town gas (lamp gas) Ethylene 

II C Hydrogen Acetylene Carbondisulphide 


0

Types of Protection according to European Standard 

Type of 

Protection 



Symbols IEC/EN Principle Applications 

Flameproof 

enclosure 

d 

IEC 60079-1 

EN 50018 

Power-operated apparatus, 

switchgear, motors 

(all types of apparatus producing ignitable 

arcs in normal operation) 

Sand IEC 60079-5 Capacitors, electronic 

q 

filling 

EN 50017 components, fuses 

Pressuri- IEC 60079-2 Power-operated apparatus 

p 

zation 

EN 50016 (active safety measures required) 

Oil immersion o 

IEC 60079-6 

EN 50015 

sand filled 

Transformers (rarely used) 

Encap- IEC 60079-18 Measurement and control devices, 

m 

sulation 

EN 50028 relays, electronic circuits 

Increased 

safety 

e 

IEC 60079-7 

EN 50019 

Connection and distribution boxes, 

light fittings, measuring instruments, 

squirrel cage motors (no ignitable sparks 

in normal operation) 

Intrinsic IEC 60079-11 Measurement and control devices, 

i 

safety 

EN 50020 data processing (low electric values) 

oil filled 

Encapsulation material 

sparks 




eLLK 92036/36 

 

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH, Senator-Schwartz-Ring 26, 59494 Soest 

S. Nr.: D123456 2000 II 2 G 0102 

PTB 96 ATEX 2144 110-254 V 50-60 Hz 

EEx ed IIC T4 110-230 V DC 

Lampe: G13-81-IEC-1305-2 Ta ≤ 50 °C 


 

 

PTB Nr. Ex-92.C.1801 X 

 

 

 

 

 

Type label according to new directive 94/9/EC 

eLLK 92036/36 

EEx ed IIC T4 110-254 V 50-60 Hz 

Lampe: G13-IEC-1305-2 

110-230 V DC 

Ser. Nr.: D189115 Tu ≤ 50 °C 

 

 

 

Type label according to previous directive 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Marking of explosion-protected apparatus 

As, until the transition period expires, both the 

previous basic Explosion-Protection directive 

76/117/EEC, supplemented by the individual 

Explosion-Protection directive 79/196/EEC, and 

the new Explosion-Protection directive 94/9/EC 

are valid, there are two valid parallel certification 

procedures and marking methods for explosionprotected 

apparatus. 

By way of example, the two type labels for an 

explosion-protected light fitting for fluorescent 

lamps show both the marking according to the 

previous directive and the marking according to 

the new directive. 

Name / Code of manufacturer 

Type code 

Address of manufacturer 

Year of manufacture 

Community marking for explosion-protected 

apparatus in accordance with directive 

76/117/EEC 

Marking of apparatus in accordance with 

directive 94/9/EC: 

for use in hazardous areas: II 

apparatus Group II for use in Zone 1 areas 

category: 2 

for use in gas hazardous areas: G 

CE marking confirming conformity with all 

requirements of the applicable directives for 

the product. The number next to the CE 

marking (only typical for ATEX) stands for the 

notified body involved in the production 

quality system (in this case PTB) 

Testing station (notified body) and number of 

certificate (“X” after number means that 

special conditions must be observed) 

Marking of apparatus in accordance with the 

European Standards for the construction 

and testing of explosion-protected 

apparatus: 

EEx: built and tested according to the 

European Standards 

e d: types of protection used according to 

the European Standards 

II C: explosion group 

T 4: temperature class 

Serial number 

Technical data 


0



Degrees of protection in accordance with EN 

60529 

Because they are often used in outdoor installations 

and often come into contact with dust and 

water, as well as with other environmental influences 

caused by chemical media, explosionprotected 

electrical apparatus are subjected to 

particularly extreme operating conditions. In 

accordance with the constructional and test 

requirements explosion-protected apparatus must, 

therefore, satisfy the requirements for a minimum 

degree of protection, normally IP 54. The 

IP degrees of protection according to EN 60529 

are defined according to the protection against 

inadvertent contact, foreign matter and water. 

The degrees of protection against solid foreign 

matter are designated by the first code number 

Degrees of protection against water are designated 

by the second code number 

Example: IP 65: dust-tight, protected against jet 

water 

First Degree of Protection Second Degree of Protection 

Number Number 

0 No special protection 0 No special protection 

1 Protected against solid foreign 1 Protected against vertically 

bodies 50 mm and larger dripping water 

2 Protected against solid foreign 2 Protected against dripping water when 

bodies 12,5 mm and larger the enclosure is inclined up to 15 °C 

3 Protected against solid foreign 3 Protected against spray water being 

bodies 2,5 mm and larger sprayed at an angle up to 60 ° 

4 Protected against solid foreign 4 Protected against splash water from 

bodies 1 mm and larger any direction 

5 Dust protected 5 Protected against jet water from any 

direction 

6 Dust-tight 6 Protected against powerful water jets 

from any direction 

7 Protected against water when the enclosure 

is immersed in water for a specified time 

8 Protected against water when the 

enclosure is continuously submerged 


Table of Comparison of Types of Protection 

Type of Protection EN Standards IEC Standards 

General 

requirements EN 50014 IEC 60 079-0 

Increased 

safety „e“ EN 50019 IEC 60 079-7 

Flameproof 

enclosure „d“ EN 50018 IEC 60 079-1 

Intrinsic 

safety „i“ EN 50020 IEC 60 079-11 

Oil immersion „o“ EN 50015 IEC 60 079-6 

Pressurization 

„p“ EN 50016 IEC 60 079-3 

Powder 

filling „q“ EN 50017 IEC 60 079-5 

Encapsulation 

„m“ EN 50028 IEC 60 079-18 

Type of 

protection „n“ EN 50021 IEC 60 079-15 

Regulations and Approvals 

Outside the EC Jurisdiction 

Outside the jurisdiction of directive 94/9/EC (EC 

area) there are other standards and approvals 

that apply for the operation of electrical 

apparatus for use in hazardous areas. 

National approvals on the basis of the EN 

directives 

The majority of the eastern European countries 

such as Russia, Poland, Hungary, etc. have their 

own certification bodies that issue their own 

approvals on the basis of the current EC type 

examination certificates. These are requisite for 

the installation and operation of electrical 

apparatus in hazardous areas in these countries. 

CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH is in possession 

of approvals for the products listed in this 

catalogue in many of these countries. Details 

of this can be found at the beginning or end of 

the product chapter. 

Non-European approvals 

In addition to the EN standard, the IEC, as a 

worldwide standard, is an important basis for 

the approval of explosion-protected apparatus. 

A comparison shows the similarity of content 

to the European standards. Thus, almost all 

of the IEC standards can be compared to EN 

standards that say the same or are similar 

in content. 

Table of Comparison – IEC - NEC - CEC Classification 

Approvals to the “Australian Standard AS ...” 

can, for example, be classed with the IEC circle. 

Explosion-Protection in North America 

The IEC/EN approach to Explosion-Protection 

differs to the engineering practices in North 

America. Here, to name one example, they use 

closed conduit systems with potted ignition 

barriers. Other criteria also apply for the 

classification. In addition to the “hazardous 

(classified) locations” Class I (gases, vapours 

and mists), there are Class II (dusts) and 

Class III (fibres). These design regulations 

and classifications are laid down in the NEC 

regulation, Sections 500 to 505, valid for the 

USA, and in the CEC standard, Section 18, 

valid for Canada. In addition to this the areas 

are divided into Division 1 and Division 2. 

Due to the introduction of the IEC zone classification 

concept in Canada in 1988 and in the 

USA in 1996 (amendment of NEC, Article 505 

and of CEC), the use of a comparable 

technology became possible. 

Gases, vapours or mists Dusts Fibres 

Class I Class II Class III 

Regulation USA NEC 500-5 NEC 505-7 NEC 500-6 NEC 500-7 

Regulation Canada CEC J18-004 CEC 18-006 CEC 18-008 CEC 18-010 

Classification Division 1 Zone 0 

Zone 1 

Division 1 Division 1 

Group 

Division 2 Zone 2 Division 2 Division 2 

(Groups to NEC 500 .. 

or CEC J18-050 

- 3 - 7 - 3 

Div. 1 and 2 Zone 0, 1, 2 Div. 1 and 2 

A (acetylene) II C (acetylene, hydrogen) E (metals) --- 

B (hydrogen) II B (ethylene) F (coals) 

Temperature classes 

C (ethylene) 

D (propane) 

II A (propane) G (grain) 

Class I Div. 1 and 2 Zone 0, 1 and 2 Div. 1 and 2 none 

T1 ≤ 450 °C T1 ≤ 450 °C T1 ≤ 450 °C 

T2 ≤ 300 °C T2 ≤ 300 °C T2 ≤ 300 °C 

T2A ≤ 280 °C; T2B ≤ 260 °C T2A ≤ 280 °C; T2B ≤ 260 °C 

T2C ≤ 230 °C; T2D ≤ 215 °C T2C ≤ 230 °C; T2D ≤ 215 °C 

T3 ≤ 200 °C; T3A ≤ 180 °C T3 ≤ 200 °C T3 ≤ 200 °C; T3A ≤ 180 °C 

T3B ≤ 165 °C; T3C ≤ 160 °C T3B ≤ 165 °C; T3C ≤ 160 °C 

T4 ≤ 135 °C; T4A ≤ 120 °C T4 ≤ 135 °C T4 ≤ 135 °C; T4A ≤ 120 °C 

T5 ≤ 100 °C T5 ≤ 100 °C T5 ≤ 100 °C 

T6 ≤ 85 °C T6 ≤ 85 °C T6 ≤ 85 °C 


0

Nowadays explosion-protected electrical 

apparatus is often made in the economical type 

of protection “increased safety”. This calls for 

the use of high-grade, specially selected and 

tested plastics that meet the high requirements 

and provide a high mechanical, thermal and 

chemical stability. 

The plastics listed in the table beside have been 

used in practice for years and have proved to 

be reliable. 

The table beside gives details issued by the 

manufacturers of the plastics relating to the 

chemical stability of the plastics listed compared 

to a series of media. 

These details can, however, only be applied 

up to a degree for the evaluation of the usability 

of explosion-protected electrical apparatus in 

chemical and petrochemical installations, as 

the aggressive atmosphere often only occurs 

for a short time and in a relatively low 

concentration. 

Chemical Stability of Plastics for 

Explosion-Protected Apparatus 

Material Polyamide Polyester Polycarbonate 

AAcetone 

+ + – 

Ethyl alcohol (up to 30 %) O + 0,96 % 

Ethyl glycol O + + 

Ammonia (at 23 °C) + + 10 % – 

Benzene 60/140 °C + + + 

Benzol (at 23 °C) + + – 

Boric acid 3 % + + + 

Butane + + + 

Chlorine bleaching solution O + 

Chloric gas (damp) O + – 

Chloride of lime O + + 

Chromic acid 10 % – + + 

Cyclohexane + + + 

Diesel oil + + + 

Jet fuel + + + 

Acetic acid (up to 25 %) O + + 10 °C 

Formaldehyde + + + 

Glycol + + + 

Glycerine + + + 

Uric acid (up to 20 %) + + + 

Fuel oil + + + 

Machinery oil O + + 

Sea water + + + 

Methyl alcohol O + O 

Lactic acid, conc. 20 % + + + 

Mineral oil + + 

Sodium chloride O + + 

Soda lye (20 - 25 °C) + + 5 % – 

Petroleum + + – 

Phosporic acid, conc. – + + 

Soap suds (at 23 °C) + + + 

Sulphuric acid 5 - 30 % and 70 % O + + 

Sulphuric dioxide, dry (at 23 °C) + + O 

Super fuel (up to 60 °C) + + – 

Turpentine (at 23 °C) + + – 

Tartaric acid O + + up to 10 % 

Citric acid up to 32 % + + + 

Explanation of symbols: 

+ = stable O = limited stability – = non-stable 





1

Regulations for the Use and 

Safety of Explosion-Protected 


Use of explosion-protected 

portable lamps 

Obligations of the user 

According to the German national standard 

“ElexV” the user must, among other things, 

observe the information given in the operating 

instructions and the markings on the type label 

of the lamps. Moreover, regular maintenance 

and inspection are required. Before putting 

an explosion-protected lamp into operation, it 

is necessary to check whether the type of 

protection and the temperature class allow it to 

be used in the respective potentially explosive 

atmosphere. 

Safety requirements 

Explosion-protected portable lamps must not be 

opened in explosive atmosheres. Similarly, 

batteries may only be charged outside the 

hazardous area. 

Safety of explosion-protected 


Explosion-protected portable lamps 

Explosion-protected portable lamps are predominantly 

used for industrial applications 

such as security patrols, inspections and 

repair work. The police and fire brigade 

use explosion-protected lamps to ensure 

safety at the scene of an accident, in case 

explosive substances are present. Besides 

reliability and safety, explosion-protected 

portable lamps must meet the standard 

requirements of handling, weight, lighting 

properties and operating time. 

Since there are no physical barriers between 

the hazardous areas which are subdivided into 

zones, special attention has to be paid to 

portable electrical apparatus. For this reason 

CEAG has had all its portable lamps approved 

for Zone 1 hazardous areas. Zone 2 is 

automatically included. CEAG also offers a 

solution for Zone 0 which exists for example, 

in closed containers. 

Explosive gases and vapours are subdivided 

into explosion groups and temperature classes. 

With the exception of carbon bisulphide, 

all explosive gases and vapours known 

to date have been classified in temperature 

classes T1 to T4. This means that the 

powerful CEAG portable searchlights can 

be employed almost anywhere. For those 

applications which require temperature class 

T5 or T6 lamps, the series Stabex M0, HE 5 or 

Stabex mini are available. 

Housings 

The lights described in this catalogue are 

mainly made of high-quality impact resistant 

plastic (eg. polyamide or polycarbonate). 

By adding conductive substances, a surface 

resistance for the housing is achieved which 

prevents an electrostatic charge. All plastics 

used can be recycled. 

Housings of explosion-protected electrical 

apparatus must conform to IP 54 protection 

as a minimum. The protection symbols 

acc. to EN 60529 are represented by two 

code numbers. The higher the number of 

the protection degree of, the higher the 

respective protection rating. 

Code designation 

for degree of protection: “IP 65“ 

Ingress protection 

Protection against contact and 

foreign matter 

Protection against water 

Basically, outer scratch resistant mineral 

glass panes are used for the light aperture. 

This ensures that, inspite of rough use, the light 

aperture remains clear for the duration of its 

use. The impact resistance to EN is achieved 

by a special compound technique. 

Ergonomics 

The elegant housings are not only distinguished 

by an attractive design and a unity of form, 

they also answer their purpose as far as 

handling and functioning are concerned. 

All portable lamps are designed for “singlehanded 

operation”. This means they can be 

switched on and off with one hand, while the 

other hand is free for other tasks. 


Focussing of HE 8 

Lighting and Battery Technology 

for Explosion-Protected 


Lighting technology 

for explosion-protected 


Lighting technology 

Depending on their use, explosion-protected 

portable lamps are required to have different 

luminous intensity distributions, such as a 

broad beam (working light) or a spotlight. This 

is achieved by the use of powerful lamps and 

different systems of focussing the light. 

In the new types of CEAG lights the need to 

be able to focus the light has been realized by 

the use of an adjustable reflector. This kind of 

reflector enables focussing a broad beam into 

a spotlight. Different slip-on filters enable a 

change of light colour. A novel dispersive filter 

composed of many small prisms enables 

the beam of light to be broadened without a 

major loss of working light. 

Halogen lamps with a double bulb 

The luminous intensity of explosion-protected 

lights depends on the temperature class in 

the range of which the light shall be used. 

Halogen lamps have a very bright, white light, 

but due to their high surface temperature 

their light output must be limited. By means of a 

special method, whereby the halogen lamp is 

provided with a “double bulb”, CEAG has 

considerably increased the useful light output. 

Thus, explosion-protected lights can make 

optimum use of the advantages of the halogen 

lamp (high light output, pleasant light colour and 

long service life). 

Guidance of light 

In order to achieve optimum lighting properties, 

all components are analyzed, calculated and 

measured. The development and manufacture 

of the series are based on the results of our 

in-house light laboratory. The range diagrams 

essential for a portable lamp, have been derived 

from the polar curves established by the 

light laboratory. These diagrams tell the user 

at what distance a round surface is irradiated 

with an illumination of min. 1 lux. With the 

following formula the illumination E (Lux) can be 

converted for different distances a (m). 

E x = 1 Lux 

a 2 

a 2 x 

a = distance for 1 Lux 

Focussing of Stabex HF 

Battery Technology 

The CEAG explosion-protected lamps can be 

fitted with rechargeable (secondary cells) or 

non-rechargeable batteries (primary cells). 

Which battery is best from an economical point 

of view depends on the respective application. If 

lamps are used on an irregular basis, highquality 

primary cells (alkaline manganese 

batteries) to IEC 86 should be used. If the lamps 

are used frequently, it is preferable to use gastight, 

rechargeable nickel cadmium batteries 

(NiCd). In addition to the fact that they are 

extremely econominal, the outstanding 

characteristics of these batteries are the 

constant voltage, the high energy density 

and the suitability for use in hazardous areas. 

Discharged NiCd batteries can easily be stored 

for several years. NiCd batteries have to be 

recylcled and are almost 100 % reusable. 

Rechargeable battery for SEB 8 


1

100% 

75% 

➤ 

Battery capacity 

33% 

10% 

Standby light 

0% 

Operating time 

5.0 h 3.8 h 1.5 h 0.5 h Main light 

Function “Indication of residual operating time” HE 8 N 

100 - 75 % 74 - 33 % 32 - 0 % 


green red off 

LED 

Standby light 

6,5 5,2 3,9 2,6 1,3 0 

25 20 15 10 5 2 0 

➤ 


Main light (h) 

Standby light (h) 

0 -20% 21 - 40% 41 -60% 61 -80% 81 - 100% 

red green 

LEDs 

Intelligent Lighting Electronics 

for Explosion-Protected 


Charge state indication 

Unlike with lead batteries, the charge state of 

NC batteries cannot be determined by means 

of the residual charge voltage, but must be 

calculated using an involved micro-processor 

technology. CEAG offers various systems for 

this in their portable lamps. 

HE 8 

With lamps of the series HE 8 N/EURO PLUS 

the remaining duration and the charge state is 

indicated in three stages via a two-coloured 

LED display. This means that the operator is 

always informed about the state of the battery 

and can, therefore, reach a safe place before 

the batteries are completely run down. If the 

main filament breaks or when the operating life 

expires, the HE 8 N EN automatically switches 

over to the less powerful standby filament. 

Thus, a sudden loss of light is avoided. If the 

standby filament continues to be discharged, a 

protective circuit arrangement switches off the 

lamp after approx. 0.5 hours. 

SEB 8 

The complicated lighting electronics in the 

explosion-protected searchlight SEB 8 features 

5 LEDs that indicate the residual capacity in 

20 % stages. If the residual capacity falls below 

the 20 % limit, a red LED warns the operator. 

Before the overdischarge protection stage is 

reached, the powerful main light switches over 

to the weaker standby light to give the 

operator an optical signal and to conserve 

energy. If, to ward off any hazards, it is 

necessary to continue to operate the standby 

lamp, the standby lamp can be switched over 

to manual operation, whereby the monitoring 

electronics is bridged. 

Safety functions 

Each time the light is switched on, the lighting 

electronics check the function of the standby 

lamp. If the main lamp fails, the light is 

switched over automatically to the standby 

lamp. The fault is signalized by the flashing 

red LED. 

Service circuit 

Lights of the series SEB 8 feature a unique 

service circuit that calculates the remaining 

capacity according to the ageing of the battery 

and adapts the charge data accordingly. 

This ensures a gentle, service-life prolonging 

battery charge at all times. In addition, the 

operator is also given information on the 

state of the battery with regard to ageing and 

can, therefore, replace the batteries at an 

appropriate point in time. This means that 

hazards resulting from changing the batteries 

too early or too late are avoided. 

The service test is fully automatic. 

Servicing 

14 h charging 

Discharging 

with capacity 

measurement 

News calculation of 

charge characteristic 

Charging 

acc. to new 

characteristic 

Indication of 

battery status 


Possible Applications for 

Explosion-Protected Hand Lamps 

The right light for every type of operation 

Each type of operation calls for a specially 

selected light. The requirements for lights for 

inspection work, where a searchlight is rarely 

needed or is only needed for a short time, are 

different to those for lights for repair work, 

where a powerful, robust light with a long 

operating life is needed all the time. 

The CEAG range provides a suitable light 

for almost every application possible. 

Due to their size and the use of primary cells, 

the mini and the HF Stabex torches and the 

HE5 pocket torches are suited for inspections 

on an irregular basis and as a constant 

companion for security personnel. The 

Stabex HF-L version with rechargeable NC 

cells is suitable for frequent operations. Here, 

the extra costs for the rechargeable cells and 

the charger unit often pay for themselves 

within a relatively short time considering the 

maintenance costs for replacing empty 

batteries. 

Table: Features of the explosion-protected hand lamps 

The powerful HE 8 hand lamps are either 

fitted with rechargeable cells or with primary 

batteries and can be used as work lights or 

searchlights. 

The robust SEB 8 light series is used by the 

mobile task forces of fire brigades and rescue 

services, as well as for maintenance and 

repair work in all hazardous areas. It meets 

the requirements of the fire brigade standard 

DIN 14642. A luminous intensity of 15,000 cd 

allows light to be projected up to 150 m. 

A consistent working light can be achieved 

with a diffusing lens, that is supplied with the 

lamp. Due to the duty cycle of ca. 6.5 h, long 

operation times do not pose a problem. 

Type of Primary Secondary Built-in mains External 12/24 V Special features 

light fitting cells cells charger mains charger charger 

Stabex mini 2 x R6/LR6 - - - - Single-handed operation 

Stabex HF 2 x R20/LR20 - - - - Can be focussed 

Stabex HF-L - 2 x 4 Ah - LG 493 - Can be focussed 

Stabex M0 2 x R20/LR20 - - - - Use in Zone 0 

HE 5 EN 1 x 3R12 - - - - Extremely flat design 

HE 8 N EN - 3 x 4 Ah - LG 483 - Indication of residual 

operating time, red signal 

HE 8 EURO 3 x R20/LR20 - - - - light, can be focussed 

HE 8 EURO PLUS - 3 x 4 Ah Plug-in - - Indication of residual operating 

charger time, can be focussed 

SEB 8 - 4 x 7 Ah - LG 443 Car holder 90 Capacity indication, can be 

focussed, standby light, 

servicing circuit 

SEB 8 L - 4 x 7 Ah yes LG 443 Car holder 90 Capacity indication, can be 

focussed, standby light, 

servicing circuit, mains 

charger cable with plug 

HLE 7 L EN - 3 x 7 Ah yes - - Flexible cable from battery 

to headpiece 


1

Ex-Torches 

Stabex mini 

Stabex HF 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Scratch resistant mineral glass 

Halogen bulb 

– Stabex HF 

Light cone can be focussed 

– Stabex HF 

Single-handed operation 

due to ergonomically 

designed switch 

Handy shape 

Degree of protection 

Description 

The Stabex mini and Stabex HF range of 

explosion-protected torchlights meets the 

requirements of EN 50014 to 50020. 

The lights are suitable for use in Zone 1, 

Zone 2, Zone 21 and Zone 22. Within the 

temperature class T5 (Stabex mini) and T4 

(Stabex HF) they are suitable for almost 

any hazardous area (with the exception 

of carbon bisulphide, T6). 

Because of their compact design, the 

torches are used for security patrols and 

inspection duties. In hazardous areas a 

light source must be available which is 

independent from the mains supply, and 

because of its handy shape and low 

weight, the Stabex mini provides guaranteed 

safety for anybody within the 

hazardous area. The Stabex HF model is 

equipped with a halogen lamp and can be 

uniformly focussed for short and long 

ranges. 

The housing is made of non-abrasive, 

impact resistant plastic material. All 

plastic materials can be recycled. The 

ergonomically designed light switch is 

easily operated by means of a sliding 

switch. 

The Stabex mini is fitted with 2 dry cells 

size AA and the Stabex HF with 2 dry cells 

size D. 

The Stabex HF-L model is equipped with 

an EEx e certified handle containing 

2 NiCd accumulators, that can be 

recharged in the LG 493 charger. By 

replacing the complete handle with NiCd 

batteries, the new Stabex HF can be 

converted into a rechargeable version. 

Due to the special design of the battery 

housing, a special locking device is not 

required. Thus, the batteries can easily 

be replaced outside of the hazardous area, 

no special tool being required. 

Further approvals 

● Sea-Profession Trade Association 

● Hungary 

● Czech Republic 

● Slovakia 

● Russia 

● US/Canada 


25 

25 

2 

Stabex mini 

Stabex mini 

Range diagram 

15 

69 

Stabex HF 

Charger LG 493 

3 

Stabex HF 

Range diagram 

63 125 cm/Ø 

4 

1 Lux 

5 10 m 

48 

6 

10 

120 cm/Ø 

1 Lux 

25 m 

Ex-Torches 

Stabex mini 

Stabex HF 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Stabex mini 

Type of protection EEx ib e IIC T5 

EC-Type Examiniation Certificate PTB 98 ATEX 2061 

Marking to 94/9/EC II 2 G/ II 2 D* 

Enclosure material Polycarbonate / black 

Light aperture Ø 23 mm, mineral glass 

Tungsten lamp 2.2 V / 0.4 A 

Degree of protection IP 65 acc. to EN 60529 

Permissible ambient temperature 

-20 °C to +40 °C 

Specified data: 0 °C bis +30 °C (battery) 

Battery 2 dry cells AA-size, IEC 86 R 6 / LR 6 

Operating cycle Dry cells, approx. 8 h 

Weight 

Stabex HF/HF-L 

approx. 0.07 kg (without batteries) 


EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 98 ATEX 2062 

Marking to 94/9/EC 

II 2 G 

II 2 D* 

Enclosure material Polyamide / black 


Halogen lamp 2,8 V / 0,5 A 



-20 °C to +40 °C 

Specified data: 0 °C to +30 °C (battery) 

Battery 

Stabex HF 

Stabex HF-L 

2 dry cells D-size IEC 86 R 20 / LR 20 

2 rechargeable NiCd accumulators 

Operating cycle Dry cells approx. 12 h, NiCd approx. 7 h 

Weight 


approx. 0.25 kg (without batteries) 

Input voltage 220 - 250 V AC, ±10 % 50/60 Hz 

Recharge period max. 14 h. (depending on the state of charge) 

Weight 

* II 2 D applied for 

approx. 1.3 kg 

Ordering details 

Type Scope of delivery Order No. 

Stabex mini with lamp, without battery (min. purchase of 10 units) 1 1358 000 001 

Stabex HF with lamp, without battery 1 1359 000 001 

Stabex HF-L (rechargeable) with lamp and battery 1 1359 000 010 

Accessories 

Type Order No. 

Charger LG 493 (220 - 250 V ± 10 %) for Stabex HF-L 1 1540 000 493 

10 lamps 2.2 V/0.4 A for Stabex mini 3 1358 000 070 

10 lamps 2.8 V/0.5 A for Stabex HF 3 1359 000 070 

Handle incl. 2 NiCd batteries for Stabex HF or HF-L 2 1359 200 000 

Dimensions in mm 

Ø 60 

Ø 32 

166 

Stabex mini 

220 

Stabex HF 

Ø 22 

Ø 44 

163.5 

129 

111.5 


151.5 


1

Ex-Torch 

Stabex M0 

■ Ergonomic switch design 

makes it suitable for 

operation in either hand 

■ Handy protective sheathing 

■ Carrying strap for safe 

handling 

■ Extremely robust housing made 

of stainless steel and bronze 

■ Double safety 

due to dual 

explosion categories 

■ Multipart front pane made 

of mineral glass 

Description 

The Stabex M0 explosion-protected torch 

has specifically been approved for use in 

Zone 0 hazardous areas up to the 

temperature class T6, as well as for the 

explosion groups IIA, IIB and IIC (with the 

exception of carbon bisulphide, T6). It was 

specially developed as an inspection lamp 

for empty gas or mineral oil tanks where 

the permanent hazard of an explosive gas 

atmosphere can exist. The use or the 

Stabex M0 in Zone 0 hazardous areas 

requires the keeping of a maintenance 

record. There is no restriction to its useful 

life. The torchlight may be operated 

without additional safety measures up to 5 

metres above ground level. After use, the 

lamp must not be left in the Zone 0 

hazardous area. The rotary switch is 

designed for single-handed operation. 

Even when safety gloves are worn, it can 

be operated without difficulty. The housing 

of the extremely robust torch is made of 

stainless steel and bronze which prevents 

the generation of ignitable sparks due to 

impact. The multipart front pane is made of 

mineral safety glass. The Zone 0 safety 

requirements are met, since a permanent 

overlapping of 2 to 3 explosion categories 

is provided for. The torch is equipped with 

2 dry cells size D according 8 IEC 86 LR20 

which are impact-protected by a metal 

sheath. 


● Hungary 

● Slovakia 

● Russia 


Stabex M0 (Zone 0) 

14 

63 

70 

2,5 

2 10 

Range diagram 

120 cm/Ø 

1 Lux 

16 m 

Ex-Torch 

Stabex M0 (Zone 0) 


;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; @@@ ÀÀÀ ;;; QQQ ¢¢¢ 






;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; 

;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; 

;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; 

;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; 

;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; 

;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; 

;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; @@ ÀÀ ;; 

Zone 0/ 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Stabex M0 

Type of protection EEx ib ed IIC T6 


Marking to 94/9/EC II 1 G 

Housing Stainless steel / bronze 




Max. permitted height of fall 5 m 


-20 °C to +40 °C 

Specified date: 0 °C to +30 °C (battery) 

Battery 2 dry cells D-size IEC 86 R 20 / LR 20 

Operating cycle approx. 12 h (Alkali manganese battery) 

Luminous flux approx. 12 lm 

Weight approx. 2.2 kg (without battery) 



Stabex M0 with lamp and battery 1 1350 000 001 

Accessories 


5 lamps 2.5 V / 0.3 A 2 2041 820 000 

Protective sheath for battery 3 1350 001 024 

Overlapping of explosion categories 

Dimnensions in mm 

"e" "ib" "d" 

Ø 80 

195 


Ø 43 

1

Ex-Pocket Torch 

HE 5 EN 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Scratch resistant mineral glass 

Combined light distribution by 

means of parabolic reflector 

and fresnel lens 

Temperature class T6; 

thus suitable for all explosive 

gases and vapours 

Handy shape 

Attractive housing and 

ergonomic design 

Description 

The HE 5 EN pocket torch meets the 

requirements of EN 50014 to 50020 and 

has been approved for use in Zones 1 and 

2 hazardous areas up to temperature class 

T6. Since this temperature class covers all 

gases and vapours known at present, 

there is no restriction to the use of the 

HE 5 EN pocket lamp in Zones 1 and 2. 

The lamp is particularly suitable for control 

and inspection duties. Due to its flat, handy 

shape it can be put in any pocket. There is 

also a strap for fastening the lamp to 

clothing or to a belt. By the use of both a 

parabolic reflector and a fresnel lens, a light 

distribution is obtained which equally 

serves short and long distances. The 

housing material is a non-abrasive, impact 

resistant and anti-static plastic acc. to EN. 

All plastics used can be recycled. The 

battery is a (flat) 4.5 V dry battery to 

IEC 86 3 R 12. 


● Slovakia 

● Russia 

● Canada 

● USA 


11 

63 

HE 5 EN 

29 

2,5 

2 10 

Range diagram 

63 cm/Ø 

1 Lux 

16 m 

Ex-Pocket Torch 

HE 5 EN 


HE 5 EN 







Switch slide-switch „ON - OFF“ 



-20 °C to +40 °C 


Battery Standard flat battery 4.5 V (IEC 86 3 R 12) 

Duration approx. 6 h 

Weight approx. 0.14 kg (without battery) 



HE 5 EN with bulb, without battery 1 1125 000 111 

Accessories 


10 lamps 3.75 V / 0.3 A 2 2041 810 000 


44 77 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 


123 

1

Ex-Hand Lamp 

HE 8 N EN 

■ Reversible to red signal light 

by light switch 

■ Gentle charge dependent on 

the drawn capacity 

■ Degree of protection IP 65 

■ Elegant, 

ergonomic design 

■ Indication of residual operating 

time and charging state 

■ Safety circuit in case of a 

broken filament or an 

exhausted battery 

Description: 

This powerful hand lamp has been 

developed for use in Zone 1, Zone 2, 

Zone 21 and Zone 22 hazardous areas. 

It is used for inspection and repair work, 

security patrols, and in railway workshops 

and shunting yards. The lamp has been 

designed for single-handed operation. 

By means of the light switch it can be 

switched over to a red signal light, which is 

produced by 4 new light emitting diodes 

visible at a long range. The working light 

can be uniformly focussed for a short and 

long range. In conjunction with the LG 483 

charger, the light is automatically switched 

on in the event of a mains failure (nonmaintained 

system mode). While the 

working light is switched on, an electronic 

indication of the residual operating time is 

provided. During the charging process the 

charging state is also indicated. In case of 

a broken filament or at the end of the duty 

cycle, the hand lamp automatically 

switches over to the stand by light. The 

built-in safety circuit prevents the deep 

discharge of the battery. 

The material employed is a non-abrasive, 

mechanically robust plastic acc. to EN. 

All plastics can be recycled. 

The battery insert is fitted with a rechargeable 

NiCd battery (3.6 V/4 Ah). The lamp 

is charged in the LG 483 charger. When 

the battery is charged, only the amount 

of energy that has been used will be 

replaced. 



● Hungary 


● Slovakia 

● Russia 

● Canada 

● USA 


100% 

75% 

HE 8 N EN 

with charger LG 483 

11 

100 


35 

9 

3 10 

Range diagram 

105 cm/Ø 

1 Lux 

30 m 

33% 

10% 

Stand by light 

0% 

Duration 

5.0 h 3.8 h 1.5 h 0.5 h Main beam 

Function ”Indication of residual operating time” 

Ex-Hand Lamp 

HE 8 N EN 


HE 8 N EN 

Type of protection EEx e ib IIC T4 



II 2 G 

II 2 D* 



Incandescent lamp 3.75 V / 0.8 / 0.4 A 

Rotary switch 

3 positions 

„Main beam - OFF - signal light (red)“ 



-20 °C to +40 °C 


Battery Rechargeable NiCd battery (3.6 V/4 Ah) 

Operating time approx. 5 hours 

- Indication of residual operating time 

- Emergency light in event of mains failure 

Functions - Charge depending on the drawn capacity 

- Red signal light, switchable 

- Switching for standby light or in case of broken filament 

Weight 

LG 483 charger 

approx. 1.0 kg (with battery) 

Degree of protection IP 31 

Input voltage 220 - 250 V AC, ±10 % 50/60 Hz 

Input power 12 VA 

Recharge time max. 8 h (dep. on charging state) 

Weight 





HE 8 N EN with bulb and battery 1 1118 000 050 

Accessories 


Charger LG 483 (HE 8 N EN) 1 1540 000 483 

Battery pack HE 8 N EN (3.6 V/4 Ah; NC) 2 1118 020 000 

5 lamps 3.75 V/0.8/0.4 A (HE 8 N EN) 2 2035 300 000 


163.5 

111 

151 

196 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 


126 

97 

1

Ex-Hand Lamps 

HE 8 EURO / 

HE 8 EURO PLUS 

■ Focussing by means of 

adjustable reflector 

■ Indication of available 

operating time (EURO PLUS) 


■ Gentle battery charging due 

to protection against 

overcharge (EURO PLUS) 

■ Interchageable battery, 

providing possibility of 

continuous use 

■ Powerful hand lamp due to 

halogen lamp with double bulb 

Description 

The HE 8 EURO and HE 8 EURO PLUS 

hand lamps which are suitable for use in 

Zone 1, 2, 21 and 22 hazardous areas, 

have been developed for inspection and 

maintenance duties as well as for security 

patrols. Their high IP 65 protection renders 

them particularly suitable for work in 

sewage systems and similaly wet environments. 

By turning the reflector ring, the 

light can be converted into a spotlight. 

The HE 8 EURO PLUS hand lamp is fitted 

with an electronic indication of the available 

operating time. Light emitting diodes 

indicate the available capacity of the 

battery. The housing is made from a nonabrasive 

inpact, resistant plastic with 

antistatic properties acc. to EN. 

The HE 8 EURO is fitted with 3 dry 

batteries (IEC 86 LR 20) while the HE 8 

EURO PLUS is fitted with a rechargeable, 

gas tight 4 AH NiCd battery. The battery 

insert can be recharged separate from 

the lamp with a plug in charger. This 

means that with a second easily 

replaceable battery insert, there will always 

be a recharged battery available. 

By using the rechargeable battery insert, 

the HE 8 EURO can be converted into 

a type HE 8 EURO PLUS. Indication 

of the available operating time is then be 

provided. 



● Hungary 


● Slowakia 

● Russia 

● Canada 

● USA 


100% 

75% 

25% 

HE 8 EURO 


11 

114 

3 


Plug-in charger 

Range diagram 

36 115 cm/Ø 

10 

1 Lux 

10 32 m 

0% 

Duration 

5.0 h 3.8 h 1.5 h 

Main beam 

Function “Indication of residual operating time” 

for HE 8 EURO PLUS 

Ex-Hand Lamps 

HE 8 EURO / 



HE 8 EURO/HE 8 EURO PLUS 




II 2 G 

II 2 D* 



Halogen lamp 4 V / 0.82 A 



-20 °C to +40 °C 


EURO battery insert to be equipped with of 3 x 

Battery 

1.5 V/IEC 86, R 20/LR 20 (HE 8 EURO) 

EURO PLUS battery insert with rechargeable 

battery 3.6 V/4 Ah; NC 


approx. 10 h (HE 8 EURO) 

approx. 5 h (HE 8 EURO PLUS) 

- easily replaceable battery insert 

Functions 

- halogen lamp with double bulb 

- indication fo availiable duration (HE 8 EURO PLUS) 

- protection against overcharge (HE 8 EURO PLUS) 

Weight 

Plug-in charger for HE 8 EURO PLUS 

approx. 0.64 kg (HE 8 EURO, without battery) 

approx. 1.0 kg (HE 8 EURO PLUS, with battery) 


Input voltage 230 V ± 10 %, 50/60 Hz 

Input power 6,5 VA 

Recharge period max. 14 h (EURO PLUS) 

Insulation class II 

Weight 





HE 8 EURO with bulb, without battery 1 1118 000 001 

HE 8 EURO PLUS with bulb and battery 1 1118 000 010 

Accessories 


Plug-in charger 1 1518 000 111 

Battery pack, rechargeable 2 1118 024 000 

Halogen lamp 2 2061 080 000 


196 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 


126 

97 

1

Ex-Searchlights 

SEB 8 L / SEB 8 

■ Halogen lamp with double bulb: 

Luminous intensity 

≥ 15 000 cd after 4 h 

■ Indication of available duration 

provides safety of operation 

■ Automatic switchover to pilot 

light in the event of a broken 

filament 

■ No overcharging of the 

battery due to a recharge 

dependent on the capacity 

■ Focussing beam 


Description 

This explosion-protected portable searchlight 

has been developed in compliance 

with the new fire brigade standard 

DIN 14 642 in order to comply with the 

requirements for control and rescue 

operations of the police and the fire 

brigade. Thus, the portable searchlight is 

also perfectly suited for all work areas 

subject to high mechanical stress. 

The portable searchlight acc. to EN 50014 

has been certified for use in Zones 1, 2, 21 

and 22, temperature class T4. This 

means that its use is permitted in nearly 

any area where the hazard of an explosive 

atmosphere exists. The electronics of the 

lamp are reliably protected against 

electromagnetic fields (EMC). 

In the event of a broken filament, the lamp 

will automatically switch over from the main 

beam to the standby light, in order to 

prevent the user from being left suddenly in 

the dark. This also happens towards the 

end of the battery capacity. The user will 

then still have sufficient time to make his 

way out of the danger zone. 

Five light emitting diodes provide 

continuous information on the current 

operating and charging state. Thus, the 

SEB 8 will “warn” in due time when the 

battery capacity is low or it needs to be 

replaced. The electronics additionally 

protect against excessive discharging 

as well as overcharging – only that amount 

of energy that has been used will be 

replaced. This increases the service life 

of the battery. 

The SEB 8 model can be charged from a 

motor vehicle battery using the vibrationproof 

motor vehicle holder (10-33 V) or from 

the mains supply supply the LG 443 charger. 

The SEB 8 L model features an integrated 

mains connecting lead by means of which 

it can be recharged from the 230 V mains 

supply. 

Three slip-on filters extend the range of 

functions of the SEB 8: 

• prism filter: quadratic working light with 

uniform, widespread luminous intensity 

distribution and no major loss. 

• orange filter: for use as a flashing light 

for safeguarding something (accessories). 

• red/green filter: for giving signals 

(accessories). 


● Hungary 


● Slowakia 

● Canada 

● USA 


➤ 


14 


49 

SEB 8 L 

57 

3 

20 80 

Range diagram 

6,5 5,2 3,9 2,6 1,3 0 

25 20 15 10 5 2 0 

SEB 8 with motor 

vehicle charger 90 

Stand-by light 

➤ 

100 cm/Ø 

1 Lux 

150 m 

Duration 

Main beam (h) 

Pilot light (h) 

Ex-Searchlights 






Marking to 94/9/EC II 2 G / II 2 D* 


Light aperture Ø 98 mm mineral glass 

Halogen lamp with double bulb 5.5 V / 5.5 W 



Permissible ambient temperature -20 °C to +40 °C (Specified data: 0-30 °C) 

Battery Rechargeable NiCd battery (4.8 V/7 Ah) 

Duty cycle approx. 6.5 h 

- Indication of available duration processor controlled 

- Charge depending on the drawn capacity 

Functions - Flashlight 

- Emergency light in case of a mains failure 

- Integrated charger (SEB 8 L) 

Weight SEB 8 L 2.5 kg / SEB 8 2.2 kg 

LG 443 charger, input voltage 

SEB 8 / SEB 8 L 

220-250 V ± 10 %, 50/60 Hz1) Motor vehicle charger 90, input voltage 

10-33 V DC 

SEB 8 / SEB 8 L 

Integrated charger SEB 8 L, input voltage 230 V ± 10 %; 50/60 Hz 

1) 110 V on request 




SEB 8 L Including halogen lamp with double bulb, tungsten 

lamp, diffusing lens and battery 

(rechargeable by means of mains connecting lead, 

LG 443 or motor vehicle 90) 

1 1147 000 001 

SEB 8 Including halogen lamp with double bulb, tungsten 

lamp, diffusing lens and battery 

(rechargeable in LG 443 or motor vehicle charger 90) 

1 1147 000 002 

Accessories 

Type Bestell-Nr. 

Charger LG 443 SEB 8 L, SEB 8 1 1540 000 443 

Motor vehicle charger 90 SEB 8 L, SEB 8 1 1145 000 792 

Wall bracket SW 1 1145 000 795 

Battery set 7 Ah, 4.8 V NC 2 1147 701 000 

Conversion kit: grips for motor vehicle charger 90 2 1147 400 000 

Halogen lamp with double bulb 5.5 V/5.5 W 1 2061 000 040 

10 lamps 4.8 V/0.3 A 2 2041 450 000 

Radial diffuser cap, orange 2 1145 017 000 

Slip-on filters red, orange, green 2 1147 300 000 


163.5 

111 

151 

146.5 

325 

109.2 112.5 


119 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

1

Ex-Cap Light 

HLE 7 L EN 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Particularly abrasion resistant 

flexible connection between 

battery and headpiece 

Powerful maintenance free, 

gastight 7 Ah battery 

Battery container with 

integrated charging circuit 

Robust explosion-protected 

housing additionally protected 

by a leather bag 

Red and green LED‘s 

indicating the charging state 

Two-filament lamp provides 

safety in case of a broken 

filament 

Description: 

The HLE 7 L explosion-protected cap 

light has been approved for use in Zones 1 

and 2 hazardous areas up to temperature 

class T4. 

It has been developed as a working and 

inspection lamp for tunnelling as well as for 

duties in sewage systems. The lamp can 

easily be fixed onto the headpiece holder 

of the protective helmet. The main or 

secondary filament of the two-filament 

lamp is operated by the switch on the 

headpiece. 

The housing of the HLE 7 L explosionprotected 

cap light is made of impact 

resistant polyamide. The lamp comprises 

a headpiece, a highly flexible neoprenesheathed 

connecting cable and a battery 

with integrated charging circuit. The 

battery container is additionally protected 

by a leather case. 

The powerful energy source consists of a 

three-cell maintenance free and gas tight 

7 Ah NiCd battery which can be charged 

from the 230 V mains supply by means 

of the provided connecting lead. The 

battery container does not have to be 

opened for charging. 

A red and green LED indicate the charging 

state. 



● Hungary 

● USA 

● Canada 


225 

HLE 7 L EN 

Battery insert 

9 

45 

9 

2 10 

Range diagram 

136 cm/Ø 

1 Lux 

30 m 

Ex-Cap Light 

HLE 7 L EN 


HLE 7 L EN 






Rotary switch 

4 positions 

OFF - pilot light - OFF - main beam 

Tungsten lamp 3.75 V / 0.8 / 0.3 A 



-20 °C to +40 °C 


Battery chargeable NiCd battery (3.6 V / 7 Ah) 

Operating time approx. 8 h 

Input voltage 230 V ± 10 %, 50/60 Hz 

Insulation class II 

Input power 

Permissible mean ambient temperature 

4 VA 

during charge 0 °C to +35 °C 

Recharge period max. 18 h 

- Indication of the charging state 

Functions - Two-flament lamp 

- Integrated charger 

Weight approx. 2.0 kg (with battery) 



HLE 7 L EN Including lamp, battery and mains connecting lead 1 1229 000 416 

Accessories 


Battery insert 2 1229 456 000 

5 lamps 3.75 V/0.8 A/0.4 A 2 2035 520 000 

Belt 3 0231 001 011 

Headband 2 1261 191 000 


Ø70 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

122 74 


184 

1



Light Fittings 


2

Standard – two moulded plastic 

or brass (optional) cable entries 

for one-ended through wiring 

Optional double-ended through 

wiring for cable connection 

Special Ex-EVG in the type of 

protection EEx d to meet high 

requirements 

Holders for the hinges of protective 

bowl – on both sides 

Special lamp holder in the type of 

protection EEx e for bi-pin lamps 

to IEC 81 

Light Fittings of the Series eLLK 92 - 

„Easy to See Through“ 

eLLK 92036/36 as „see-through“ model 

Double thread (MS) for reliable PE 

contacting of metal gland (optional) 

Standard terminal block with 

6 terminals for conductors up to 

2 x 6 mm 2 

Enclosure made of polyester 

reinforced with glass fibre 

Locking bolt for operating the light 

fitting locking mechanism on both 

sides 

Bowl made of transparent, 

impact-resistant 

polycarbonate 

Internal sealing system for IP 66 

Moulded plastic or brass cable entries 

for double-ended cable connection 

(optional) 



Ergonomically Designed Explosion- 

Protected Light Fittings 

Materials 

The eLLK 92 light fitting is made of high-grade 

plastics that, in addition to the excellent 

mechanical properties, also feature a high 

stability against many chemicals found in 

industrial plants. All the materials used for the 

light fitting provide are effectively protected 

against corrosion and have already been 

successfully tried and tested in chemical and 

off-shore installations. 

Sealing system 

The bowl and the enclosure form a labyrinth, 

that protects the seal against jet water The 

continuous seal is extremely elastic and, in 

conjunction with the locking mechanism, 

ensures that the light fitting is sealed tightly for a 

long time. As was also confirmed by an ERA 

test, this is the only way to reliably maintain the 

degree of protection IP 66 for a longer period. 

eLLK 92 eLLK 92 CEAG 

Installation of the eLLK 92 

Whether it is mounted on rails or suspended 

from the sealing, the lion’s share of the overall 

costs is taken up by the installation and 

electrical connection of the light fitting. Here, 

due to the standardized fixing clearances and 

the generously dimensioned terminal compartments, 

the eLLK 92 provides a high saving 

potential. The terminal compartment can be 

opened without removing covers or reflectors, 

thus permitting the easy connection of cables. 

The standard, single-ended through wiring 

allows up to 2 x 6 wires per cable to be 

connected quickly and economically to the 

double terminals. Safe and permanent contact 

is ensured, even for wire cross sections up to 

6 mm 2 . Simply push the hinged cover shut and 

you already have protection against contact to 

UVV4. 

Aptitude tests 

The eLLK 92 light fitting has already passed 

both tests with lateral thrusts due to wind up 

to 12 Bft and the ERA test specified for British 

off-shore installations. Here, for example, the 

sealing qualities and the resistance to vibration 

are tested. 

Standard version for two cables 

The standard version of the eLLK 92 is 

designed for a single-ended through-wiring. 

According to the verdict in an independent 

expertise, together with the easily accessible 

terminal compartment, this connection method 

results in a time saving of up to 30% compared 

to conventional light fittings using the classical 

through-wiring method. 


2

Catch points protective bowl 

opening of bowl 

closing of bowl 


Ergonomically Designed Explosion- 

Protected Light Fittings 

Easy lamp replacement 

Irrespective of how the light fitting is installed, the 

locking mechanism can be operated on either 

side – this means that there are no future surprises 

with light fittings that were installed at a 

later point in time. The fact that the locking 

mechanism can be operated on both sides and 

that the protective bowl is hinged on both sides, 

means that there is plenty of scope for the 

arrangement of light fittings. The bowl can simply 

be swung open in the respective direction without 

tools - this is made possible by the hinge 

fasteners fitted on both sides of the light fitting 

housing. A quarter turn of the locking bolt and 

the bowl opens up downwards. The hinges on 

the cover are fixed in such a way that the 

replacement lamps can be safely deposited in 

the bowl, thus saving time when replacing 

lamps. The bowl cannot fall down, even in wind 

and rain. 

Double the safety is better 

The regulations require the automatic disconnection 

of the supply voltage when the light 

fitting is opened. The built-in compulsory N/C 

contact is safeguarded against inadvertent 

operation and, as soon as the locking mechanism 

of the light fitting is operated, it deenergizes 

all parts that can be touched. A 

second interlock switch increases the safety 

level for the operator. Therefore, even if the lock 

of the light fitting is actuated while the protective 

bowl is still open, the switch cannot be operated, 

as, in this case, the circuit for the light fitting 

remains disconnected. 

Locking mechanism 

The housing and the protective bowl are securely 

locked by means of a locking mechanism 

according to the „strongbox principle“ on both 

sides that features as many as 24 latch points . 

This new type of locking system features 

stainless steel springs that regulate the pressure 

applied to the seal, thus guaranteeing the 

tightness of the light fittings, even in the event 

of changes due to the ageing of the sealing 

material and variable climatic influences. 


CEAG products 

are constanly 

being advanced 

and tested in the 

company’s own 

lighting laboratory: 

quality 

means safety 

Regulations and Lighting Engineering - 

More Light, Less Energy 

Lamps 

All the light fittings in the eLLK 92 series have 

been developed and certified for Ø 26 mm bipin 

fluorescent lamps with a G 13 lamp cap in 

accordance with: 

81 IEC 1105 (18 W) 

81 IEC 1305 (36 W) 

81 IEC 1545 (58 W) 

This means that the lamps, that are available all 

over the world, can be used for both hazardous 

and non-hazardous areas. Not only does this 

simplify stock-keeping, but the operator also 

benefits from all the technical advantages in 

conjunction with EVG operation. Compared to 

the old Ø 38 mm single-pin fluorescent lamps, 

the luminous power of the system is increased 

by a factor of 2.2. 

Lighting engineering 

Due to the various fields of application light 

fittings are equipped with a large variety of 

lamps and reflectors. The criteria for the 

selection of the types of lamps and reflectors are 

basically determined by the type of lighting 

required (illumination of surfaces or objects, etc.) 

and the economic efficiency. 

When planning a lighting installation, the polar 

curves of the luminous intensity of the light 

fittings being used are required in order to 

calculate the illumination distribution. 

Polar curves, LVK 

During the development phase the lighting 

properties of all explosion-protected light fittings 

are tested in the CEAG lighting laboratory. In this 

way it is ensured that the reflectors, as well as 

the protective bowls for fluorescent light fittings 

are optimized down to the last detail. In the case 

of the eLLK 92 series of light fittings, CEAG has 

succeeded in optimizing both the illumination of 

surfaces with the largest possible light 

distribution and the illumination of objects with 

the highest possible axial light intensity. The polar 

curve of each light fitting can be found in the 

technical data and can be used together with the 

other lighting values to calculate the illuminance. 

INL-WIN CEAG, the design software 

INL-WIN CEAG is a lighting calculation program 

for the design of lighting requirements. This 

program can be used with WINDOWS TM and is 

an excellent menu-driven aid for the everyday 

work involved in the design and engineering of 

explosion-protected lighting equipment. 

The lighting data of the CEAG light fittings is 

stored in a data base and is used for the light 

calculation. By entering a few details, such 

as the height, width and length of the room, 

the reflectance of the walls and the desired 

illuminance, it is possible to make an exact 

calculation of the number and distribution of the 

explosion-protected light fittings. This simple, yet 

optimal calculation makes it possible to minimize 

the number of light fittings required. 

If emergency lighting is required, the program 

shows the exact number and positions of the 

light fittings. Individual, customized lighting 

arrangements can also be realized with this 

program. 

WINDOWS is a registered trademark 

of the Microsoft Corp. 


2

EVG Technology 

Developed for Practical 

Operation 

Electronic ballasts (EVG) 

Nowadays it is not possible to imagine modern 

light fittings for fluorescent lamps without the 

EVG technology. Features such as immediate 

starting, the absence of flickering during 

operation or the minimal heat rise are only 

possible with this technology. With the EVG 

technology, fluorescent light fittings for use in 

hazardous areas also provide decisive 

advantages: 

- possibility of a lamp-sparing cold start 

- use of bi-pin lamps, 26 mm 

- use with various mains voltages 

- regulation of lamp current with fluctuating 

mains voltages 

- safe lamp ignition at low and high ambient 

temperatures 

- service life of lamp is approx. 12.000 hours 

- AC/DC operation possible 

With the latest generation of EVGs, CEAG 

provides a safe and reliable operation of the 

explosion-protected eLLK 92 light fittings. 

Robust technology for extreme applications 

The operation of explosion-protected light 

fittings places high requirements on the reliability 

and durability of the circuits being used. In 

addition to temperature, moisture and 

mechanical stress, mains contamination or 

voltage peaks can affect the light fittings. Here 

the EVGs specially developed by CEAG provide 

safe protection against harmful influences. 

Whereas conventional industrial EVGs are 

designed for an ambient temperature of the light 

fittings of up to + 30°C, the CEAG EVGs are 

designed for an ambient temperature of + 50°C. 

The large-scale printed wiring board layouts 

ensure an even heat distribution, throughconnections 

and encapsulation of sensitive 

components provide mechanical protection. A 

hermetically sealed enclosure provides 

protection against undesirable substances that 

could cause damage to the PCB. 

Quality cannot be left to chance 

Extensive testing and a highly automated production 

process are necessary to ensure a constant 

good quality. CEAG has been manufacturing EVGs 

for 25 years and has the necessary know-how. In 

addition to the routine verifications and tests carried 

out on all apparatus, stress tests are carried out on 

individual batches to ensure safe findings with 

regard to component specifications. 

Computer-aided final inspections 

The uncompromising safety of the explosionprotected 

eLLK 92 light fittings is maintained 

throughout the various production stages and 

includes the final inspection. Each light fitting 

is tested in detail by a computer test program. 

All data relating to the manufacture and safety 

is stored and can still be called up years later. 

This is where the CEAG quality assurance 

system, that is certified to ISO 9001, clearly 

makes it mark. 


CEAG emergency lighting 

supply unit for non-hazardous 

areas 

Centrally Controlled 

Emergency Lighting Supply 

Direct or alternating voltage? 

Conventional ballasts only work with an alternating 

voltage and can only be used with group 

or central battery installations under certain 

conditions. CEAG, as the leading manufacturer 

of emergency lighting installations, offers an 

explosion-protected ballast that can be 

operated with alternating and direct voltages. 

In conjunction with the CG modules, it is also 

possible use the eLLK 92 light fittings as 

individually monitored emergency light fittings 

connected to a CEAG emergency lighting 

installation with monitoring system. Here, for the 

first time, it is possible to integrate explosionprotected 

light fittings as system light fittings 

into the practical monitoring system of CEAG 

group or central battery installations. This 

combination offers the following advantages: 

❒ Automatic performance of the necessary 

function test with central record-keeping 

❒ Enormous cost savings as manual testing is 

no longer necessary 

❒ Two-lamp operation with mains supply, 

single lamp operation with emergency 

power supply, therefore cost saving for 

batteries and apparatus 

❒ High degree of safety of emergency lighting 

due to constant display of availability 

❒ Simplified installation: 

- mains and emergency power supply have 

a common connection 

- a separate data line is not required 

- a maximum of 12 light fittings can be 

connected to one circuit 

- automatic performance of the necessary 

function tests with central record-keeping 

One line, e.g. 3 x 1.5 mm 2 , 

for both the mains and the 

emergency power supply 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

eLLK 92 light fitting with CG and coding switch with a maximum of 12 

light fittings per circuit 

7 8 9 10 11 12 


2

eLLK 92 Explosion-Protected 

Light Fittings for G 13 Bi-Pin 

Fluorescent Lamps 

with Electronic Ballast 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Low energy consumption 

due to the electronic 

ballast 

Mechanical locking system – 

built on a “strong box 

principle” operating on both 

longitudinal sides 

Single-ended throughwiring 

with 6 terminals 

up to 6 mm 2 

Safety locking system due 

to an integrated forced 

isolating switch 

IP 66 due to a 

labyrinth sealing system 

Smooth surface, 

simple cleaning 

Optional connection to CEAG 

emergency light monitoring 

systems 

Description 

The eLLK 92 Ex-protected light fittings for 

bi-pin fluorescent lamps are fitted with an 

electronic ballast and conform to the 

requirements of EN 50014 to 50020, 

50028 and 60598. 

A standard single-end through wiring 

with easy access to the terminals provides 

a cost-saving installation. Modern 

economical ballasts in combination with 

bi-pin fluorescent lamps contribute to give 

a 30% higher light output compared to a 

conventional Fa6 fluorescent lamp. The 

high input voltage range allows international 

use. 

• Double-sided lock with 10, 20 or 24 latch 

points 

• Protective bowl hingeable on both sides 

• Automatic switch built as a safety disconnector 

according to EN 60947 

(IEC 664) 

• Interlock switch that prevents operation 

when the fitting is open 

• Automatic switch ensuring the disconnection 

of all exposed components 

when the fitting is opened 

• In case of failure of a fluorescent lamp 

the second one remains in operation 

independently 

• Large terminal compartment: Simple 

opening by means of a turning knob 

• EEx e cable entries M25 with a new 

type of EEx e blanking plug 

• The optional CG module represents 

an optimum solution for the 

individual monitoring of light fittings 

connected to CEAG emergency 

battery systems. In emergency operation, 

one lamp is automatically switched off, 

thus saving valuable battery capacity. 

The addressing of the light fittings can 

easily be adapted later on in the terminal 

compartment. 


Polar curve 

2 lamps 

90 

75 

60 

45 

eLLK 92018/18 (2 x 18 W) 

eLLK 92018/18 P2 

40 

80 

120 

160 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

Rated luminous flux of lamps: 

2 x 18 W = 2700 Im 

Light efficiency in operation: 

2 x 18 W = 78 % 

45 

60 

90 

75 

Explosion-Protected Light 

Fittings 

eLLK 92018/18 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

eLLK 92018/18 

Type of protection EEx ed II C T4 IIC 



II 2 G 

II 2 D 

Enclosure material Polyester reinforced 

Protective bowl Polycarbonate 

Rated voltage 

AC: 110 - 254 V ±10 %, 47-63 Hz 

DC: 110 - 230 V ±10 % 

Degree of protection IP 66 to EN 60529 (corresponds to IEC 529) 

Protection class I 

Permissible ambient temp. -20 °C to +50 °C 

EEx e blanking plug 

Cable entries EEx e cable entries M25 x 1,5 

for cables from Ø 8 - 17 mm 

L1, L2, L3, L, N, PE; max. 2 x 6 mm2 Connection terminals 

single wire per terminal 

Illuminant Bi-pin lamp: 18 W (G13-81-IEC-1105-1) 

Weight approx. 4.6 kg 


Type Lamps Circuit Rated Cos Order No. 

eLLK 92018/18 .. current ϕ 

1/6-1 2 x 18 W EVG 0.18 A ≥ 0.95 1 2265 875 101 

2/6-2 2 x 18 W EVG 0.18 A ≥ 0.95 1 2265 875 103 

1/6-1 M 2 x 18 W EVG 0.18 A ≥ 0.95 1 2265 875 109 

2/6-2 M 

Level gauge ligth 

2 x 18 W EVG 0.18 A ≥ 0.95 1 2265 875 111 

fitting P2 1/6-1 

CG* 

2 x 18 W EVG 1 2265 875 126 

2/6-2 2 x 18 W EVG/CG 0.19 A ≥ 0.95 1 2265 875 203 

2/6-2M 2 x 18 W EVG/CG 0.19 A ≥ 0.95 1 2265 875 211 

Single-ended Double-ended Through-wiring 

1/6-1 1/6-1 M 2/6-2 2/6-2M 

1 2 Cable entry M25 x 1.5 with dust cap 

2 Ex-blanking plug 

1 Cable entry M25 x 1.5 with blanking plut 

1 2 x M20 x 1.5 metal thread, dust cap 

1 2 x M20 x 1.5 metal thread, blanking plug 

*CG: version as individually monitored emergency light fitting for operation in 

CEAG emergency lighting systems 


M25 x 1.5 

35 

732 

400 

760 

M8, 14 deep 

Hexagral SW 13 

188 


46 

65 

130 

2

Polar curve 

1 lamp 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

90 

90 

75 

75 

60 

60 

2 lamps 

45 

eLLK 92036 (1 x 36 W) 

eLLK 92036/36 (2 x 36 W) 

45 

40 

80 

120 

160 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

40 

80 

120 

160 


1 x 36 W = 3350 Im 

2 x 36 W = 6700 Im 


1 x 36 W = 86 % 

2 x 36 W = 78 % 

45 

45 

60 

60 

90 

75 

90 

75 

Explosion-Protected Light Fittings 

eLLK 92036 

eLLK 92036/36 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

eLLK 92036, eLLK 92036/36 

Type of protection EEx ed II C T4 



II 2 G 

II 2 D 



Rated voltage 

AC: 110 - 254 V ±10 %, 47 - 63 Hz 

DC: 110 - 230 V ±10 % 





Cable entries EEx e cable entries M25 x 1.5 

for cables from Ø 8-17 mm 







eLLK 92036 

current ϕ 

1/6-1 1 x 36 W EVG 0.18 A 0.95 1 2263 875 101 

2/6-2 

eLLK 92036 level gauge 

1 x 36 W EVG 0.18 A 0.95 1 2263 875 103 

light fitting P3 1/6-1 

eLLK 92036/36 

1 x 36 W EVG 0.18 A 0.95 1 2263 875 125 

1/6-1 2 x 36 W EVG 0.34 A 0.95 1 2266 875 101 

2/6-2 2 x 36 W EVG 0.34 A 0.95 1 2266 875 103 

1/6-1 M 2 x 36 W EVG 0.34 A 0.95 1 2266 875 109 

2/6-2 M 

eLLK 92036/36 CG* 

2 x 36 W EVG 0.34 A 0.95 1 2266 875 111 

2/6-2 2 x 36 W EVG/CG 0.35 A 0.95 1 2266 875 203 

2/6-2M 2 x 36 W EVG/CG 0.35 A 0.95 1 2266 875 211 


1/6-1 1/6-1 M 2/6-2 2/6-2M 



1 Cable entry M25 x 1.5 with blanking plug 






M25 x 1.5 

35 

Hexagon SW 13 

1332 

700 

1360 

M8, 14 deep 

188 

46 


65 

130

Polar curve 

1 lamp 

90 

75 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

90 

75 

60 

2 lamps 

60 

45 

45 

eLLK 92058 (1 x 58 W) 

eLLK 92058/58 (2 x 58 W) 

40 

80 

120 

160 

40 

80 

120 

160 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 


1 x 58 W = 5200 Im 

2 x 58 W = 10400 Im 


1 x 58 W = 83 % 

2 x 58 W = 72 % 

45 

45 

60 

60 

90 

75 

90 

75 


eLLK 92058 

eLLK 92058/58 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

eLLK 92058, eLLK 92058/58 


EG-Type Examination Certificate PTB 96 ATEX 2144 


II 2 G 

II 2 D 



Rated voltage (1 x 58 W) 

AC: 110 - 254 V ±10 %, 47-63 Hz 

DC: 110 - 230 V ±10 % 

Rated voltage (2 x 58 W) 

AC: 220 - 254 V ±10 %, 47-63 Hz 

DC: 220 - 230 V ±10 % 




-20 °C to +50 °C for 1 x 58 Watt 

-20 °C to +40 °C for 2 x 58 Watt 


Cable entries EEx e cable entries M25 x 1.5 








eLLK 92058 

current ϕ 

1/6-1 1 x 58 W EVG 0.27 A 0.95 1 2264 875 101 

2/6-2 1 x 58 W EVG 0.27 A 0.95 1 2264 875 103 

2/6-2 M 

eLLK 92058/58 

1 x 58 W EVG 0.27 A 0.95 1 2264 875 111 

1/6-1 2 x 58 W EVG 0.53 A 0.95 1 2267 875 101 

2/6-2 2 x 58 W EVG 0.53 A 0.95 1 2267 875 103 

2/6-2 M 

eLLK 92058/58 CG* 

2 x 58 W EVG 0.53 A 0.95 1 2267 875 111 

2/6-2 2 x 58 W EVG/CG 0.54 A 0.95 1 2267 875 203 

2/6-2M 2 x 58 W EVG/CG 0.54 A 0.95 1 2267 875 211 


1/6-1 1/6-1 M 2/6-2 2/6-2M 









M25x1.5 

35 

Hexagon SW 13 

1632 

700 

1660 

M8, 14 deep 

188 

46 

65 

130 


2

eLLM 92 Explosion-Protected 

Pole-Mounted Light Fittings for 

G 13 Bi-Pin Fluorescent Lamps 

with Electronic Ballast 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

IP 66 due to a 

labyrinth sealing system 

Mechanical locking system – 

built on a “strong box 

principle” operating on both 

longitudinal sides 

Low energy consumption 

due to the electronic ballast 

Safety locking system due to 

an integrated forced isolating 

switch 

Large terminal compartment 

in the pole socket, now also 

for through-wiring 

Description 

The eLLM 92 Ex-protected pole mounted 

light fittings for bi-pin fluorescent lamps are 

fitted with an electronic ballast and 

conform to the requirements of EN 50014 

through 50020, 50028 and 60598. 

The eLLM 92 pole mounted light fitting 

combines the assets of the eLLK 92 series 

with a new cost-saving connecting 

technique. The terminal compartment 

complete with 44 mm dia. pole socket 

forms an integral part of the polyester light 

fitting housing. 

To install the light fitting, only the cover 

of the large terminal compartment needs 

to be opened, the light fitting housing 

remains closed. The accessory kit allows 

a single-sided through-wiring with 2 x M25 

cable entries incl. clamping and fixing 

material. 

• Double-sided lock 


• Automatic switch built as a safety 

disconnector according to EN 60947-1 

(IEC 664) 

• Automatic switch ensuring the disconnection 

of all exposed components 

when the fitting is opened 

• Electronic ballast for a high luminous 

efficiency, less energy consumption and 

a longer service life of the lamps 

• In the case of the failure of one 

fluorescent lamp the second one will 

remain in operation independently 

• Wind load test to VDE (EN 60 598-2-3: 

1989) carried through and passed at 

light spot levels of up to 8 m, 15 m and 

above 15 meters 


eLLM 92018/18 (2 x 18 W) 

eLLM 92036/36 (2 x 36 W) 

Polar curve 

2 lamps 

90 

75 

60 

45 

40 

80 

120 

160 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 


2 x 18 W = 2700 Im 

2 x 36 W = 6700 Im 


2 x 18 W = 78 % 

2 x 36 W = 78 % 

45 

60 

90 

75 


Pole-Mounted Light Fittings 

eLLM 92018/18 

eLLM 92036/36 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

eLLM 92018/18, eLLM 92036/36 




II 2 G 

II 2 D 



Rated voltage 

AC: 110 - 254 V ±10 %, 47-63 Hz 

DC: 110 - 230 V ±10 % 




Cable entries 

1 EEx e cable entry M25 x 1.5 


L1, N, PE; max. 2 x 6 mm2 Connection terminals 


Illuminant 

Bi-pin lamp: 18 W (G13-81-IEC-1105-1) 

36 W (G13-81-IEC-1305-2) 

Weight 

approx. 6.7 kg (2 x 18 W) 

approx. 9.1 kg (2 x 36 W) 



current ϕ 

eLLM 92018/18 2 x 18 W EVG 0.18 A ≥ 0.95 1 2268 875 101 

eLLM 92036/36 2 x 36 W EVG 0.34 A ≥ 0.95 1 2269 875 101 

Accessories 

Type 

Single-ended through-wiring 2/6 with 2 entries M25, including 

Order No. 

clamping and fixing materials (see option) 2 2218 602 000 


188 

44 

76 

130 

Hexagon SW13 

eLLM 92036/36 

33 

736 = 18 W 

1336 = 36 W 

33 

150 

1060 = 18 W 

1660 = 36 W 

33 

Standard Option 

eLLM 92 


20 

Hexagon SW13 

eLLM 92018/18 

150 

2

eLLK 92 Ni/eLLM 92 Ni 


Emergency Light Fittings for 

G 13 Bi-Pin Fluorescent 

Lamps with Electronic Ballast 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Indication of required 

battery replacement 

Battery set easily replaceable 

within the hazardous area 

Only the spent energy is 

recharged 

Indication of the residual 

duration 

Charging status displayed by 

means of five green diodes 

Indication that a function and 

duration test is required to 

comply with safety 

regulations 

Description 

The eLLK 92 Ni Ex-protected emergency 

light fittings for bi-pin fluorescent 

lamps and equipped with an electronic 

ballast meet the requirements of EN 50014 

to 50020, 50028 and 60598. Due to a 

new type of battery charging method with 

“intelligent” microelectronics, they provide 

reliable safety and reduced maintenance 

costs. 

The required function and duration test is 

performed automatically with emergency 

operation or requested after 6 months 

through the clearly visible red LED 

indicator. 

A microprocessor continuously monitors 

the charging and discharging functions. 

Due to a unique charging feature only the 

spent energy is recharged – so the 

possibility of overcharging is eliminated. 

The so-called memory effect is also 

eliminated, resulting in a longer service life 

of the battery. 

During the charging process the temperature 

is monitored. A necessary battery 

replacement is indicated by the LED. 

Because of the new type of battery 

connection, batteries can be replaced 

in the hazardous area. The emergency 

operation can be set locally at either 1.5 

or 3h. 

Inhibit feature only available on the throughwired 

versions 2/6-2. 


✴ 

✴ 

red LED green LEDs 

monitoring 

Fault/ 81- 61- 41- 21- 0 - 

servicing 100 % 80 % 60% 40 % 20 % 

✴ 

red green 

LEDs 

Fault/ 81- 61- 41- 21- 0 - 

servicin 100 % 80 % 60% 40 % 20 % 

LED: 

red green 

LEDs 

= flashing 

= off 

= on 

Intelligent Battery Technology - 

Safety in Case of Emergency 

Emergency light fittings with selfcontained 

battery systems 

Emergency light fittings with self-contained 

battery systems provide the required 

emergency lighting from a decentralized 

source and function independent of the 

central system. These light fittings are 

particularly economical when used in 

extensive plants. Until now, compared to 

the centrally operated and monitored 

installations, the disadvantage of the 

emergency light fittings with self-contained 

battery systems was that they do not 

supply any information on the state of the 

light fittings. With the introduction of the 

eLLK 92 .... Ni, CEAG has now incorporated 

monitoring. Five LEDs supply 

constant information on the charging state, 

the available battery capacity and function, 

as well as operating time tests. A red LED 

constantly indicates necessary test 

measures or the occurrence of a fault. 

Monitoring functions 

Five green LEDs, that are placed behind a 

protective lens cover, constantly show the 

charging process and the present battery 

capacity. Charging is indicated by flashing 

green LEDs. The charged capacity is 

shown in 20% stages. 

Example 1: 

Charging operation: The two green 

LEDs on the right are on, the 3rd LED 

is flashing, the red LED is off. The 

battery is being charged; capacity 

> 40% < 60%, the last operating time 

test < 6 months ago, capacity at time 

of last test > 30 mins. 

Example 2: 

Discharging operation: The four 

green LEDS on the right are on, the 

5th LED is flashing, the red LED is 

flashing Emergency operation: 

capacity > 100 % < 80%, last 

operating time test > 6 months ago 

or capacity at time of last test 

< 30 mins. 

At intervals of 6 months the red LED flashs 

continuously, indicating that the operating 

time test specified in the regulations is 

due. The LED does not go out until the 

after successful completion of the test 

(> 30 mins. emergency lighting). 

Handling 

The battery is built into a separately 

certified enclosure. A contact cover, that 

closes automatically, allows the battery 

to be transported freely, even in hazardous 

areas. To connect the battery, the battery 

set is simply fitted on and secured by 

means of two screws. Safe electrical 

connection is made via the Ex d contacts. 

Cover IP 30 

Ex-d contact pins 

Ex-d Contact sockets 

The run-down battery set can be replaced 

by loosening the screws and simply pulling 

off the battery set. A detachable strap 

protects the insert from being dropped 

inadvertently. 


2

Polar curve 

2 lamps 

90 

75 

60 

45 

eLLK 92018/18 Ni (2 x 18 W) 

eLLK 92036/36 Ni (2 x 36 W) 

40 

80 

120 

160 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 


2 x 18 W = 2700 lm 

2 x 36 W = 6700 lm 


2 x 18 W = 78 % 

2 x 36 W = 78 % 

Luminous flux factor (emerg. light): 

for 1 lamp at rated operation 

18 W = approx. 1.5 h, 90 % / 3.0 h, 45 % 

36 W = approx. 1.5 h, 45 % / 3.0 h, 25 % 

45 

60 

90 

75 

Explosion-Protected Light 

Fittings for Emergency Lighting 

eLLK 92 Ni 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

eLLK 92 Ni, eLLM 92 Ni 

Type of protection EEx edm ib II C T4 



II 2 G 

II 2 D 



Rated voltage 

AC: 220 V - 254 V ±10 %, 47-63 Hz 

AC: 110 V - 127 V ±10 %, 47-63 Hz (on request) 

Degree of protection IP 66 to EN 60529, (corresponds to IEC 529) 


Permissible ambient temperature* -5 °C to +50 °C 

2 EEx-e cable entries M25 x 1.5 

Cable entries for cables from Ø 8-17 mm, 

1 EEx-e blanking plug 



Illuminant 

Bi-pin lamp: 18 W (81-IEC 1105-1) 

36 W (81-IEC 1305-2) 

Weight 

approx. 10.0 kg (2 x 18 W) 

approx. 12.0 kg (2 x 36 W) 

1 lamp 

Rated emergency lighting operation 

Can be set on site for an emergency lighting 

duration of 1.5 or 3 hours Battery set 2710-02 with 

LED display and monitoring with microprocessors 



eLLK 92018/18 Ni 

current ϕ 

1/6-1 (220 - 254 V) 2 x 18 W EVG 0.23 A ≥ 0.95 1 2260 876 101 

2/6-2 (220 - 254 V) 2 x 18 W EVG 0.23 A ≥ 0.95 1 2260 876 103 

2/6-2M (220 - 254 V) 

eLLK 92036/36 Ni 

2 x 18 W EVG 0.23 A ≥ 0.95 1 2260 876 111 

1/6-1 (220 - 254 V) 2 x 36 W EVG 0.4 A ≥ 0.95 1 2261 876 101 

2/6-2 (220 - 254 V) 2 x 36 W EVG 0.4 A ≥ 0.95 1 2261 876 103 

2/6-2 M (220 -254 V) 2 x 36 W EVG 0.4 A ≥ 0.95 1 2261 876 111 


1/6-1 2/6-2 2/6-2M 


2 Ex blanking plug 


2 x M 20 x 1.5 metal thread, dust cap 

2 x M 20 x 1.5 metal thread, blanking plug 

* Longer charging times are necessary for temperatures of less than -5 °C. 

Dimenisons in mm 

188 

46 

65 

130 

M8, 14 deep 

M8, 14 deep 

700 

1500 

Hexagon SW 13 

900 

Hexagon SW 13 

400 

M25x1.5 


35 

35 

M25x1.5

Polar curve 

2 lamps 

90 

75 

60 

45 

eLLM 92018/18 Ni 

40 

80 

120 

160 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 


2 x 18 W = 2700 lm 


2 x 18 W = 78 % 

Luminous flux factor (emerg. light): 

for 1 lamp at rated operation 

18 W = approx. 1.5 h, 90 % / 3.0 h, 45 % 

45 

60 

90 

75 

Explosion-Protected Pole Mounted 

Light Fitting for Emergency Lighting 

eLLM 92 Ni 


CEAG eBk 93 

............ 

V 

PTB Nr. ..... ... 

Hz 

............ 

A 

CEAG eLLM 92018/18 N 

............ 

V 

PTB Nr. ..... ... 

Hz 

............ 

A 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

eLLM 92 Ni 

Type of protection EEx edm ib II C T4 



II 2 G 

II 2 D 



Rated voltage 

AC: 220 - 254 V ±10 %, 47-63 Hz 

AC: 110 - 127 V ±10 %, 47-63 Hz on request 

Degree of protection IP 66 to EN 60529 


Permissible ambient temperature* -5 °C to +50 °C 

2 EEx e cable entries M25 x 1.5 


1 EEx e blanking plug 

L1, L2, L3, L, N, PE; 

Connection terminals Remote switch connection S1-S2; 

max. 2 x 6 mm2 single wire per terminal 

Illuminant Bi-pin lamp: 18 W (81-IEC 1105-1) 

Weight approx. 12.4 kg (2 x 18 W) 

1 lamp 

Rated emergency lighting operation 

Can be set on site for an emergency lighting 

duration of 1.5 or 3 hours 

Battery set 2710-02 with 7 Ah-NC battery 



current ϕ 

eLLM 92018/18 Ni 

(220 - 254 V) 

2 x 18 W EVG 0.23 A ≥ 0.95 1 2273 876 101 

* Longer charging times are necessary for temperatures of less than - 5 °C. 


188 

44 

76 

130 

880 

34 

20 

1205 

eLLM 92 


150 

Hexagon SW13 

2

nLLK 98 Explosion-Protected Light Fitting 

for use in Zone 2 in acc. with EN 50021 

with EVG for G13 Bi-Pin Fluorescent Lamps 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Cost-saving installation 

due to large terminal compartment 

for single-ended 

through wiring 

Locking mechanism on 

“strong box principle” can 

be operated on both sides 

High degree of protection due 

to labyrinth sealing system 

Low energy requirement 

due to electronic ballast 

(EVG) 

Smooth surface, 

easy cleaning 

Opitonal connection to 

CEAG emergency lightmonitoring 

systems 

Description 

The explosion-protected light fittings of the 

series nLLK 98 conform to the 

requirements of the new EC Standard EN 

50021 for explosion-protected apparatus 

for Zone 2 and Zone 22. 

They are equipped with electronic ballasts 

(EVGs) for G13 bi-pin fluorescent lamps 

and are available for 18 W, 36 W and 

58 W. 

The new Zone 2 light fittings offer the 

following advantages for assembly and 

installation: 

• The central lock with 10, 20 or 24 latch 

points can be operated on both sides 


• Operation of fluorescent lamps with 

EVG leads to longer service life and high 

luminous efficiency 

• Large terminal compartment for singleended 

through wiring 


Polar curve 

2 lamps 

90 

75 

60 

45 

nLLK 98018/18 (2 x 18 W) 

40 

80 

120 

160 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 


2 x 18 W = 2700 Im 


2 x 18 W = 78 % 

45 

60 

90 

75 


for Zone 2 

nLLK 98018/18 


Zone 2 

Zone 22 

nLLK 98018/18 

Type of protection EEx nA II T4 acc. EN 50021 

Conformity statement PTB 98 ATEX 2208 


II 3 G 

II 3 D 

Enclosure material 

Polyester reinforced, 

light ivory colour 


Rated voltage 

AC: 220 - 240 V ±10 %, 50 - 60 Hz 

DC: 220 - 230 V +10 % / -20% 



Permissible ambient temperature -20 °C to +40 °C 

1 x EEx e cable entry M25 x 1.5 


1 x EEx e blanking plug 

Connection terminals L, N, PE; max. 2 x 2,5 mm2 , plug-type terminals 





current ϕ 

nLLK 98018/18 

1/3-1 2 x 18 W EVG 0.16 A ≥ 0.95 1 3465 218 001 

2/5-2,5 2 x 18 W EVG 0.16 A ≥ 0.95 1 3465 218 011 

2/5-4 M 

nLLK 98018/18 CG* 

2 x 18 W EVG 0.16 A ≥ 0.95 1 3465 218 021 

2/5-4 2 x 18 W EVG CG 0.17 A ≥ 0.95 1 3465 218 911 

2/5-4 M 2 x 18 W EVG CG 0.17 A ≥ 0.95 1 3465 218 921 

Single- Double-ended Through-wiring 

ended 2.5 mm2 4 mm2 4 mm2 1/3-1 2/5-2.5 2/5-4 2/5-4M 

1 2 2 Cable entry M25 x 1.5 with dust cap 

2 2 Ex blanking plug 


2 x M20 x 1.5 metal thread, dust cap 

2 x M20 x 1.5 metal thread, blanking plug 




M25 x 1.5 

35 

732 

400 

760 

Hexagon SW 13 

M8, 14 deep 


188 

46 

65 

130 

2

Polar curve 

1 lamp 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

90 

90 

75 

75 

60 

60 

2 lamps 

45 

nLLK 98036 (1 x 36 W) 

nLLK 98036/36 (2 x 36 W) 

45 

40 

80 

120 

160 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

40 

80 

120 

160 


1 x 36 W = 3350 Im 

2 x 36 W = 6700 Im 


1 x 36 W = 86 % 

2 x 36 W = 78 % 

45 

45 

60 

60 

90 

75 

90 

75 


for Zone 2 

nLLK 98036 

nLLK 98036/36 


Zone 2 

Zone 22 

nLLK 98036, nLLK 98036/36 




II 3 G 

II 3 D 





Rated voltage 

AC: 220 - 240 V ±10 %, 50 - 60 Hz 

DC: 220 - 230 V +10 % / -20 % 







Connection terminals L, N, PE; max. 2 x 2,5 mm2 plug-type terminals 





nLLK 98036 

current ϕ 

1/3-1 1 x 36 W EVG 0.16 A 0.95 1 3465 136 001 

2/5-2,5 1 x 36 W EVG 0.16 A 0.95 1 3465 136 011 

2/5-4 M 

nLLK 98036/36 

1 x 36 W EVG 0.16 A 0.95 1 3465 136 021 

1/3-1 2 x 36 W EVG 0.31 A 0.95 1 3465 236 001 

2/5-2,5 2 x 36 W EVG 0.31 A 0.95 1 3465 236 011 

2/5-4 M 

nLLK 98036/36 CG* 

2 x 36 W EVG 0.31 A 0.95 1 3465 236 021 

2/5-4 2 x 36 W EVG CG 0.35 A 0.95 1 3465 236 911 

2/5-4 M 2 x 36 W EVG CG 0.35 A 0.95 1 3465 236 921 

Single- Double-ended Through-wiring 

ended 2.5 mm2 4 mm2 4 mm2 1/3-1 2/5-2.5 2/5-4 2/5-4M 









M25 x 1.5 

35 

Hexagon SW 13 

1332 

700 

M8, 14 deep 

188 

46 


65 

130

Polar curve 

1-lamp 

90 

75 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

90 

75 

60 

2-lamps 

60 

45 

nLLK 98058 (1 x 58 W) 

nLLK 98058/58 (2 x 58 W) 

40 

80 

120 

160 

40 

80 

120 

45 

160 

45 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 


1 x 58 W = 5200 Im 

2 x 58 W = 10400 Im 


1 x 58 W = 83 % 

2 x 58 W = 72 % 

45 

60 

60 

90 

75 

90 

75 


for Zone 2 

nLLK 98058 

nLLK 98058/58 


Zone 2 

Zone 22 

nLLK 98058, nLLK 98058/58 




II 3 G 

II 3 D 





Rated voltage 

AC: 220 - 240 V ±10 %, 50-60 Hz 

DC: 220 - 230 V +10 % / -20 % 







Connection terminals L, N, PE; max. 2 x 2,5 mm2 plug-type terminals 





nLLK 98058 

current ϕ 

1/3-1 1 x 58 W EVG 0.25 A 0.95 1 3465 158 001 

2/5-2,5 1 x 58 W EVG 0.25 A 0.95 1 3465 158 011 

2/5-4 M 

nLLK 98058/58 

1 x 58 W EVG 0.25 A 0.95 1 3465 158 021 

1/3-1 2 x 58 W EVG 0.45 A 0.95 1 3465 258 001 

2/5-2,5 2 x 58 W EVG 0.45 A 0.95 1 3465 258 011 

2/5-4 M 

nLLK 98058/58 CG* 

2 x 58 W EVG 0.45 A 0.95 1 3465 258 021 

2/5-4 2 x 58 W EVG CG 0.54 A 0.95 1 3465 258 911 

2/5-4 M 2 x 58 W EVG CG 0.54 A 0.95 1 3465 258 921 

Singleended 

Double-ended Through-wiring 

1/3-1 2/5-2.5 2/5-4 2/5-4M 









M25x1,5 

35 

Hexagon SW 13 

1632 

700 

1660 

M8, 14 deep 

188 

46 

65 

130 


2

Polar curve 

1 lamp 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

90 

90 

75 

75 

60 

60 

2 lamps 

45 

40 

80 

120 

45 

160 

45 

30 

30 

15 200 

0 

15 

C 0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

40 

80 

120 

160 


1 x 36 W = 3350 Im 

2 x 36 W = 6700 Im 


1 x 36 W = 86 % 

2 x 36 W = 78 % 

45 

60 

60 

90 

75 

90 

75 

Further Approvals 

Fluorescent Light Fittings 


Class I 

Div 2 

Group A, 

B, C, D 

eLLK 92... 

Type of protection 

Class 1 Zone I AEx ed IIC T4 

Ex ed IIC T4 

Approvals 

UL and CSA LISTED 

Class I Div 2 Group A.B.C. and D. 



Rated voltage AC: 110 - 240 V ±10 %, 47 - 63 Hz 

Degree of protection NEMA 4X wet locations 

Permissible ambient temperature -20 °C bis +50 °C 

Cable entries 

Hubs M25 - 3/4” NPT 

incl. blanking plugs M25 x 1.5 



Illuminant 81 IEC 1105-1 (18 W) 

Philips F17T8/TL841 

GE F17T8/SPX41 

Osram/Sylvania 

81 IEC 1305-2 (36 W) 

F017/841 

Philips F32 T8/TL841 

GE F32 T8/SPX41 

Osram/Sylvania F032/841 

Mechanical sizes See pages 2/9 - 2/21 



EVG current ϕ 

eLLK 92018/18 2 x 17/18 W 110 - 240 V 0.18 A 0.95 1 2265 875 311 

eLLK 92036/36 2 x 32/36 W 110 - 240 V 0.36 A 0.95 1 2266 875 311 

eLLK 92018/18 Ni 2 x 17/18 W 110 - 120 V 0.46 A 0.95 1 2260 876 333 

eLLK 92018/18 Ni 2 x 17/18 W 220 - 240 V 0.23 A 0.95 1 2260 876 311 

eLLK 92036/36 Ni 2 x 32/36W 110 - 120 V 0.80 A 0.95 1 2261 913 000 

eLLK 92036/36 Ni 2 x 32/36 W 220 - 240 V 0.40 A 0.95 1 2261 876 311 


SEV (Switzerland) 

FTZU (Czech Republic) 

BKI (Hungary) 

Prochem (Poland) 

Germanic Lloyd 

SNTC101 (Slowakei) 

Russia 


Eye bolt 

Hexagon 

screw 

Ceiling 

mounting 

bracket 

D92 

Pipe clamp 

Wall bracket 

M8 

165 

225 

200 


40 

9 

30 

Fixing Materials and Accessories 

for Light Fittings 


Type/ Corrosion Qty. per Order No. 

code protection light fitting 

Eye bolt A2 galvanized 2 2 2480 002 000 

Hexagon screw S4 CrNi 2 2 2480 054 000 

Ceiling mounting 

bracket D92 CrNi 2 2 2480 092 000 

Type/ Corrosion for pipes Outer Ø Qty. per Order No. 

code protection DIN D (mm) light fitting 

Pipe clamp R12 hot galvanized 1 1 / 4 " 38 - 42 2 2 2480 462 000 

R14 CrNi 1 1 / 4 " 38 - 42 2 2 2480 464 000 

R22 hot galvanized 1 1 / 2 " 47 - 51 2 2 2480 472 000 

R32 hot galvanized 2" 56 - 60 2 2 2480 482 000 

Wall bracket W27 hot galvanized 1 1 / 4 " 1 2 2483 027 000 

Accessories 

Type/Code per light fitting Order No. 

Hexagon key SW13 eLLK 92 3 2485 000 005 

Fluorescent lamps 18 W (G13-81-IEC-1105-1) eLL. 92018 ... 3 2475 900 081 

Bi-pin holder 36 W (G1)-81-IEC 1305-2) eLL. 92036 ... 3 2475 900 082 

Bi-pin holder 58 W (G1)-81-IEC 1545-1) 

Battery set type 2710-02 with LED display 

eLLK 92058 ... 3 2475 900 083 

and micro-processor monitoring eLL. 92... Ni 2 2710 902 000 


2



Flameproof Light Fittings 

for Fluorescent Lamps 


3

dKLK Explosion-Protected Light Fittings 

for Compact Fluorescent Lamps 

■ Due to the EVG technology, 

the service life is 8 times 

longer than that of 

comparable incandescent 

lamps 

■ Cost reduction due to longer 

intervals between servicing 


■ Large EEx-e terminal 

compartment for ceiling 

and wall mounting 

■ Can be used as signal and 

safety lighting in the offshore 

field with coloured, transparent 

protective covers 

■ Also available with 

CG monitoring unit as 

individually monitored 

emergency light fittings 

for connection to CEAG 

emergency lighting supply 

systems 

Description 

The explosion-protected light fittings with 

electronic ballast (EVG) for compact 

fluorescent lamps fulfil the requirements 

of EN 50014, EN 50018 and EN 50019, 

as well as of EN 60598, Part 2.22 for use 

in Zone 1 and Zone 2 in accordance with 

IEC 79. The enclosures are made of 

polyester reinforced with glass fibre and 

have a transparent protective cover made 

of polycarbonate, that is either clear or 

coloured. The dKLK 88110 CG series also 

features a CG monitoring module and an 

addressing switch. It is designed as an 

individually monitored emergency light 

fitting for operation with CEAG emergency 

lighting supply systems. 


90 

60 

dKLK 88110 

with clear cover 

Exit sign cube for 

dKLK 88110 CG 

25 

50 

75 

30 

100 

125 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

Luminous intensity distribution curve 

dKLK 88110 CG 

Luminous flux of lamp: 

520 lm 


75 % 

60 

90 


dKLK 88110/dKLK 88110 CG 


dKLK 88110/dKLK 88110 CG 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Type of protection EEx de IIC T6 

Certificate of Conformity* PTB No. Ex-92.C.1001 


Protective cover Polycarbonate 

Rated voltage 

AC 220 - 230 V +/– 10 %, 50 - 60 Hz 

DC 220 V + 25 % – 20 % 


Insulation class I 

Permissible ambient temperature – 20 °C to + 40 °C 

EEx e blanking plug M25 x 1.5 

Cable entries for conductors 8-17 mm 

EEx e cable entries M25 x 1.5 

Connection terminals L1 + N + PE, max. 2.5 mm2 Compact fluorescent lamp 

Lamp PL-C 10 W/8/4 P Fa. Phillips 

DULUX D/E 10 W Fa. Osram with socket G24q-1 


Battery current (220 V DC) 35 mA 

Mains power (230 V AC) 16 VA 


Type Colour of cover Circuit Order No. 

dKLK 88110 clear EVG CGS 1 228 288 P 4001 

dKLK 88110 red EVG CGS 1 228 288 P 4005 

dKLK 88110 green EVG CGS 1 228 288 P 4007 

dKLK 88110 blue EVG CGS 1 228 288 P 4008 

dKLK 88110 CG white EVG with CG 

monitoring and 

addressing switch 4 0071 344 880 

Accessories 


Exit sign cube (242 x 227 x 242 mm) 4 0071 344 115 

Compact fluorescent lamp, 4-pin, 10 W TC-DEL 3 0601 035 000 

* EC-Type Examination Certificate to directive 94/9/EC applied for 


145 

83 

128 

84 

215 

65 


3


AB 12108-EVG for Connection 

to CEAG Safety Lighting Systems 

with Single Monitoring 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Light fitting enclosure made 

of copper-free aluminium 

with borosilicate glass tube 

For connection to the CEAGUARD 48 

units and GVL 24, ZVL 24, ZB 96 

Monitoring of light fitting, 

lamp and lead 

8 W fluorescent lamp for 

mains and emergency lighting 

Description 

Emergency light fittings are necessary 

wherever there is the risk of a hazard in the 

event of failure of the general lighting 

system. The Ex-emergency light fitting 

AB 12108-EVG is used for illuminating 

emergency exit routes, as well as, for 

pictograph light fittings. 

When connected to the CEAG type 

GVL 24, ZVL 24, ZB 96 or CEAGUARD 48 

safety lighting systems, the luminaire 

and its whole emergency light circuit (lamp, 

connecting load, switch) are reliably 

monitored. To achieve this, the built-in 

electronic ballast is fitted with a coding 

switch which assigns an address to each 

luminaire. 

It is equipped with an 8 W fluorescent 

lamp and is approved to EN 50 014 ff. for 

use in Zones 1 and 2, as well as for the 

temperature class T6. Therefore, it can be 

used in almost all areas in which a 

potentially explosive atmosphere might 

occur. 

The enclosure is made of copper-free 

aluminium with a borosilicate glass tube. 


90 

AB 12108-EVG 

with legend 

LWRI 

Luminous flux distribution curve 

60 

50 

100 

150 

60 

30 

200 

250 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

Rated luminous flux of lamp: approx. 400 lm 

Luminous flux factor: approx. 83 % 

90 


AB 12108-EVG for Connection 

to CEAG Safety Lighting Systems 

with Single Monitoring 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Typ AB 12108-EVG 

Type of protection EEx d IIC T6 

Certificate of Conformity LOM 90.C. 0027 

Enclosure material Copper-free aluminium 

Glass tube Borosilicate glass 

Rated voltage 

230 V AC, ± 10 %, 50/60 Hz 

220 V DC, +25% / -20% 



Permissible ambient temperature -10°C to +40°C 

Cable entries see ordering details 

Connection terminals 2 x 2,5 mm2 Lamps 

1 x 8 W fluorescent lamp for mains and emergency 

lighting operating with G5 lamp socket 



Type Entry Cable entry Blanking plug Order No. 

holes for 10-14 mm 

AB12108-EVG 2 x 3/4” – 1 x 3/4” NOR 000 005 060 820 

AB12108-EVG 2 x 3/4” 1 x 3/4” 1 x 3/4” NOR 000 005 060 837 

 

Fixing accessories on request 

Accessories 


Legend LWRE NOR 000 000 506 915 

Legend LWRD NOR 000 000 506 907 

Legend LWRH EXIT 

NOR 000 000 506 965 

Legend LWRI NOR 000 000 506 966 

Ceiling mounting bracket D 92 (NiCr, 2 pc.) 2 2480 092 000 


144 

Entries 

140 

405 

M8 x 12 M8 x 12 

460 


50 

3


EE 11 PL with Compact 

Fluorescent Lamp 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Enclosure made of 

copper-free aluminium with 

borosilicate glass tube 

11 W compact fluorescent 

lamp for emergency lighting 

operation 

3 W incandescent lamp as 

continuous lighting lamp 

Red and green LED for 

indication battery charging 

and operating voltage 

Description 

Emergency light fittings are necessary 

wherever there is the risk of a hazard in 

the event of failure of the general lighting 

system. 

The individual battery - emergency light 

fitting EE 11 PL is used for illuminating 

emergency exit routes, as well as for 

pictograph light fittings. 

It is equipped with an 11 W compact 

fluorescent lamp and is approved to 

EN 50 014 ff. for use in zones 1 and 2, as 

well as for the temperature class T6. 

Therefore, it can be used in almost all 

areas in which a potentially explosive 

atmosphere might occur. 

The enclosure is made of copper-free 

aluminium with a borosilicate glass tube. 


90 

EE 11 PL 

with legend 

LWRI 


60 

50 

100 

150 

60 

30 

200 

250 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

Rated luminous flux of lamp: approx. 900 lm 

Light efficiency in operation: approx. 83% 

Luminous flux factor during emergency 

lighting operation: approx. 67% 

90 


EE 11 PL with Compact 

Fluorescent Lamp 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Type EE 11 PL 


Certificate of Conformity LOM 90.C. 0027 


Glass tube Borosilicate glass 

Rated voltage 230 V +- 10%, 50 Hz, other ratings on request 



Permissible ambient temperature -5 °C to +40 °C* 


Connection terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2 1 x 11 W compact fluorescent lamp for 

Lamps 

emergency lighting operation, lamp socket 2G7 

1 x incand. lamp for continous lighting, 

12 V, 0.3 A lamp socket E10 


Nickel cadmium 4 Ah 

Batteries 

Red LED for indicating charging 

Green LED for indicating 

available 

Rated emergency duration 1 h 

Note: 

Only open light fittings outside 

the hazardous area! 


Type Rated Entry Cable entry Blanking Order No. 

voltage holes for 10-14 mm plug 

220-230-240 V 2 x 3/4” 

EE11PL 

±10 % 50/60 Hz 2 x 3/4” 

– 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 160 013 

NOR 000 005 160 012 

108-127 V 2 x 3/4” 

EE11PL 

±10 % 50/60 Hz 2 x 3/4” 

– 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 160 014 

NOR 000 005 160 015 

* Longer charging times are necessary for temperatures under -5 °C. 

Fixing accessories on request. 

Accessories 


Legend LWRE NOR 000 000 506 915 

Legend LWRD NOR 000 000 506 907 

Legend LWRH EXIT 

NOR 000 000 506 965 

Legend LWRI NOR 000 000 506 966 

Ceiling mounting bracket D 92 (NiCr, 2 pc.) 2 2480 092 000 

 


144 

Entries 

140 

405 

M8 x 12 M8 x 12 

460 


3

AB 12 Explosion-Protected Light Fittings 

for Fluorescent Lamps with 

Conventional Ballasts 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Robust enclosure 

Easy opening 

due to screw plug 

on end 

Easy access 

to ballast 

Large terminal compartment 

Smooth surface for easy 

cleaning 

Temperature class T6 (T5) 

Description 

The series of light fittings for fluorescent 

lamps fulfils the requirements of the 

European Standards EN 50014, 

EN 50018 and EN 60598. 

Characteristic features of the light fittings: 

● Cooper-free aluminium(Cu < 0,1 %) 

● Protective tube made of borosilicate 

glass with high mechanical and thermal 

stability, sealed with threaded cover in 

the factory 

● Easy to open threaded cover for simple 

servicing, large terminal compartment 

and lamp guide on a guide carriage 

● Electromagnetic ballast for fluorescent 

lamps with G 13 holder 

● Independent lamp circuits for each lamp 


90 

AB12240C 


120 120 

60 

25 

50 

75 

60 

30 

100 

125 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

Luminous flux of lamp 

approx. 2500 lm (2 x 18 W) 

approx. 5800 lm (2 x 36 W PL) 

approx. 6000 lm (2 x 36 W) 

approx. 9600 lm (2 x 58 W) 

90 

AB 12 Explosion Protected 

Light Fittings for Fluorescent 

Lamps with Conventional 

Ballasts 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Type AB 12 


EEx d IIB T6 (20 W u. PL 36 W), 

T5 (40 W + 65 W) 

Certificate of Conformity LOM 90.C.0027 

Enclosure material Copper-free aluminium, yellow polyester paint finish 

Transparent cover Borosilicate glass 

Rated voltage 230 V ± 10 %, 50 Hz cos ≥ 0.9, with starter 



Permissible ambient temperature - 20 °C to + 55 °C 

Enclosure entry holes 

Direct entry: EEx d 

2 x 3/4” ISO 7/1 

L1, N and PE: 2 x 2.5 mm2 Connection terminals 

PE ext. 2 x 6 mm2 Lamps 

2-pin (G13) for 18/20 W, 36/40 W, 58/65 W 

1) 

4-pin (2G11) for PL36W 

Weight (kg/Type) 7.0 / 8.5 / 12 / 14 

Other voltages, 

instantaneous start, electronic ballast, 

Options through-wiring terminals 

L1, L2, L3, N and PE: 2 x 2.5 mm2 other PL lamps 


Type Lamps Entry I/A Cable entry Blanking Order No. 

holes for cable plug 

2 x 

AB12220C 

18/20 W 

2 x 3/4” 

2 x 3/4” 

0.37 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 060 346 

NOR 000 005 060 347 

2 x 

AB12236PL 

36 W-PL 

2 x 3/4” 

2 x 3/4” 

0.39 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 060 669 

NOR 000 005 060 670 

2 x 

AB12240C 

36/40 W 

2 x 3/4” 

2 x 3/4” 

0.43 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 060 354 

NOR 000 005 060 355 

2 x 

AB12265C 

58/65 W 

2 x 3/4” 

2 x 3/4” 

0.67 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 060 362 

NOR 000 005 060 363 

Accessories 

Type for light fitting Order No. 

Reflector RAB 220 AB 12220 C and AB 12236 PL NOR 000 005 060 403 

RAB 240 AB 12240 C NOR 000 005 060 411 

RAB 265 AB 12265 C NOR 000 005 060 429 

Reflector with GRAB 220 AB 12220 C and AB 12236 PL NOR 000 005 060 479 

guard GRAB 240 AB 12240 C NOR 000 005 060 487 

1) Lamps are not included 

GRAB 265 AB 12265 C NOR 000 005 060 495 

 


236 

236 

optional entries, on request 

Entries 

103 

144 

Typ L A 

AB12 220C 707 652 

AB12 236PL 707 652 

AB12 240C 1320 1265 

AB12 265C 

140 

1620 1565 


A 

L 

M8 x 12 mm 

3

90 

60 

50 

100 

150 

60 

30 

200 

250 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

90 

EVF 240C 


EVF 1... 

60 

50 

100 

150 

60 

30 

200 

250 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

Luminous flux of lamp: 

approx. 1250 lm (1 x 18 W) 

approx. 3000 lm (1 x 36 W) 

approx. 6000 lm (2 x 36 W) 

approx. 7800 lm (1 x 58 W) 

approx. 9600 lm (2 x 58 W) 


70 % 

90 

EVF 2... 

90 

EVF Explosion Protected Light Fittings 

for Fluorescent Lamps with 

Conventional Ballasts 


Type EVF 


Certificate of Conformity LOM 96.D.2008X 



Rated voltage 230 V ± 10 %, 50 Hz cos > 0.95 with starter 



Permissible ambient temperature - 20 °C to + 40 °C (other temps. on request) 

Enclosure entry holes 

Direct entry: EEx d 

2 x 3/4” ISO 7/1 


PE ext. 2 x 6 mm2 Lamps1) 2-pin (G13) for 18/20 W, 36/40 W and 58/65 W 

Weight (kg/Type) 6.2 / 9.0 / 14.6 / 16.9 / 26.4 

Options Other voltage 


Type Lamps I/A Weight Cable entries Blanking Order No. 

/kg for 10-14 mm plugs 

1 x 

EVF120C 

18/20 W 0.15 6.2 

– 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 070 064 

NOR 000 005 070 065 

1 x 

EVF140C 

36/40 W 0.25 9.0 

– 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 070 030 

NOR 000 005 070 031 

1 x 

EVF165C 

58/65 W 0.39 14.6 

– 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 070 402 

NOR 000 005 070 403 

2 x 

EVF240C 

36/40 W 0.5 16.9 

– 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 070 022 

NOR 000 005 070 023 

2 x 

EVF265C 

58/65 W 0.78 26.4 

– 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

1 x 3/4” 

NOR 000 005 070 428 

NOR 000 005 070 429 

Accessories 

Type for light fitting Order No. 

Guard REVF 20 EVF 120C and 220 C NOR 000 000 507 385 

REVF 40 EVF 140C and 240 C NOR 000 000 507 393 

REVF 65 EVF 165C and 265 C NOR 000 000 507 319 

1) Lamps are not included 


9,5 

B 

E 

B’ 

Type B B’ E 

EVF 120C 905 827 865 

EVF 140C 1115 1437 1475 

EVF 165C 1900 1820 1860 

EVF 220C 905 827 865 

EVF 240C 1115 1437 1475 

EVF 265C 1900 1820 1860 

 

Entries 

132 

110 245 

EVF 1 EVF 2 

26 


50


Pendant Light Fittings and 

Floodlights for Incandescent 

and Discharge Lamps 


4

Explosion-Protected Pendant 

Light Fittings for Incandescent 

and High Pressure Discharge 

Lamps without Ballasts 

■ Robust light alloy 

enclosure 

■ Simple installation 

■ Stainless steel screws 

■ Easy lamp replacement 

■ Fulfils highest requirements 

on corrosion protection 

and mechanical strength 

■ Smooth, easy-to-clean 

surface 

Description 

These explosion-protected light fittings for 

incandescent and discharge lamps fulfil 

the requirements of the European Standards 

EN 50014, EN 50018, EN 50019 

and EN 60598. The light fittings are fitted 

with an impact-resistant and thermally 

stable dome-shaped glass. All external 

screws are made of high quality stainless 

steel. The distinguishing characteristics of 

this series are the low weight and the 

simple installation. The types AB 50 and 

EV .. are pendant light fittings, the AB 80 

light fitting is a flat light fitting for ceiling 

mounting and the robust SPG 1 N with 

guard is designed as a portable work 

light. 


AB 80 

Ex-Protected Ceiling Light Fitting 

AB 80 



282 

205 

140 

9 

150 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Type AB 80 

Type of protection EEx d II B T5 (60 W), T4 (100 W) 

Certificate of Conformtiy LOM 90, C, 0025 

Enclosure material Cast iron 


Rated voltages ≤ 250 V AC 



Permissible ambient temperature -20 °C to + 40 °C 

Cable entry holes 

Direct entry EEx d: 

ISO 7/1 thread opposite, see table 

L1 and N: 1 x 2.5 mm2 Connection terminals (or 2 x 1.5 mm2 ) 

PE internal and external: 2 x 6 mm2 Lamp socket E27 to IEC 238 

Lamp1) Incandescent lamp 60/100 W 

Weight 6.6 kg 


Type Entry Cable entry Blanking Order No. 

hole for cable plug 

AB 80 2 x 3/4” – 1 x 3/4” NOR 000 005 120 124 

AB 80 2 x 3/4” 10-14 mm 1 x 3/4” NOR 000 005 120 125 

 

Accessories 


Guard GAB 80 NOR 000 005 120 439 

1) Lamp not included with delivery 

optional entry, on request 

entry 


4

90 

AB 50 

60 

25 

50 

75 

60 

30 

100 

125 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

Luminous flux: 

60 W incandescent lamp: 730 lm 

100 W incandescent lamp 1380 lm 

Light efficiency in operation: 67.9 % 

90 


AB 50 and SPG 1N 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Type: AB 50 and SPG 1N 


Direct entry: EEx d IIC T4 (100 W)/T5 (60 W) 

Indirect entry: EEx de IIC T4 (100 W)/T5 (60 W) 

Certificate of Conformity LOM 91.C.0033 X 



Rated voltages ≤ 250 V AC 




AB 50 UI: 2 x ISO 7/1 thread 

Cable entry holes AB 50 IXM: 2 x ISO M25 thread 

SPG 1N: 1 x ISO 7/1 thread 

Direct entry: L, N, PE; 1 x 2.5 mm2 or 

2 x 2.5 mm2 , external PE 2 x 6 mm2 Connection terminals 

Indirect entry: L, N; max. 2 x 4 mm2 , 

PE max. 2 x 6 mm2 Lamp socket E 27 to IEC 238 

Lamp2) Incandescent lamp 60/100 W 

AB 50 UI: 1.5 kg 

Weight AB 50 IXM: 2.6 kg 

SPG 1N: 2.2 kg 


Lamp output and temperature class 1) 

Type Entry Cable entry Blanking Order No. 


AB 50 IU direct entry 

2 x 3/4" 

2 x 3/4" 

– 

10-14 mm 

– 

1 x 3/4" 

NOR 000 115 110 289 

NOR 000 115 110 292 

AB 50 IXM indirect entry 2 x M25 x 1.5 – – NOR 000 115 110 320 

2 x M25 x 1.5 10-14 mm 1 x M25 x 1.5 NOR 000 115 110 321 

SPG 1N portable mains light fitting 1 x 3/4" 10-14 mm – NOR 000 115 110 745 

1) Temperature stability of cable being used: ≥ 100°C 

2) Lamps not included in delivery 

Accessories 


Ceiling bracket with screw 3/4" AS.EV/AB NOR 000 005 110 828 


AB 50 IU 

 

ø 125 

254 


entry 

AB 50 IXM SPG 1N 

ø 125 

400 

125 


358

EVI 500 UD 


Serie EV.. 


Type 

Type of protection EEx d/de IIC (see table for temp. class) 


Copper-free aluminium, yellow polyester paint finish 

Enclosure material Screw connection ring made of cast iron, 

green PTFE coating 


Rated voltages ≤ 250 V 

Rated current see table 




Direct entry EEx d: 2 x 3/4” ISO 7/1 

Cable entry holes 

Indirect entry EEx e: 2 x ISO M25 x 1.5 

Direct entry: L1, N and PE: 1 x 2.5 mm2 to socket (or 2 x 1.5 mm2 ) 

Connection terminals 

Indirect entry: L1, N and PE: 2 x 2.5 mm2 external PE: 2 x 6 mm2 Lamp socket E27/E40 to IEC 238 

GLS: incandescent lamp; HME-SB: mixed light lamp 

HME: mercury vapour high pressure lamp; 

Lamps1) HSE: sodium vapour high pressure lamp; 

HIT: halogen metal vapour lamp 

Weight 

Other voltages and frequencies, PTFE 

coating, through wiring with indirect entry 

Options2) L1, L2, L3, N and 

PE: 2 x 4 mm2 , external PE: 2 x 6 mm2 Entry from top for conduit installation 

Design 

Type Temperature class, lamp output (W) 3) 

GLS HME-SB HME4) HSE4) HIT4) 150 W 200 W 300 W 500 W 160 W 250 W 80 W 125 W 250 W 70 W 150 W 250 W 250 W 

EVI 200 T4 T4 – – T3 – T4 T4 – T4 – – – 

EVI 500 

Rated 

– – T4 T3 – T3 – – T3 – T4 T4 T4 

current/A 0.65 0.85 1.3 2.2 0.7 1.1 0.8 1.2 2.1 1.0 1.8 3.0 3.0 


2) On request 

3) Ambient temperature > 55 °C on request 

4) Ballast in separate enclosure required 


4

90 

60 

25 

50 

75 

60 

30 

100 

125 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

EVI 200 


approx. 2.220 lm (1 x 150 W/GLS) 




approx. 3.100 lm (1 x 160 W/HME-SB) 


approx. 3.400 lm (1 x 80 W/HME) 



approx. 5.800 lm (1 x 70 W/HSE) 



approx. 17.500 lm (1 x 250 W/HIT) 


approx. 75 % 

90 


Series EV.. 


Light fittings without ballast: 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Type Entry Cable entry1) Blanking Order No. 

Direct 

entry 


EVI 200 UD 2 x 3/4” – 1 x 3/4” NOR 000 005 100 753 

EVI 200 UD 2 x 3/4” 10 - 14 mm 1 x 3/4” NOR 000 005 100 754 

EVI 500 UD 2 x 3/4” – 1 x 3/4” NOR 000 005 100 761 

EVI 500 UD 2 x 3/4” 10 - 14 mm 1 x 3/4” NOR 000 005 100 762 

Indirect 

entry 

EVI 200 XM 2 x M25 x 1.5 – 1 x M25 NOR 000 115 110 941 

EVI 200 XM 2 x M25 x 1.5 10 - 14 mm 1 x M25 NOR 000 005 110 941 

EVI 500 XM 2 x M25 x 1.5 – 1 x M25 NOR 000 115 110 942 

EVI 500 XM 2 x M25 x 1.5 10 - 14 mm 1 x M25 NOR 000 005 110 942 

Accessories 

Scope of delivery for type Order No. 

Guard G. EV 200/AB 51 EVI 200 NOR 000 005 110 860 

G. EV 500 EVI 500 NOR 000 005 110 878 

External reflector PC. EV 200/AB 51 EVI 200 NOR 000 005 110 894 

PC. EV 500 EVI 500 NOR 000 005 110 901 

Operating key KEY, EV EV NOR 000 005 110 886 

Ring bolt CEV/AB EV NOR 000 005 110 852 

Ceiling bracket 

Adjustable wall 

AS. EV/AB EV NOR 000 005 110 828 

mounting SPU. EV/AB EV NOR 000 005 110 951 

Pole mounting BC. EV/AB EV NOR 000 005 110 836 

Wall mounting SP. EV 200 EVI 200 NOR 000 005 110 935 

SP. EV 500 EVI 500 NOR 000 005 110 943 

 



entry 

280 

EVI 200 UD EVI 200 XM 

340 

245 

EVI 500 UD EVI 500 XM 

300 

460 

400 

245 

300 


Ex -Protected Pendant Light Fittings 


Series EV.. 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Robust light alloy 

enclosure 

Stainless steel screws 


Easy opening of lamp 

compartment 

Simple installation 

Smooth, easy-to-clean 

surface 

Description 

The pendant light fitting series for high 

pressure discharge lamps fulfils the 

requirements of the European Standards 

EN 50014, EN 50018, EN 50019 and EN 

60598. 

Features of the light fittings: 

● Enclosure made of copper-free 

aluminium (Cu

EVM 125 ZM 

EVM 250 ZM 

EVS 150 ZM 

EVS 250 ZM 

EVH 250 ZM 



Series EV ... 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Type 

Type of protection EEx de IIC (see table for temp. class) 


Copper-free aluminium, yellow polyester 

Enclosure material paint finish, screw connection ring made of 

cast iron, green PTFE coating 

Transparent cover -20 °C to +55 °C 


Rated voltages 

with built-in ballast 

230 V + 5 % – 10 %, 50 Hz, cos 0,95 



HME: mercury vapour high pressure lamp 

Lamps1) HSE: sodium vapour high pressure lamp 


Lamp socket E27/E40 to IEC 258 

Permissible ambient temperature2) – 20 °C to + 55 °C 

Cable entry holes 2 x ISO M25 x 1.5 


External PE: 2 x 6 mm2 Weight 

EVM 70-125 

EVM 150-250 

14 kg 

22.4 kg 


Lamp output and temperature class 

Type Lamp Temp. Cable entry Blanking Order No. 

class for cable plug 

EVM 125 ZM HME 125 W T4 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x M25 

1 x M25 

NOR 000 115 110 879 

NOR 000 115 110 079 

EVM 250 ZM HME 250 W T3 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x M25 

1 x M25 

NOR 000 115 110 881 

NOR 000 115 110 080 

EVS 70 ZM HSE 70 W T4 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x M25 

1 x M25 

NOR 000 115 110 880 

NOR 000 115 110 086 


– 

10-14 mm 

1 x M25 

1 x M25 

NOR 000 115 110 883 

NOR 000 115 110 087 


– 

10-14 mm 

1 x M25 

1 x M25 

NOR 000 115 110 882 

NOR 000 115 110 088 

EVH 250 ZM HIT 250 W T4 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x M25 

1 x M25 

NOR 000 115 110 945 

NOR 000 115 110 046 


2) Ambient temperature > 55 °C on request 

Options: Other voltages and frequencies; PTFE coating; through wiring with: L1, L2, L3, N, and PE; 

external PE 2 x 6 mm 2 ; entry from top for conduit installation 


90 

60 

20 

40 

60 

60 

30 

80 

100 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

EVS 250 ZM 









75 % 

90 



Series EV ... 

 

Accessories 


entries 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Type for type Order No. 

Guard G. EV 200/AB 51 EVM 125 ZM 

EVS 70 ZM NOR 000 005 110 860 

G. EV 500 EVM 250 ZM 

EVS 150 ZM 

EVS 250 ZM 

EVH 250 ZM NOR 000 005 110 878 

External reflector PC. EV 200/AB 51 EVM 125 ZM 

EVS 70 ZM NOR 000 005 110 894 

PC. EV 500 EVM 250 ZM 

EVS 150 ZM 

EVS 250 ZM 

EVH 250 ZM NOR 000 005 110 901 

Light fitting key KEY, EV EV NOR 000 005 110 886 

Ring bolt CEV/AB EV NOR 000 005 110 852 

Ceiling bracket AS. EV/AB EV NOR 000 005 110 828 

Adjustable wall mounting SPU. EV/AB EV NOR 000 005 110 951 

Pole mounting BC. EV/AB EV NOR 000 005 110 836 

Wall mounting SP. EV 200 EVM 125 ZM 

EVS 70 ZM NOR 000 005 110 935 

SP. EV 500 EVM 250 ZM 

EVS 150 ZM 

EVS 250 ZM 

EVH 250 ZM NOR 000 005 110 943 

EVM 125 ZM 

EVM 70 ZM 

460 

245 

560 

300 

EVM 250 ZM 

EVS 150 ZM 

EVS 250 ZM 

EVH 250 ZM 


4


dHLS 85250/dHLS 85400 

for High-Pressure 

Discharge Lamps 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

For the economical 

illumination of large objects 

Robust light metal enclosure 

with special paint finish 

Optional external reflector 

Easy replacement of bulb, 

even after long periods of 

operation 

Description 

Built and tested according to 

DIN EN 50 014 and following/VDE 0170/ 

0171/5.78. 

Suited for use in hazardous areas in 

zones 1 and 2 according to IEC 79 and 

VDE 0165. 

The enclosure of the light fitting is made 

of light metal and is treated with a special 

two-component paint finish. 

The pendant light fitting is designed for 

outdoor use. Due to the high degree of 

operational reliability, it has proved to be 

particularly suited for the illumination of 

large areas or the flood-lighting of large 

objects in chemical and off-shore plants. 

The pendant light fitting is fitted with a 

glass dome and, if required, with an 

external reflector. 


90 

60 

20 

40 

60 

60 

30 

80 

100 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

90 

dHLS 85250/400 

Luminous intensity distribution curves: 

without external reflector (AR) 

dHLS 8520 / 85400 

with external reflector (AR) 

dHLS 85250 / dHLS 85400 

60 

50 

100 

150 

60 

30 

200 

250 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 


250 W: 13.500 lm, 400 W: 22.000 lm (HME) 

250 W: 25.000 lm, 400 W: 47.000 lm (HSE) 


dHLS 85250: approx. 77 % (without AR) 

dHLS 85400: approx. 71 % (without AR) 

dHLS 85250: approx. 55 % (with AR) 

dHLS 85400: approx. 53 % (with AR) 

90 

90 


dHLS 85250/dHLS 85400 




Type dHLS 85250 / dHLS 85400 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 


EEx de IIC T3, (400 W) 

EEx de IIC T4, (250 W) 

Certificate of Conformtiy* INEX 85, 103.432 

Enclosure material Cast light alloy with special paint finish, grey 

Rated voltage 230 V +6%/-10%, 50 Hz 




Cable entries 

M 25 x 1.5 for cables from Ø 8-17 mm 

M 25 x 1.5 with blanking plug 

Connection terminals L + N + PE; max. 2.5 mm2 Lamps 

Mercury vapour high-pressure lamp HME 

4) 

Sodium vapour high-pressure lamp HSE 

Weight 

approx. 30 kg 

approx. 37 kg with compensation box 



Type Lamp Rated Power Order No. 

current factor cos (without lamp) 

dHLS 85250 250 W HME 2.2 A 0.5 ind. 1) CGS 123 8688 P0001 

250 W HME 1.1 A 0.8 comp. 2) CGS 123 8688 P1001 

250 W HSE 3.0 A 0.5 ind. 1) CGS 123 8688 P2001 

250 W HSE 1.5 A 0.8 comp. 2) CGS 123 8688 P3001 

dHLS 85400 400 W HME 3.25 A 0.6 ind. 1) CGS 123 8788 P0001 

400 W HME 2.5 A 0.8 comp. 2) CGS 123 8788 P1001 

400 W HSE 4.4 A 0.5 ind. 1) CGS 123 8788 P2001 

400 W HSE 3.0 A 0.8 comp. 2) CGS 123 8788 P3001 

1) see dimensions drawing 1 2) see dimensions drawing 2 


Accessories 


Ring bolt (10 pieces) GHG 690 1921 R0003 

Mounting bracket L 218 3) GHG 690 1913 R0001 

Mounting bracket L 430 3) GHG 690 1913 R0002 

External reflector (AR) CGS 223 7990 P1000 

Lamp HME 250 W CGS 323 7990 P1010 

Lamp HME 400 W CGS 323 7990 P1011 

Lamp HSE 250 W CGS 323 8600 P1009 

Lamp HSE 400 W 

3) see dimensions drawing 3 

CGS 323 8700 P1009 


570 48 

Dimensions drawing 1 

2 ring bolts 

325 

Ø 320 

Ø 500 

570 210 


344 

120 

Compensation 

box 

Ø 320 

Ø 500 

M10, 18 deep 


Mounting bracket 

18 

R max 15 

218 

430 

304 

120 

11 


4

Ex-Floodlight dTLS 85250 



■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

For the economical 

illumination of large objects 

Robust light metal housing 

with special paint finish 

Vaporized reflectors for 

various angles of dispersion 

Easy replacement of bulb, 

even after long periods of 

operation 

Description 

Built and tested according to 

DIN EN 50 014 and following/VDE 0170/ 

0171/5.78. Suited for use in zone 1 and 

zone 2 hazardous areas according to IEC 

79 and VDE 0165. 

The enclosure of the light fitting is made 

of light metal and is treated with a special 

two-component paint finish. 

The floodlight is designed for outdoor use. 

Due to the high degree of operational 

reliability, it has proved to be particularly 

suited for the illumination of large areas or 

the flood-lighting of large objects in 

chemical and off-shore plants. 

The vaporized reflectors are designed for 

various angles of dispersion. 


90 

60 

75 

150 

225 

60 

30 

300 

30 

C 0 

375 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

90 

dTLS 85250 

Luminous intensity distribution curves: 

Stepped reflector with diffuser 

dTLS 85250 S 

Parabolic reflector 

dTLS 85250 P 

60 

750 

1500 

2250 

60 

30 

3000 

30 

C 0 

3750 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

Rated luminous flux of rates: 

approx.19000 lm (HIT-DE 250 W) 

approx. 25000 lm (HST-DE 250 W) 


dTLS 85250 S with diffuser approx. 46 % 

dTLS 85250 P without diffuser approx. 72 % 

90 

90 

Ex-Floodlight dTLS 85250 




Type dTLS 85250 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 


Certificate of Conformity * INEX 85, 103.431 

Enclosure material Cast light metal with special paint finish, grey 

Rated voltage 230 V +6%/-10%, 50 Hz 




Cable entries 

M25 x 1.5 for cable Ø 8-17 mm 

M25 x 1.5 with blanking plug 

Connection terminals L + N + PE; max. 2.5 mm2 Lamps 

High-pressure metal-vapour HIT-DE 

3) 

High-pressure sodium-vapour HST-DE 

Weight 

approx. 25 kg 

approx. 32 kg with compensation box 



Type Lamp Rated Power Order No. 

current factor cos 

dTLS 85250 S 250 W 3.0 A 0.4 ind. 1) CGS 123 8588 P0001 

with parabolic 250 W 1.5 A 0.8 komp. 2) CGS 123 8588 P1001 

dTLS 85250 P 250 W 3.0 A 0.4 ind. 1) CGS 123 8588 P0002 

reflector 250 W 1.5 A 0.8 komp. 2) CGS 123 8588 P1002 



Other voltages, frequencies or entries on request 


Accessories 


Ring bolt M 10 (10 pieces) GHG 690 1921 R0003 

Mounting bracket L 2183) GHG 690 1913 R0001 

Mounting bracket L 4303) GHG 690 1913 R0002 

Lamp HST-DE 250 W CGS 323 8500 P1009 

Lamp HIT-DE 250 W CGS 323 7990 P1009 


325 48 

➀ 

2 ring bolts 

ø 320 

210 

325 

➁ 

344 

120 

Compensation 

box 

ø 320 

M10, 18 deep 

Mounting bracket 

R max 15 

L = 

218 

430 

18 

304 

120 

11 


4

Ex-Protected PX Floodlights 


■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Robust light alloy 

enclosures 

Optimum design of terminal 

compartment for easy cable 

connection 

Easy lamp replacement due 

to the optimum design of the 

lamp compartment 

Removable 

ballast 

Captive stainless 

steel screws 

Smooth, easy-to-clean 

surface 

Description 

The series of floodlights with ballasts for 

high pressure discharge lamps in tube or 

bulb form fulfils the requirements of the 

European Standards EN 50014, EN 

50018, EN 50019 and EN 60598. 

● Enclosure made of copper-free 

aluminium (Cu

90 

PX ... 

60 

150 

300 

450 

60 

30 

600 

750 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

PX 40 (HST) deep bowl reflector 


approx. 90000 lm (1 x 600 W/HST-T) 




approx. 22500 lm (1 x 400 W/HME-SB) 


approx. 40000 lm (1 x 400 W/HIT-T) 

approx. 20000 lm (1 x 250 W/HIT-T) 

approx. 24000 lm (1 x 1000 W/HDI-T) 

approx. 10000 lm (1 x 500 W/HDI-T) 



75 % with T (tube-type lamp) 

50 % with B (bulb-type lamp) 

90 



PX ... 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Type of protection EEx de IIB (see table for temp. class) 

Certificate of Conformity* LOM 90.C.0039X 



Rated voltages With built-in ballast: 

230 V 50 Hz cos ≥ 0.85 

Without built-in ballast: 

≤ 250 V WS 




Cable entries Indirect entries: 

2 x M25 x 1.5, one with EEx e blanking plug 

L1, N: 2 x 4 mm2 Connection terminals 

PE: 2 x 6 mm2 Internal reflector Deep bowl reflector 

Lamp socket E 40 

Weight With ballast: 31 kg 

Without ballast: 23 kg 

Lamps 1) see table 

HME: mercury vapour high-pressure lamp 

HST: sodium vapour high-pressure lamp 


HME-SB: Mixed lamp 

HDI: Quartz halogen lamp with double glass 

Options 2) Indirect entries for through circuits: 

L1, L2, L3, N: 2 x 4 mm2 PE: 2 x 6 mm2 PTFE-coating, wide beam reflector 

Light fitting for HST 70 W, HME 250 W and 400 W 

on request 

Other ambient temperatures and 

and voltages/frequencies on request 




Type Lamps1) Temp. Cable entry Blanking Order No. 

class for cable plug 

PX 60 HST/T 600 W T2 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x M25 

1 x M25 

NOR 000 115 170 015 

NOR 000 115 170 143 

HST 400 W 3)5) – 1 x M25 NOR 000 115 170 021 

PX 40 HIT 400 W 3)6) T3 

10-14 mm 1 x M25 NOR 000 115 170 144 

HST 250 W 3)5) – 1 x M25 NOR 000 115 170 027 

PX 25 HIT 250 W 3)7) T3 

10-14 mm 1 x M25 NOR 000 115 170 145 

HST 150 W3)5) PX 15 3) HIT 150 W 

T3 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x M25 

1 x M25 

NOR 000 115 170 033 

NOR 000 115 170 146 

PX 10 HDI/T 1000 W T2 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x M25 

1 x M25 

NOR 000 115 170 089 

NOR 000 115 170 147 

PX 05 

HDI/T 500 W 

HME-SB 500 W 

T2 

– 

10-14 mm 

1 x M25 

1 x M25 

NOR 000 115 170 009 

NOR 000 115 170 148 


2) On request 

3) Tube or bulb-type lamp 

4) T3 for ambient temperature ≤ 35 °C 

5) Twin-arc or standard lamps may be used 

6) Lamps with rated current = 4.2 A 

7) Lamps with rated current = 3 A 


4

ATP 

SB, PX 



13 

Accessories 


Carrier frame, ATP NOR 000 005 170 715 

Pipe fixings ( 48 to 64 mm) NOR 000 005 170 583 

 


120 120 

26 

546 

Optional entry, on request 

Entries 

14 

443 

356 

180 180 

PXI 

PX 

26 

300 

13 

240 240 

45 



4


KFL .. TIM 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Transformer in the light 

fitting enclosure 

Generously dimensioned 

terminal compartment 

12 V, 50 W or 12 V, 20 W 

halogen reflector lamp 

Fixing for inspection 

windows to DIN 28120 

Description 

High luminous intensity vessel light fitting 

with halogen-reflector incandescent lamp 

for illuminating boilers, containers and 

agitators. The enclosure is made of 

copper-free aluminium. 

The aluminium collar has a PTFE coating 

(Teflon) and is sealed with a Viton gasket. 

The light fitting can be fixed on to 

inspection windows in accordance with 

DIN 28120 by means of the PR fixing 

facility. 

The built-in halogen-reflector 12 V, 50 W or 

12 V, 20 W incandescent lamp is supplied 

by an integrated transformer. 


90 

C 0 

60 

30 

KFL 50 TIM 


2000 

4000 

6000 

8000 

10000 

0 

30 

60 

l/cd 

90 


KFL 20 TIM and KFL 50 TIM 


Type KFL 20 TIM and KFL 50 TIM 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 


EEx de IIC T4 (KFL 20 TIM) 

EEx de IIC T3 (KFL 50 TIM) 

Certificate of Conformity* LOM 91. C. 0035 


Rated voltage 230 V ± 10 %, 50 Hz 




-20°C to +55°C (KFL 20) 

-20°C to +40°C (KFL 50) 


L, N; 2 x 4 mm2 Connection terminals 

PE connection, internal and external, 6 mm2 Lamp 

Halogen reflector lamp, 

Socket BA 15d 

Weight approx. 3 kg 

*EC-Type Examination Certification to directive 94/9/EC applied for 


Type Entry hole Cable entry1) Blanking Order No. 

for 10-14 mm plug 

KFL 50 TIM 2 x M25 x 1.5 – 1 x M25 NOR 000 005 140 897 

KFL 50 TIM1) 2 x M25 x 1.5 1 x M25 1 x M25 NOR 000 005 140 701 

KFL 20 TIM 2 x M25 x 1.5 – 1 x M25 NOR 000 005 140 898 

KFL 20 TIM1) 2 x M25 x 1.5 1 x M25 1 x M25 NOR 000 005 140 917 

1) With light fixing facility PR, incl. halogen lamp 

Accessories 


Halogen-reflector lamp 12 V/50 W 3 2369 100 001 

Halogen-reflector lamp 12 V/20 W 3 2369 100 002 

For windows in acc. with DIN 28120 

172 

Nominal width 

DIN 40/50 DIN 80 DIN 100 DIN 125 


124 180 180 50 

KFL 50 TIM 

Light fixing facility PR 

120 

115 


9 

4

Metal Pendant Light Fitting 

NVMV 70 W-150 W CHAMP 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

High corrosion resistance 

of enclosure and accessory 

parts 

High degree of protection 

due to high-quality sealing 

system 

Restricted breathing design 

for temperature classes 

up to T5 

Compact, light-weight 

design; ideal for installation 

at low or medium heights 

Suited for mercury-vapour 

and high-pressure sodium 

lamps 

Description 

The light fittings of the series NVMV CHAMP 

are designed for lamp outputs of 70 W to 

150 W. The light transmitting part consists 

of a temperature stable, impact resistant 

glass globe that refracts the light and a 

guard. The modular design allows for a 

quick and cost-effective installation of the 

light fittings. In addition to direct mounting 

on ceilings, versions for stanchion 

mounting (25° angle), as well as for direct 

mounting on walls are also available. 

A particularly durable sealing system for 

use under extreme climatic conditions 

brings additional reliability. The restricted 

breathing design allows a high lamp output 

and, at the same time a high temperature 

class. 


90 

60 

20 

40 

60 

60 

30 

80 

100 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 

90 

NVMV CHAMP 

Stanchion mounted 

Without external reflector 

With external reflector 

60 

30 

60 

90 

60 

30 

120 

150 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 


70 W high-pressure sodium: 5600 lm 


125 W high-pressure mercury: 6200 lm 


wihtout external reflector 74.4 % 

with external reflector 61.2 % 

90 

90 




Type NVMV CHAMP 


Ex n non-Sparking IIC 

1) 

in acc. with zone 2 to AS 2380 

Certificate of Conformity2) Ex-426 


Copper-free aluminium with epoxy 

powder coating 


Rated voltages 240 V, 50 Hz 




Cable entries Drilling: 2 x M25 x 1,5 

Connection terminals L, N and PE; max. 2 x 2.5 mm2 Lamp socket E 27 or E40 (150 W) to IEC 238 

Weight see ordering details 




294 

ø 254 

355 

285 

10 

318 

Zone 2/ 

Zone 22 

Type Mounting High-pressure High-pressure Tem- Weight Order No. 

mercury-vapours sodium peratures- (kg) 

NVMV... lamp vapour lamp class3) S2MC070GP Ceiling 70 W T5 6.6 1 2341 000 001 

S2MC150GP Ceiling 150 W T3 7.0 1 2341 000 002 

H2MC125GP Ceiling 125 W T3 7.0 1 2341 000 003 

S2MTW070GP Wall 70 W T5 6.6 1 2341 000 051 

S2MTW150GP Wall 150 W T3 7.0 1 2341 000 052 

H2MTW125GP Wall 125 W T3 7.0 1 2341 000 053 

S4BJ070GP Mast 1 1 /4´´ BSP 70 W T5 6.6 1 2341 000 101 

S4BJ150GP Mast 1 1 /4´´ BSP 150 W T3 7.0 1 2341 000 102 

H4BJ125GP Mast 1 1 /4´´ BSP 125 W T3 7.0 1 2341 000 103 

1) EEx nR II C applied for 

2) Declaration of conformity to directive 94/9/EC applied for 

3) Max. permissible cable temperature must be observed 

Accessories 


External reflector RD 70 3 2341 001 001 

Ceiling mounting Wall mounting Stanchion mounting 

182 

ø 8 

119 

94,5 

94,5 

335 

207 

168 

373 

370 

225 


334 

25° 

4



■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

High corrosion resistance 

of enclosure and accessory 

parts 


due to high quality sealing 

system 

Restricted breathing design for 

temperature classes up to T3 

Optimum design for 

installation in medium-high 

or high areas 

Suited for mercury vapour 

and high-pressure sodium lamps 

Description 

The light fittings of the series NVMV CHAMP 

are designed for lamp outputs of 250 W to 

400 W. The light transmitting part consists 

of a temperature stable and impact 

resistant glass globe that refracts the light, 

and a guard. The modular design allows 

for a quick and cost-effective installation 

of the light fittings. In addition to direct 

mounting on ceilings, versions for 

stanchion-mounting (25° angle), as well as 

for mounting directly on walls are also 

available. A particularly durable sealing 

system for use under extreme climatic 

conditions brings additional reliability. The 

restricted breathing design allows a high 

lamp output and, at the same time, a high 

temperature class. 


90 

C 0 

90 

60 

C 0 

60 

30 

30 

NVMV CHAMP 

ceiling mounting 

Without external reflector 

20 

40 

60 

80 

100 

0 

With external reflector 

30 

60 

90 

120 

150 

0 

30 

30 

60 

60 

90 

l/cd/klm 

90 

l/cd/klm 







without external reflector 77.8 % 

with external reflector 63.5% 




310 


Type NVMV CHAMP 


Ex n non-Sparking IIC 

1) 

in acc. with Zone 2 to AS 2380 

Certificate of Conformity2) Ex 752 



powder coating 






Cable entries Drilling: 2 x M25 x 1.5 

Connection entries L, N and PE; max 2 x 2.5 mm2 Lamp socket E40 to IEC 238 




Ceiling mounting 

294 

ø 254 

24.5 

226 

555 

285 

10 

318 

ø 8 

119 

94,5 

Wall mounting 

94,5 

335 207 

565 

Zone 2/ 

Zone 22 

Type Mounting High-pressure High-pressure Temp. Weight Order No. 

mercury- sodium- class3) (kg) 

NVMV... vapour lamp vapour lamp 



H2MC250GP Ceiling 250 W T3 14.2 1 2342 000 003 

S2MTW250GP Wall 250 W T3 15.5 1 2342 000 051 

S2MTW400GP Wall 400 W T2 17.6 1 2342 000 052 

H2MTW250GP Wall 250 W T3 15.5 1 2342 000 053 

S4BJ250GP Mast 11 /4´´ BSP 250 W T3 14.4 1 2342 000 101 

S4BJ400GP Mast 11 /4´´ BSP 400 W T2 17.6 1 2342 000 102 

H4BJ250GP Mast 11 /4´´ BSP 250 W T3 14.4 1 2342 000 103 




Accessories 


External reflector RD 4A 3 2342 001 001 

Stanchion mounting 

500 

580 


250 

4

Metal Floodlight 

NFMV 250 W-400 W 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

High corrosion resistance of 

enclosure and accessory 

parts 


due to high-quality sealing 

system 

Restricted breathing design 

for temperature classes 

up to T5 

Housing with rotary and 

swivel function 

Suited for mercury and 

sodium high-pressure lamps 

Description 

The light fittings of the series NFMV are 

designed for lamp outputs of 250 W to 

400 W and are equipped with a high grade 

internal reflector. The light transmitting part 

consists of a temperature stable and 

impact resistant glass. The modular design 

allows for a quick and cost-effective 

installation of the light fittings. 

In addition to direct swivel bow mounting 

on walls a slip fit adapter is also 

available. 

A particularly durable sealing system for 

use under extreme climatic conditions 

brings additional reliability. The restricted 

breathing design allows a high lamp output 

and, at the same time a high temperature 

class. 


90 

NFMV 

60 

50 

100 

150 

60 

30 

200 

250 

30 

C 0 

0 

C90 l/cd/klm 






Light efficiency in operation: 44.2% 

90 

Metall-Floodlight 

NFMV 250 W-400 W 


Type NFMV 

Exn R II C T31) Type of protection1) in acc. with zone 2 to AS 2380 

Certificate of Conformity2) AUS Ex 3562 



power coating 





Permissible ambient temperature -20°C to +40°C (+55°C) 4) 

Cable entries Drilling: M20 x 1.5 

Connection terminals L, N and PE; max 2 x 2.5 mm2 Lamp socket E40 to IEC 238 




Zone 2/ 

Zone 22 

Type Mounting High-pressure High-pressure Temp. Weight Order No. 

Mercury- Sodium- class3) (kg) 

NFMV... vapour lamp vapour lamp 

S1MY250 bracket 250 W T3 16.9 1 2346 000 001 

S1MY400 bracket 400 W T3 18.6 1 2346 000 002 

H1MY250 bracket 250 W T3 20.5 1 2346 000 003 

H1MY400 bracket 400 W T3 22.0 1 2346 000 004 




4) On request 

Accessories 

Type Weight (kg) Order No. 

Slip-fit adapter 2´´ 1.8 3 2346 001 002 


254 

171,5 

152,5 

120 

50,8 

31,8 

12,7-13 UNC 

3/4” NPT 


4


1 

2 

1 15 

13 

0 0 


Installation 

and Control Units 

20 


5

9 

Code for voltage and 

No. of pole acc. IEC 

10 

8 

11 

7 

12 

6 

Voltage Color h (PE) 

2-pole + PE 

110 - 130V 50/60Hz yellow 4 h 

200 - 250V 50/60Hz blue 6 h 

3-pole + PE 

200 - 250V 50/60Hz blue 9 h 

480 - 500V 50/60Hz black 7 h 

380 - 415V 50/60Hz red 6 h 

600 - 690V 50/60Hz black 5 h 

3-pole + N + PE 

480 - 500V 50/60Hz black 7 h 

380 - 415V 50/60Hz red 6 h 

600 - 690V 50/60Hz black 5 h 

1 

5 

2 

4 

3 


Plugs and Sockets and Switchgear 

Fields of application for 

explosion-protected switchgear 

Explosion-protected plugs and sockets, built-in 

apparatus and the parts thereof, as well as 

terminal boxes are found in all areas of the 

chemical industry, in installation technology and 

in the off-shore field. In addition to functionality, 

robustness and stability to aggressive media, 

the safety characteristics and the ease of 

installation also play a large part. CEAG 

Sicherheitstechnik GmbH provides a uniform 

concept for the assembly of the most varied 

types of apparatus. This not only ensures costsavings, 

but also allows extreme flexibility. 

Mounting plates, that are available in 5 sizes, 

allow the snap-on fixing of apparatus – from 

the smallest junction box to the largest safety 

switch – or even of apparatus combinations. 

Material 

The basis for safe operation is the selection of 

suitable materials for use in hazardous areas. In 

addition to chemical influences due to aggressive 

media, mechanical and thermal stress 

factors are also important selection criteria. 

The products listed in this chapter are made 

of modified materials, such as polyamides 

or polyester reinforced with glass fibre that is 

impact-resistant to EN. 

The addition of conductive materials makes it 

possible to attain a surface resistance for these 

enclosures that prevents an ignitable static 

charge. 

The outstanding advantages of this enclosure 

material are the low weight, the protection 

against aggressive media, the insulation 

protection and the good price-performance 

ratio. 

In addition to this, apparatus for extreme 

operating requirements can be built into 

stainless steel enclosures that satisfy the high 

mechanical demands. 

CEE plugs and sockets 

A first step towards creating an international 

standard for industrial plugs and sockets was 

taken with the IEC 309 and CEE Publication 

17, “Requirements for Plugs and Sockets for 

Industrial Use”. 

“IEC” stands for: 

“INTERNATIONAL TECHNICAL 

COMMISSION”. 

When selecting plugs and sockets from the 

existing ranges for standardization, preference 

was given to round plugs and sockets, as the 

contact-making insert can be arranged in 

various positions (hours of day). This allows a 

high degree of differentiation of plugs and 

sockets with regard to the various types of 

current, voltages, frequencies, etc. 

Plugs and sockets for practical operations 

A large number of constructional measures 

are necessary in order to provide a safe and 

continuous supply of electrical energy everywhere. 

This is particularly true for Zone 1 and 

Zone 2 hazardous areas. 

The outstanding characteristic 

of the new GHG 5.. 

plugs and sockets is the 

multi-contact technique, 

that has been tried and 

tested in practice for centuries 

and that, in addition 

to low insertion and withdrawal 

forces, ensures a 

permanently safe contact. 

All portable plugs and 

couplers are distinguished 

by the strain reliefs and 

sealing elements that are 

arranged separately. 

Together with the new 

type of bayonet ring, they 

are the basis for a constantly high degree of 

protection IP 66/67, regardless of whether the 

plugs are inserted or withdrawn. 

All sockets and couplers up to 32 A are fitted 

with a flameproof interlock switch that does not 

release the voltage for the contact pins until the 

correct plug has been inserted and turned, 

whereby not only the individual poles, but also 

the neutral conductor is switched. Therefore, 

arcing when the plug is withdrawn is impossible. 

Zone 1 – Zone 2: with identification 

marking 

The fields of application for Zone 1 and Zone 2 

overlap in practical operation – therefore, a safe 

identification of apparatus is absolutely 

essential here. With the introduction of the 

GHG 5.. plugs and sockets, CEAG has created 

something that is absolutely unprecedented. 

The plugs and couplers/flanges are coded in 

such a way that the Zone 1 plug fits into the 

Zone 2 coupler/flange, but, in the reverse case, 

they do not function. 

Thus, safe operation is always guaranteed. 



Plugs and Sockets, Terminal Boxes 

and Switchgear 

Ex-e terminal boxes 

Apparatus that does not give off arcs or sparks 

during routine, trouble-free operation and where 

there is no rise in surface temperature can be 

used in the type of protection EEx e. For this it 

must comply with the requirements of the European 

Standard EN 50 019. CEAG terminal 

boxes are manufactured according to these 

increased safety requirements. Unused openings 

for cable entries must be sealed with 

screw-in seals or blanking plugs that are 

specially approved for this purpose. Terminal 

boxes can be retrofitted or added to using 

certified cable entries in accordance with the 

national regulations and the details given by the 

manufacturer. The requirements relating to 

electromagnetically compatible terminal boxes 

for the connection of instrumentation for 

measurement and control engineering are 

fulfilled by using internally coated, metallized 

enclosures. In conjunction with suitable cable 

entries, this coating safely shields sensitive 

measuring circuits against external radiation 

fields. 

Connection or terminal boxes in the type of 

protection “Increased Safety”, that can be used 

in almost every country in the world, are much 

more economical and easier to install than 

flameproof enclosures. 

Control and signal units 

If several control and signal units are needed 

for the control of installations at one location, 

they can be combined in one control station. 

For economical and practical reasons CEAG 

control stations are usually made up of a 

combination of apparatus in the types of 

protection “Flameproof Enclosure EEx d” and 

“Increased Safety EEx e”. With this constellation 

all electrical parts that give off arcs or sparks 

during operation are individually encapsulated in 

flameproof enclosures (EEx d). These 

flameproof components are built into control 

station enclosures in the type of protection 

“Increased Safety (EEx e)” and wired, whereby 

the arrangement depends on the respective 

application. The result of this is a problem-free 

installation of complete control stations on site. 

The PTB issues Component Certificates for 

control and signal units for panel mounting. 

These panel-mounting units, for which a 

Component Certificate has been issued, can 

be built into a switch cabinet that satisfies 

the requirements of the type of protection 

“Increased Safety” and certified by a TÜV or 

expert inspection according to national 

standards. 

It is also possible to fit protective caps on the 

panel-mounting components to transform them 

into independent pieces of built-in apparatus 

with full PTB certification. In this case they can 

be built into switch cabinets without a special 

inspection. 

In accordance with national standards 

inspection and maintenance work must be 

carried out on a routine basis by specialized 

electrical technicians. Here it is necessary to 

check the efficiency of the seals, the enclosures, 

covers, etc. for any cracks or other damage, as 

well as the tight fit of fixing screws, terminals 

and blanking plugs. 

Safety switches 

Among other things, safety switches are 

required for the isolation of the electrical power 

supply of drives and other electrically operated 

apparatus. The CEAG explosion-protected 

safety switches fulfil the following requirements: 

1. AC3 motor switching capacity 

2. Isolating properties to VDE 0660, Part 107 

3. Compulsory opening of the main current 

contacts 

4. Locking in the “OFF” position 

5. Cannot be switched on again in the locked 

state without destroying the switch 

6. Existence of label with appropriate markings 

(Safety Switch) 

With certain machines the safety switch must 

also fulfil the function of an EMERGENCY 

STOP device. In this case the actuator parts 

must be red and the background must be 

yellow. 


5

Ex-Installation Switches 

and Ex-Pushbuttons 

■ Protective collar for 

preventing inadvertent 

operation 

■ Large actuator surface 

■ Large wiring compartment 

■ Labyrinth seal to guarantee 

the degree of protection IP 66 

Description 

The explosion-protected installation 

switches comply with the requirements 

laid down in EN 50 014 to EN 50 019 

and are suited for use in Zone 1, 2, 21 

and 22 areas. 

A high degree of protection against dust 

and water is achieved by means of a 

labyrinth seal on the enclosure cover. The 

materials used have proved to be safe 

and reliable for both indoor and outdoor 

installations, in particular in chemical and 

off-shore plants. 

The large actuator surface of the 

installation switch allows perfect operation, 

even when wearing working gloves. 

A protective collar prevents inadvertent 

operation. The toggle has a luminescent 

label in accordance with §7 of the Workshop 

Regulations and is free from radioactive 

additives. 

Due to the external fixing facility, the 

enclosure can be installed easily while the 

cover is closed. 

Cable entry from the top is made possible 

by turning the base. 

Further certification 

● USA/Canada 

● Australia 


● Slovak Republic 

● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


Switch/Pushbutton 

Size 1 

Design: Wall fixing 

Ex-Installation Switches 

and Ex-Pushbuttons 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-installation switches and Ex-pushbuttons 




Made of a low temperature impact-resistant 

Enclosure 

thermoplastic that fulfils the EN requirements for 

a surface resistance < 109 Ohms and, at the same 

time, has sufficient insulating properties. 


Switch ratings 

Rated voltage: 250 V~ 

Rated current: 16 A 

Cable entries 

EEx-e M 25 cable entry 

for cables Ø 8 – 17 mm 

Switch terminals: 2 x 2.5 mm2 Terminals 

PE terminals: 4 x 2.5 mm2 Weight 


0.32 kg 


Type Contact arrangement Cable entries Order No. 

1 x M25 GHG 273 2000 R0017 

ON-OFF 2-pole 2 x M25 GHG 273 2000 R0018 

L L(N) 

2 x M20* GHG 273 2000 R0003 

Change-over switch 

1 x M25 GHG 273 6000 R0011 

2 x M20* GHG 273 6000 R0003 

Pushbutton 1 x M25 GHG 273 4000 R0004 

L L(N) 

* only threaded hole 

Accessories: Mounting plates 

L 

Type Application Order No. 

Size 1 for wall mounting GHG 610 1953 R0001 

for channel mounting GHG 610 1953 R0003 

for pipe mounting GHG 610 1953 R0002 

Label holder with designation label (blank) 

Qty. per pack = 50 GHG 610 1953 R0012 


52 

85 

75 

35 

85 

115 

52 

85 

75 

85 

115 

53 20 


55 

64 

5

Ex-Plugs and Sockets 

GHG 5.. 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Self-cleaning lamellar 

contacts, low transition 

resistance 

Variable cable entries for a 

large number of entry systems 

All-pole, plug-in-and-turn 

switching operation 

Easy to connect, down to 

the last detail 

Degree of protection IP 66/67 

also in plugged-in state 

Low insertion and 

withdrawal forces 

If desired, available with 

auxiliary contact 

Description 

The most outstanding quality characteristic 

of any plug and socket connection is 

the design of the transition point between 

the plug pin and the socket contact. 

For this reason, when designing plug and 

socket connections for use in potentially 

explosive atmospheres, a large amount of 

attention was paid to the connection point. 

Here, the transition resistance at the 

contact pins and sockets plays an 

important part, in particular due to the 

operational ambient influences, such as 

moisture and dirt. 

With the CEAG explosion-protected CEE 

plugs and sockets the principle of the selfcleaning 

contact point at the connection 

points has been put into practice. The 

main part of this contact point is a springloaded 

lamellar contact. The large number 

of contact points results in a low transition 

resistance, and an insignificant heat rise 

is guaranteed. As the lamellae of the 

contact are spring-loaded, the insertion 

and withdrawal forces required are 

minimal. 

Faultless functioning and permanent 

self-cleaning are guaranteed by the 

arrangement and design of the louvretype 

contact lamellae. 

For this reason, the CEAG multi-contact 

connection is service-free. These plugs 

and sockets are designed for extremely 

harsh operating conditions. Due to the 

use of a bayonet catch, the degree of 

protection IP 65 has proved its reliability. 





● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


10 A 

Wall socket 

Plug 


21-Pole, up to 250 V 


Ex-plugs and sockets, 21-pole, up to 250 V 

Type of protection EEx e II T6 

Certificate of Conformity* PTB-No. Ex-87.B.1055 

Degree or protection IP 65 to EN 60529 

Rated voltage up to 250 V~ 

Rate current max. 10 A 

Frequency 50/60 Hz 

Back-up fuse, max. 16 A 

Cable entries 

Wall socket: 1 x M40 (on top) 

Plug: Ø 32.5 - 38 mm 

Wall socket: 1 - 2.5 mm2 Connections Plug: 1 - 2.5 mm2 Crimped or soldered connection 

A special tool must be used for crimped connections 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Type Weight Order No. 

Wall socket 2.7 kg GHG 591 1201 R0002 

Plug 1.0 kg GHG 591 2201 R0002 

Accessories 


Plug cap GHG 530 1935 R0008 

1 set socket bushes (7 pieces) GHG 590 1301 R0102 

1 set plug pins (7 pieces) GHG 590 1302 R0102 

Dismantiling tool GHG 590 1903 R0001 

Crimping tool GHG 590 1902 R0001 



Wall socket 

120 50 

105 

215 

297 

15 

200 

134 

Plug 

225 

Ø 70 

Ø 70 


5

16 A 

Wall socket 

Plug 

Contact arrangement, 7-pole 

Contact arrangement, 6-pole + PE 


7-Pole, up to 400 V 


Ex-plugs and sockets, 7-pole, up to 400 V 


Certificate of Conformity* PTB No. Ex-88.B.1020 





Back-up fuse, max. 

without thermal protection: 16 A 

with thermal protection: 25 A 

Wall socket: 1 x M40 (on top) 

Cable entries Plug: Ø 32.5 - 38 mm 

Wall socket: 2 x 4 mm2 Plug: 1 - 2.5 mm2 Connections 

Crimped or soldered connection 

A special tool must be used for crimped connections 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Type Weight Order No. 

Wall socket, 7-pole (6h) 3.2 kg GHG 592 1001 R0002 

Wall socket, 6-pole + PE (7h) 3.2 kg GHG 592 1001 R0022 

Plug 7-pole (6h) 0.5 kg GHG 592 2001 R0002 

Plug 7-pole (7h) 0.5 kg GHG 592 2001 R0022 

Accessories 


Plug cap GHG 540 1935 R0002 

1 set socket bushes (7 pieces) GHG 590 1301 R0102 

1 set plug pins (7 pieces) GHG 590 1302 R0102 

Flange seal (10 pieces) GHG 540 1907 R0002 

Crimping tool GHG 590 1902 R0001 



Wall socket 

250 

105 

120 

215 

134 

162 

50 


15 

200 

15 

Plug 

145.5 

59

16 A 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 

Coupler 

Plug 


2 and 3-Pole for 

Low Voltages 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-plugs and sockets, 2- and 3-pole, for low voltages to CEE and IEC 309-1/2 



Wall socket, plug and 

EC-Type Examination Certificate coupler: PTB 99 ATEX 1039 

Flange socket: PTB 99 ATEX 1063 U 


Rated voltage ≤ 50 V 



Switching capacity AC3 16 A, DC1 16 A 


without thermal protection: 16 A, 


Wall socket: 1 x M25, 1 x M25 Ex-blanking plug plastic (bottom) 

Cable entries or 2 x M20 Ex-blanking plug, metal version 

Plug and coupler: 9 - 17 mm 

Wall socket: 2 x 4 mm2 Connection terminals 

Plug and coupler: 4 mm2 * II 2 D applied for 


2-pole low voltage 

Voltage h Type Weight Order No. 


24 V Flange socket 

Coupler 

0.4 kg 

0.7 kg 

GHG 542 5200 V0000 

GHG 513 3200 R0001 

no aux. 

keyway Plug 0.35 kg GHG 542 2200 V0000 



Coupler 

0.4 kg 

0.7 kg 

GHG 542 5212 V0000 

GHG 513 3212 R0001 

12 Plug 0.35 kg GHG 542 2212 V0000 

3-pole low voltage 

Voltage h Type Weight Order No. 


24 V Flange socket 0.4 kg GHG 542 5300 V0000 

Coupler 0.7 kg GHG 513 3300 R0001 

no aux. 

keyway Plug 0.35 kg GHG 542 2300 V0000 



Coupler 

0.4 kg 

0.7 kg 

GHG 542 5312 V0000 

GHG 513 3312 R0001 

12 Plug 0.35 kg GHG 542 2312 V0000 

Accessories 


Plug cap GHG 540 1935 R0001 

Entry sleeve GHG 530 1334 R0003 


6 

74 

90 

Wall socket 

175 

160 

12 

62 

128 

205 

145.5 

Plug 

59 

~230 

72 

Coupler 

M4 

65 

53 

92 

53 

Flange socket 


78 

108 

5

16 A 

3-pole 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 

Coupler 

Plug 

1 P + N + PE 


110 V - 240 V, 3-Pole 

220 V - 690 V, 4- and 5-Pole 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-plugs and sockets CEE and IEC 309-1/2 

Marking of 94/9/EC II 2 G/ II 2 D* 









Switching capacity AC3 up to 690 V~/16 A 





Cable entries or 2 x M20 x 1.5 thread, metal version 


Wall socket: 2 x 4 mm2 Connection terminals 

Plug and coupler: 4 mm2 * II 2 D applied for 

Dimensions in mm x.. = Fixing dimensions 

B 

X B 

11 

T 

Wall socket 

D 

D 

H 

L 

X H 

75 83 

L 

7 

A 

X A 

B 

B 

Flange socket 

Coupler 

L B 

D 

A 

Plug 

10 

6 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

3p 4p 5p 

B 90 110 110 

X B 80 100 100 

T 121 147 147 

H 223 236 236 

X H 115 135 135 

L 155 175 175 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

3p 4p 5p 

D 72 76.5 84 

A 67 86 86 

xA 53 69.5 69.5 

B 65 86 86 

xB 53 69.5 69.5 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

3p 4p 5p 

D 72 76,5 84 

L 258 279 279 

A 71.5 40 90 

B 69 90 90 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

3p 4p 5p 

D 72 76.5 84 

L 170 187 187 


16 A 

4-/5-pole 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 

Mounting plate size 4 

for pipe mounting 

3P + PE 3 P + N + PE 


110 V - 240 V, 3-Pole 

220 V - 690 V, 4- and 5-Pole 

Ordering details 3-pole 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Voltage h Type Cable 

entry 

Weight Order No. 

Wall socket M25 KU 1.2 kg GHG 511 4304 R0001 

Wall socket M20 GE 1.2 kg GHG 511 4304 R0002 

Wall socket M20 ME 1.3 kg GHG 511 4304 R3001 

110 - 130 V Wall socket M20 GM 1.3 kg GHG 511 4304 R3003 

Flange socket KU 0.4 kg GHG 511 8304 R0001 

4 Coupler KU 0.7 kg GHG 511 3304 R0001 

Plug KU 0.35 kg GHG 511 7304 R0001 


Wall socket M20 GE 1.2 kg GHG 511 4306 R0002 


220 - 240 V Wall socket M20 GM 1.3 kg GHG 511 4306 R3003 

Flange socket KU 0.4 kg GHG 511 8306 R0001 

6 Coupler KU 0.7 kg GHG 511 3306 R0001 

Plug KU 0.35 kg GHG 511 7306 R0001 

Ordering details 4-/5-pole 


entry 




220 - 240 V Flange socket KU 1.0 kg GHG 511 8409 R0001 

Coupler KU 1.7 kg GHG 511 3409 R0001 

9 Plug KU 0.7 kg GHG 511 7409 R0001 





6 Plug KU 0.7 kg GHG 511 7406 R0001 



500 V Flange socket KU 1.0 kg GHG 511 8407 R0001 


7 Plug KU 0.7 kg GHG 511 7407 R0001 


Wall socket M20 Me 1.9 kg GHG 511 4405 R3001 

690 V Flange socket KU 1.0 kg GHG 511 8405 R0001 


5 Plug KU 0.7 kg GHG 511 7405 R0001 





6 Plug KU 0.7 kg GHG 511 7506 R0001 

KU = Plastic; ME = Metal; GE = only thread; GM = only thread, metal 

Accessories 


Plug cap 3-, 4- or 5-pole on request 

Accessories: Mouting plates 


Size 4 for wall mounting GHG 610 1953 R 0026 

for trellis mounting GHG 610 1953 R 0026 

for pipe mounting GHG 610 1953 R 0030 


5

32 A 

4-pole 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 

Coupler 

Plug 


220 V - 690 V, 4- and 5-Pole 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 











Switching capacity AC 3 up to 690 V~/32 A 



with thermal protection: 35 A/40 A gL 




Wall socket: 2 x 4 - 10 mm2 Connection terminals 

Plug and coupler: 1 - 6 mm2 * II 2 D applied for 


B 

T 

X B 

11 

D 

D 

H 

L 

X H 

75 83 

L 

7 

A 

X A 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 

Coupler 

L B 

D 

B 

X B 

A 

Plug 

10 

6 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

4p 5p 

B 120 120 

X B 110 110 

T 166 168 

H 285 293 

X H 170 170 

L 205 205 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

4p 5p 

D 95 100 

A 86 86 

xA 69.5 69.5 

B 86 86 

xB 69.5 69.5 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

4p 5p 

D 95 100 

L 339 345 

A 90 90 

B 90 90 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

4p 5p 

D 95 100 

L 249 249 


32 A 

5-pole 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 



3P + PE 3 P + N + PE 


220 V - 690 V, 4- and 5-Pole 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 


entry 


Wall socket Plastic 1.8 kg GHG 512 4409 R0001 

Wall socket Metal 1.9 kg GHG 512 4409 R3001 

220 - 240 V Flange socket Plastic 1.0 kg GHG 512 8409 R0001 

Coupler Plastic 1.7 kg GHG 512 3409 R0001 

9 Plug Plastic 0.7 kg GHG 512 7409 R0001 








500 V Flange socket Plastic 1.0 kg GHG 512 8407 R0001 













Accessories 4-/5-pole 


Plug cap 3-, 4- or 5-pole on request 







5

16 A 

Transformer plug 

3P + PE 3 P + N + PE 

Ex-Transformer Plug 16 A up to 400 V, 

4- and 5-Pole, 

Plug with Fuse 


Ex-transformer plug to CEE and IEC 309-1/2, up to 400 V 




Enclosure material Polyester, reinforced 


Rated voltage, primary 230 V~ 

Secondary, optimal 12 V, 24 V, 36 V, 42 V and 230 V~ 

Rated current (size) 16 A 


Output 65 VA 

Back-up fuse 0.5 A mT, exchangeable 

Cable entries 10 - 20 mm 

Connection terminals 2 x 4 mm2 Available versions 


4-pole and 5-pole 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Voltage/ h Type Weight Sec. Order No. 

Size voltage 

230 V/ Transformer plug 65 VA 2.3 kg 42 V GHG 531 6469 V0000 

16 A Transformer plug 65 VA 2.3 kg 24 V GHG 531 6469 V5005 

Transformer plug 65 VA 2.3 kg 12 V GHG 531 6469 V5025 

9 




6 Transformer plug 65 VA 2.3 kg 230 V GHG 531 6566 V5023 

16 A Plug with fuse, 1.6 kg GHG 531 7536 V0000 

max. 6.3 A 

Accessories for transformer plugs and plugs with fuse 

Type Accessories Order No. 

Transformer plug 16 A Cable entry sleeve GHG 530 1934 R1 

16 A/4-pole Plug cap GHG 530 1935 R4 


Plug with fuse 16 A Cable entry sleeve GHG 530 1934 R1 

16 A Plug cap GHG 530 1935 R2 


ø 82 

ø 70 

268 


ø 80

32 A 

Transformer plug 

3P + PE 3 P + N + PE 

Ex-Transformer Plug 32 A up to 400 V, 

4- and 5-Pole, 

Plug with Fuse 


Ex-transformer plug to CEE and IEC 309-1/2, up to 400 V 






Rated voltage, primary 230 V~ 

Secondary, optional 12 V, 24 V, 36 V, 42 V and 230 V~ 

Rated current (size) 32 A 


Output 65 VA 

Back-up fuse 0,5 A mT, exchangeable 

Cable entries 10 - 20 mm 

Connection terminals 2 x 4 mm2 Available versions 


4-pole and 5-pole 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Voltage/ h Type Weight Sec. Order No. 

Size voltage 




9 




6 Transformer plug 65 VA 2.3 kg 230 V GHG 532 6566 V5023 

32 A Plug with fuse, 1.6 kg GHG 532 7536 V0000 

max. 6.3 A 

Accessories for transformer plugs and plugs with fuse 

Type Accessories Order No. 

Transformer plug 32 A Cable entry sleeve GHG 530 1934 R1 



Plug with fuse 32 A Cable entry sleeve GHG 530 1934 R1 

32 A Plug cap GHG 530 1935 R2 



ø 82 

ø 70 

268 

ø 80 


5

63 A 

Wall socket 

Plug 

3P + PE 3 P + N + PE 


up to 690 V, 

4- and 5-Pole 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Ex-plugs and sockets, CEE and ICE 309-1/2 up to 690 V 


Certificate of conformity PTB-No. Ex-86.B.1021 



Rated current max. 63 A 


AC1 to 690 V~/80 A 

Switching capacity AC3 230 V/80 A 400 V/80 A 

500 V/80 A 690 V/80 A 


without thermal protection: 63 A 


Cable entries 

Wall socket: 1 x M50 (bottom) 

Plug: Ø 19 - 28 mm 

Wall socket: 2 x 25 mm2 Connections with cable lug 50 mm2 Plug: 16 mm2 Ordering details 

Voltage h Type Cable Weight Order No. 

entry 

220 – 240 V 

380 – 415 V 

500 V 

690 V 

380 – 415 V 


Wall socket 

Wall socket 1 x M50 11.9 kg GHG 534 1409 V0000 

Wall socket 2 x M50, 

1 x M25 GHG 534 0003 R0709 

9 Plug 2.5 kg GHG 534 2409 V0000 



1 x M25 GHG 534 0003 R0706 

6 Plug 2.5 kg GHG 534 2406 V0000 



1 x M25 GHG 534 0003 R0707 

7 Plug 2.5 kg GHG 534 2407 V0000 



1 x M25 GHG 534 0003 R0705 

5 Plug 2.5 kg GHG 534 2405 V0000 



1 x M25 GHG 534 0002 R0706 

6 Plug 2.6 kg GHG 534 2506 V0000 

277 

15 

330 

30 

10 

200 

232 

30 

302 

450 

ø 87 

Plug 

M 39 x 3 


346 

44

125 A 

Wall socket 

Plug 

3 P + N + PE 


up to 690 V, 

5-pole 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Ex-plugs and sockets, CEE and ICE 309-1/2 up to 690 V 


Certificate of conformity PTB-No. Ex-86.B.1070 





AC1 to 690 V/125 A 

Switching capacity AC3 230 V/125 A 400 V/125 A 

500 V/125 A 690 V/125 A 

Bak-up fuse, max. 



Wall socket: 1 x M63 (bottom) 

Cable entries Plug: Ø 34 - 43 mm 

or Ø 45 - 53 mm 

Wall socket: 2 x 50 mm2 (min. cross section) 

with cable lug 1 x 95 mm2 Connection terminals 

Plug: 25 - 35 mm2 or without clamp 

with cable lug up to 50 mm2 Ordering details 

Voltage h Type Cable Weight Order No. 

entry 

220 – 240 V 

380 – 415 V 

500 V 

690 V 


Wall socket 



1 x M25 GHG 536 0002 R0709 

9 Plug 5.0 kg GHG 535 2509 V0000 



1 x M25 GHG 536 0002 R0706 

6 Plug 5.0 kg GHG 535 2506 V0000 



1 x M25 GHG 536 0002 R0707 

7 Plug 5.0 kg GHG 535 2507 V0000 



1 x M25 GHG 536 0002 R0705 

5 Plug 5.0 kg GHG 535 2505 V0000 

227 

410 

10.5 

255 

230 

40 

25 

385 

25 

540 

102 

Plug 

M 55 x 2 


385 

50 

5

16 A 

3-pole 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 

Coupler 

Plug 

1 P + N + PE 


110 V - 240 V, 3-Pole 

220 V - 690 V, 4- and 5-Pole 

for Zone 2 


Zone 2 

Zone 22 



Type of protection EEx nC IIC T6/T5 









with thermal protectiong: 32 A/35 A gL 






Dimensions in mm X.. = Fixing dimensions 

B 

T 

Wall socket 

X B 

11 

D 

76,5 

H 

L 

X H 

75 83 

L 

7 

A 

X A 

D 

B 

X B 

Flange socket 

Coupler 

Plug 

10 

6 

L B 

A 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

3p 4p 5p 

B 90 110 110 

X B 80 100 100 

T 121 147 147 

H 223 236 236 

X H 115 135 135 

L 155 175 175 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

3p 4p 5p 

D 72 76.5 84 

A 67 86 86 

xA 53 69.5 69.5 

B 65 86 86 

xB 53 69.5 69.5 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

3p 4p 5p 

D 72 76.5 84 

L 258 279 279 

A 71.5 40 90 

B 69 90 90 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

3p 4p 5p 

D 72 76.5 84 

L 170 187 187 


16 A 

4-/5-pole 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 

Mounting plates size 4 


3P + PE 3 P + N + PE 


110 V - 240 V, 3-Pole, 

220 V - 690 V, 4- and 5-Pole 

for Zone 2 

Ordering details 3-pole 

Zone 2 

Zone 22 


entry 














entry 

























Coupler 1.7 kg GHG 516 3506 R0001 

6 Plug 0.7 kg GHG 516 7506 R0001 

Accessories 


Plug cap, 3-, 4- or 5-pole on request 







5

32 A 

4-pole 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 

Coupler 

Plug 


220 V - 690 V, 4- and 5-Pole 

for Zone 2 


Zone 2 

Zone 22 

Ex-plugs and sockets to CEE and IEC 309-1/2 


Type of protection EEx nC IIC T6/T5 

Conformity statement 

Wall socket, plug 

PTB 99 ATEX 1115 








with thermal protection: 35 A/40 A gL 







D 

D 

120 

110 

205 

L 

170 

L 142 

L 

7 

7 

86 

X A 

168 

D 

86 

X 69,5 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 

10 

6 

Coupler 

L 90 

90 

Plug 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

4p 5p 

B 120 120 

X B 110 110 

T 166 168 

H 285 293 

X H 170 170 

L 205 205 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

4p 5p 

D 95 100 

A 86 86 

xA 69.5 69.5 

B 86 86 

xB 69.5 69.5 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

4p 5p 

D 95 100 

L 339 345 

A 90 90 

B 90 90 

Type/ 

No. of poles 

4p 5p 

D 95 100 

L 249 249 


32 A 

5-pole 

Wall socket 

Flange socket 



3P + PE 3 P + N + PE 


220 V - 690 V, 4- and 5-Pole 

for Zone 2 


Zone 2 

Zone 22 


entry 



























Accessories 4-/5-pole 


Plug cap, 3-, 4- or 5-pole on request 







5

Socket Distributions for 

Installation and 

Maintenance Work 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Main switch in explosionprotected 

design 

The various socket modules 

can be put together to suit 

individual requirements 

High mechanical 

stability 

Cover cannot be removed in 

the ”OFF“ position 

Interlocking switch can be 

locked with a padlock 

Commercially available 

industrial apparatus can be 

used with a ”hot work permit“ 

Description 

Electrical apparatus for use in potentially 

explosive atmospheres in Zone 1 areas 

must comply with VDE 0171, and must 

be installed according to VDE 0165. 

When servicing, repairing or extending 

installations, it is necessary to use drills, 

welding transformers, hand grinders, etc. 

that do not comply with the Ex-regulations. 

It is very difficult to control the way they 

are used with adapters (connection Exsocket 

to standard plug) once a so-called 

“hot work permit” has been issued. 

CEAG supplies socket distributions for 

installation and maintenance tasks that 

can only be put into operation via an 

explosion-protected interlocking switch 

with a padlocking facility. This guarantees 

that work carried out with a “hot work 

permit” is easily supervised and limited 

to a specific area. The interlocking switch 

must fulfil the following conditions: 

a) All-pole isolation 

b) Main switch properties acc. to 

VDE 0660 

c) It must be possible to lock the switch 

with a padlock. It must not be possible 

to remove the switch cover in the 

locked OFF position. 

Further certification: 


● Australia 



● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


20 A 

20 A 

40 A 

80 A 

Complete Socket 

Distributions 


Socket distributions 


Certificate of conformity* PTB-No. Ex-93. C.1008 X 

20 A switch 400 V, AC3: 20 A 

Switching capacity 40 A switch 400 V, AC3: 40 A 

80 A switch 400 V, AC3: 80 A 



Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Number of components 

1 switch, 2-pole, 20 A 

Contact arrangement Order No. 

1 Schuko socket 16 A 

1 M25 gland 

1 signal lamp 

Weight: 1.2 kg 


1 CEE, 16 A, 230 V, 6h, 

GHG 981 0040 R0001 

1-pole+N+PE 

1 M25 gland 

1 signal lamp 

Weight: 1.1 kg 


1 CEE socket, 16 A 

1 C-type M.C.B., 3-pole, 16 A 

1 CEE-socket, 32 A 

GHG 981 0041 R0001 


1 Schuko-socket 16 A 


1 M40 gland, Weight: 8.5 kg 

1 signal lamp 


1 earth leakage circuit breaker, 63 A 




GHG 981 0042 R0001 



1 Schuko-socket,16 A 


1 M50 gland, Weight: 15 kg 

1 signal lamp 

GHG 981 0043 R0001 



208 

166 

20 A 

84 

68,5 

238 

6 

10 

31 

79 

157 

544 

X 570 

247 

247 

271 

X 247 

40 A 80 A 

7 

X 843 

817 

247 

271 

X247 


247 

247 

7 

5

eAZK 96 

Ex-e Junction Boxes 

made of Moulded Plastic 

■ Decisive cost saving 

with the CEAG assembly 

system 

■ Connection terminals 

accessible from all sides 


■ Metal glands optional 

Description 

The distinguishing characteristic of the 

new eAZK 96 Ex-junction boxes types 1 

and 2 is the easy-to-install and easy-toconnect 

design. Screw and pillar terminals 

or tension spring terminals are available for 

terminals ranging from 0.5 to 6 mm 2 . Due 

to the practical design of the enclosure, 

the connection terminals are accessible 

from all sides, thus allowing problemfree 

connection. 

The CEAG installation system provides 

an economical way of mounting the 

junction boxes on walls, trellis work and 

pipes. Several designs incorporate various 

cable entries in the sizes M 25 and M 32 

for cables of 9-17 mm and 12-21 mm in 

diameter. A high mechanical and chemical 

stability of the enclosures is ensured due 

to the use of impact-resistant moulded 

plastic.The junction boxes are available 

with moulded plastic glands and with an 

interior earth continuity plate for metal 

glands. Unused cable entries must 

be sealed with certified blanking plugs. 



● Australia 



● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


eAZK 96 1 

eAZK 96 1 

with internal earth plate 

for metal glands 



eAZK 96 




Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e junction boxes eAZK 96 1 




Enclosure material Extremely tough polyamide 


Rated voltage 690 V 

Rated current dep. on terminals 

max. 4 x 4 mm2 , PE 4 x 2,5 mm2 Terminal cross section 

multi-wire 

max. 2 x 6 mm2 , PE 4 x 4 mm2 single-wire 

Weight 


eAZK 96 1: approx. 0.3 kg 


Type 

eAZK 96 1 

Cable entry Ex-e terminals Order No. 

2 x M25 for 9-17 mm 4 + 1 PE GHG 791 0101 R0001 

4 x M25 for 9-17 mm 4 + 1 PE GHG 791 0101 R0002 

+ 2 blanking plugs 

4 x M20 with 2 blanking- 4 + 1 PE GHG 791 0101 R0019 

plugs and internal earth 

plate for metal glands 




for trellis mounting GHG 610 1953 R0003 





≈122 

81.5 

X 48.5 

≈180 

100 

X 91 

42 

X = fixing dimensions 

5.6 

61 

10 


5

eAZK 96 2 

eAZK 96 2 

for metal glands 

Size 2 

Design: Pipe mounting 

eAZK 96 




Ex-e junction boxes eAZK 96 2 






Rated voltage up to 690 V 

Rated current dep. on terminals 

max. 4 x 4 mm2 Terminal cross section 

max. 2 x 6 mm2 Weight 


eAZK 96 2: approx. 0.5 kg 


Type Cable entry Ex-e terminals Order No. 

eAZK 96 2 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

4 x M25 for Ø 9-17 mm 


6 + 2 PE GHG 791 0201 R0006 

4 x M32 for Ø 12-21 mm 


6 + 2 PE GHG 791 0201 R0007 

6 x M25 for Ø 9-17 mm 


6 + 2 PE GHG 791 0201 R0001 

6 x M32 for Ø 12-21 mm 


6 + 2 PE GHG 791 0201 R0002 

6 x M20 with 4 x blanking- 8 + GHG 791 0201 R0003 

plugs and internal 2 PE (4 x 2.5 mm 2 

earth plate for metal multi-wire or 

glands 4 x 4 mm 2 solid) 









≈158 117.5 

X 55 

≈195 

113.5 

X 105 

56 


56 

10.5 

73.5 


Ex-e/Ex-i Multi-Purpose 

Terminal Boxes made of 

Moulded Plastic for 

Instrumentation Applications 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Decisive cost saving 

with the CEAG 

installation system 




Snap-out 

terminal rails 

Clip-in flange technique, 

in moulded plastic or metal 

according to requirements 

Clip-in PE/PA rail 

Internal coating 

for EMC-Protection 

on request 

Description 

The new terminal boxes were developed 

for instrumentation installation applications 

using Ex-e and Ex-i technologies. They are 

used as a link between the main cable to 

the control room and the branch cables 

into the field. 

In addition to this, they may also be used 

for the direct connection of actuators and 

sensors. 

The new terminal boxes for instrumentation 

installations are available in 5 sizes, ranging 

from 6 to max. 60 connection terminals. 

The choice between screw and tension 

spring (screwless) terminals for single and 

multi-wire conductors makes it possible for 

engineers to select the type of connection 

most suitable for the particular application. 

Due to the practical design of the 

enclosure, the connection terminals are 

accessible from all sides, ensuring a 

problem-free connection. The optimized 

design affords a generously dimensioned 

terminal compartment in spite of the 

compact external dimensions. 

The CEAG installation system provides an 

economical way of mounting the terminal 

boxes on walls, trellis work and pipes. The 

terminal boxes are suited for the use of 

single or multiple cable glands. 

With terminal boxes, series GHG 721, it 

is possible to apply two separate potentials 

such as screen-grid leads or PE/PA 

conductors to the plug-in PE rails. The 

variable applications of the terminal box 

series GHG 721 cannot be matched. The 

snap-out terminal rails allow a problemfree 

feeding-in of cables. The well-proven 

clip-in flanges in moulded plastic or metal 

design allow multiple application possibilities. 

As a result of the optimized design, 

a large drilling surface was created. This 

can be fitted with a sufficient number of 

moulded plastic glands or an equal 

number of metal glands. Drilled holes and 

unused cable entries must be sealed with 

certified blanking plugs. 



● Australia 



● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


5

GHG 791 01 

Size 1 


Ex-e/Ex-i Terminal Boxes 

of the Series GHG 791 

for Instrumentation Applications 


Ex-e/Ex-i terminal boxes GHG 791 


Type of protection EEx e II T6 / EEx ia II C T6 




Rated voltage 


up to 690 V 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Type Cable entry Terminal/design Order No. 

GHG 791 01 Screw terminals 

1 x M25 for Ø 8-17 mm 6 x 2.5 mm2 + 4 PE/PA 

1 x M25 for 2 x Ø 4,5-7 mm 

+ 1 blanking plug 

Ex-e design 

Screw terminals 

GHG 791 0101 R0003 


1 x M25 for 2 x Ø 4,5-7 mm 


Ex-i design GHG 791 0101 R0004 

1 x M25 for Ø 8-17 mm 


6 x 2.5 mm2 + 4 PE/PA 

2 x M12 for Ø 4-7 mm Ex-e-design GHG 791 0101 R0005 

+ 1 blanking plug Ex-i design GHG 791 0101 R0006 

1 x M25 for Ø 8-17 mm 

Screwless terminals 

6 x 2.5 mm2 + 4 PE/PA 

1 x M25 for 2 x Ø 4,5-7 mm 



1 x M25 for Ø 8-17 mm 


6 x 2.5 mm2 + 4 PE/PA 


+ 1 blanking plug Ex-i design GHG 791 0101 R0010 

with metal gland on request 









100 

X 91 

81.5 

X 48.5 

61 



GHG 791 02 

GHG 791 02 

from below 

Size 2 






113.5 

X 104.5 

117.5 

X 54 




Type of protection EEx e II T6 / EEx ia IIC T6 




Rated voltage 


up to 690 V 



73.5 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 



1 x M32 for 4 x Ø 4.5-7 mm 


Ex-e design 


GHG 791 0201 R0008 


1 x M32 for 4 x Ø 4.5-7 mm 


Ex-i design 


GHG 791 0201 R0009 



+ 2 blanking plugs Ex-i design GHG 791 0201 R0011 

1 x M25 for Ø 8-17 mm 


12 x 2.5 mm2 + 4 PE/PA 

1 x M32 for 4 x Ø 4.5-7 mm 


Ex-i design 


GHG 791 0201 R0013 



+ 2 blanking plugs Ex-i design GHG 791 0201 R0015 

with metal gland on request 










5

x 

Terminal box GHG 731 11 

Size 2A 


z 





Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e / Ex-i terminal boxes GHG 731 


Type of protection EEx e II T6 / EEx e [ia] IIC T6 / EEx ia IIC T6 





Empty weight 

Maximum number of drillings and glands 

0.8 kg 

Type Side M12 M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 

Enclosure GHG 731 11 X / Z 15 9 6 4 2 2 1 

Maximum number of built-in terminals in acc. with Certificate of Conformity 

Type Terminal cross section in mm2 Length of 

2.5 4 6 10 16 terminal rail 

Enclosure GHG 731 11 16 14 10 10 8 107 mm 


Type and built-in terminals Order No. 

Terminal box GHG 731 11 GHG 731 1102 R0531 

complete with: 

2 1) 

1 Ex-e terminal 2.5 mm 

1 PE-rail 7 x 2 x 4 mm2 Terminal box GHG 731 11 GHG 731 1102 R1088 

complete with: 

14 Ex-e terminal 4 mm2 1 PE-rail 7 x 2 x 4 mm2 Housing without drillings, other versions can be ordered acc. to table above 

1) Acc. to certificate of conformity individually extendable. 



Size 2A for wall mounting GHG 610 1953 R0007 






Dimensions in mm 120 

GHG 731 11 

X 90 

X 106 

140 

5.6 


10 

95 

X = fixing dimensions

Y 

GHG 721 0 

Size 2A 

Design: Pipe fixing 

77 





Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e/Ex-i terminal boxes GHG 721 0 







Empty weight 


0.7 kg 

Type Side M12 M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 

Enclosure GHG 721 0 Y 35 20 12 11 6 4 2 2 

Flange plastic – 11 6 4 3 2 1 1 – 

Flange metal – – – 3 3 1 – – – 




Enclosure GHG 721 0 


26 22 17 13 11 1 x 140 mm 




1 x 2.5 mm2 +12 PE/PA 

Ex-e design 


GHG 721 0001 R0001 


3 x M32 for 4 x Ø 4.5-7 mm Ex-i design 


GHG 721 0001 R0006 




GHG 721 0001 R0010 


12 x M20 for Ø 5-13 mm Ex-e design GHG 721 0001 R0007 

Ex-i design 


GHG 721 0001 R0008 












165 

165 

X 151 

X 141 

131.5 

11 



5

Y 

GHG 721 1 

Y 

Ex-i terminal box 

GHG 721 1 

with flange 

Size 3 



of the series GHG 721 



Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e/Ex-i terminal boxes GHG 721 1 




Enclosure material Polyester, reinforced with glass fibre 



Empty weight 


1.4 kg 


Enclosure GHG 721 1 Y 75 42 32 21 11 8 4 3 

Flange plastic – 46 25 20 11 8 4 3 2 

Flange metal – – – 12 9 5 4 3 2 




Enclosure GHG 721 1 


48 40 30 24 20 1 x 262 mm 


Type Cable entry Terminals/design Order No. 


1 x 2.5 mm2 + 24 PE/PA 

Ex-e design 


GHG 721 1001 R0003 




GHG 721 1001 R0013 

1 x M40 for Ø 16-28 mm 48 x 2.5 mm2 x 48 PE/PA 



GHG 721 1001 R0017 



Ex-i design 


GHG 721 1001 R0015 






Size 3 for wall mounting (screwless mounting) GHG 610 1953 R0018 

for trellis mounting (screwless mounting) GHG 610 1953 R0018 

for pipe mounting (screwwable mounting) GHG 610 1953 R0010 


Qty. per pack = 50 

GHG 610 1953 R0012 


165 

7 

X 272 

X 141 

7 

143 

11 



GHG 745 

Size 3 



of the series GHG 745 



Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 


Marking of 94/9/EC II 2 G/ II 2 D* 





Rated voltage 


up to 690 V 


Type Cable entry Terminals/design Order No. 

GHG 745 Screw terminals 




GHG 745 0201 R0012 




GHG 745 0201 R0016 






Ex-i design 


GHG 745 0201 R0021 








Type Application Number of plates Order No. 

Size 3 for pipe mounting 2 GHG 610 1953 R0010 




GHG 745 

320 

271 

X 247 

271 

X 247 



5

GHG 745 

GHG 745 

with flange 

PE rail 4 mm 2 

PE rail 10 mm 2 


of the Series 

GHG 744, 745, 746, 749 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

GHG 744, 745, 746, 749 






Rated voltage 690 V 

Enclosure GHG 744 1.4 kg 



Enclosure GHG 749 


5.8 kg 



Enclosure GHG 744 X / Z 60 36 26 18 10 7 4 3 




Flange plastic – 46 25 20 11 8 4 3 2 

Flange metal – – – 12 9 5 4 3 2 



2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 terminal rail 

GHG 744 40 33 25 20 17 17 – 1 x 230 mm 

GHG 745 2x41 2x34 2x26 2x20 17 17 14 2 x 235 mm 

GHG 746 2x94 2x78 2x59 2x47 40 40 32 2 x 510 mm 

GHG 749 2x148 2x124 2x94 2x75 63 63 51 2 x 795 mm 

PE rails 

Type Standard rail Rail, maximum 

GHG 744 1x (7x2x4 mm2 ) or 1x (3x10 mm2 ) 2x (7x2x4 mm2 ) or 2x (3x10 mm2 ) 





x 

x 

z 

GHG 744 

z 

GHG 745 

z 

x 

GHG 746 

x 

z 

GHG 749 


of the Series 

GHG 744, 745, 746, 749 


Standard terminal boxes 

Type Complete, equipped with Weight Order No. 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

GHG 744 1 terminal 4 mm2 1 PE rail 7 x 2 x 4 mm 

1.7 kg GHG 744 0101 R0005 

2 

1 flange, side X, not drilled 

GHG 745 1 terminal 4 mm2 1 PE rail 14 x 2 x 4 mm 

2.7 kg GHG 745 0201 R0004 

2 

1 flange, side X, not drilled 

GHG 746 1 terminal 4 mm2 2 PE rails, each 14 x 2 x 4 mm 

4.8 kg GHG 746 0301 R0002 

2 

2 flanges, side X, not drilled 

GHG 749 1 terminal 4 mm2 3 PE rails, each 14 x 2 x 4 mm 

6.7 kg GHG 749 0401 R0001 

2 

3 flanges, side X, not drilled 


Number of plates 

Type Application GHG 744 GHG 745 Order No. 

Size 3 for wall mounting 1 – GHG 610 1953 R0018 

for trellis mounting 1 – GHG 610 1953 R0018 

for pipe mounting 1 2 GHG 610 1953 R0010 



GHG 610 1953 R0012 


271 

X 247 

817 

7 

11 

X 793 

X 273 

134 

X 110 

136 

116 

271 

X 247 

271 

X 247 

544 

X 520 

271 

X 247 

GHG 744 GHG 745 GHG 746 

271 

X 247 

136 

116 

136 

116 

GHG 749 X = fixing dimensions 

136 

116 


5

GHG 791 

GHG 721 0 

10 mm 2 

GHG 721 0 

16 mm 2 

Ex-e Intermediate Motor 

Terminal Boxes 

from 4 to 16 mm 2 


131.5 

X 104.5 

117.5 

X 54 


GHG 791 

73.5 

165 

GHG 721 0 

M40 

165 

X 151 

80 

267 (10 mm2 ) 

280 (16 mm2 ) 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e intermediate motor terminal boxes 



EC-Type Examination Certificate GHG 791 PTB 00 ATEX 3108 

EC-Type Examination Certificate GHG 721 PTB 99 ATEX 1044 


Type GHG 791 extremely tough polyamide 

Type GHG 721 polyester, reinforced 


Rated voltage 


up to 690 V 

4 mm2 10 mm2 16 mm2 Type GHG 791 GHG 721 0 GHG 721 0 

Terminal 4 (2 x 4 mm2 ) 4 (2 x 10 mm2 ) 4 (2 x 16 mm2 ) 

PE-Terminal 1 (2 x 4 mm2 ) 1 (2 x 10 mm2 ) 1 (2 x 16 mm2 ) 

Cable 1 x M 25 1 x M 40 1 x M 50 

glands Ø 8-17 mm Ø 16-28 mm Ø 21-35 mm 

Trumped- 1 x M 32 1 x M 40 1 x M 50 

shaped glands Ø 15-20 mm Ø 19-27 mm Ø 26-34 mm 


Type Terminal Weight Mounting Plate Size Order No. 

GHG 791 2 4 mm2 0.7 kg Size 2 GHG 791 0201 R0016 

GHG 721 0 10 mm2 1.0 kg Size 2A GHG 721 0001 R0013 

GHG 721 0 16 mm2 1.1 kg Size 2A GHG 721 0001 R0014 

Accessories: Mounting plate 



Size 2 for trellis mounting GHG 610 1953 R0006 

Size 2 for pipe mounting GHG 610 1953 R0005 


Size 2A for trellis mounting GHG 610 1953 R0009 

Size 2A for pipe mounting GHG 610 1953 R0008 

Label holder with designation label (blank) GHG 610 1953 R0012 



X 141 

131.5 

M40 (1) 

M50 (2) 

(1) 10 mm2 (2) 16 mm2 X = fixing dimensions

GHG 745 

Size 3 


Ex-e Intermediate Motor 

Terminal Boxes from 

35 to 185 mm 2 



271 

X 247 

X 247 

120 

L1 L2 L3 N PE 

M63 

271 

~ 110 

7 

11 

136 

271 

X 247 

95 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e intermediate motor terminal boxes 


Type of protection EEx e II T5/6 






Polyester, reinforced with glass fibre 


Size Type and built-in components Weight Order No. 

35 Terminal box GHG 745 3.0 kg GHG 745 0201 R0002 

mm2 complete with: 

4 Ex-e terminals 2 x 35 mm2 1 PE-terminal 2 x 35 mm2 Cable glands 

on bottom 

1 x M50 and 1 x Trompete M63 

50/70 Terminal box GHG 745 3.2 kg GHG 745 0201 R0003 


4 Ex-e terminals 2 x 50/70 mm2 1 PE-terminal 2 x 50/70 mm2 Cable glands 

on bottom: 

1 x M50 and 1 x Trompete M63 

185 Terminal box GHG 746 6.3 kg GHG 746 0301 R0001 


4 Ex-e terminals 2 x 185 mm2 1 PE-terminal 2 x 185 mm2 Cable glands on bottom 

1 x double cable end box 

1 x 46 - 72 mm cable diam. 

1 x 21 - 45 mm cable diam. 


Type Application Number of plates 

GHG 745 

Order No. 




GHG 745 X = fixing dimensions 

GHG 746 


X 520 

544 

53 

150 

5

Explosion-Protected Terminal Boxes 

Series STB ... and NEXT ... 

made of Stainless Steel 

■ V4A AISI 316 

stainless steel 

with ground surface 

■ Highly resistant 

silicone seals 

■ Metal flanges available 

on request 


■ PE rails for two separate 

potentials 

Description 

The new explosion-protected terminal 

boxes made of stainless steel (V4A, 

AISI 316) with ground surfaces were 

developed for instrumentation and control 

installations using the Ex-e and Ex-i 

technologies. 

They act as a link between the main cable 

to the control room and the branch cables 

into the field. In addition to this, they may 

also be used for the direct connection of 

actuators and sensors. Here the metal 

cable glands also allow electromagnetically 

compatible connection methods. 

The robust design of the stainless steel 

terminal boxes provides a high degree of 

safety for offshore applications and in 

places where particularly adverse chemical, 

mechanical and climatic operating 

conditions prevail within the hazardous 

area. 

Two terminal box series in 5 and 7 sizes 

are available for accommodating up to 

136 terminals. The choice between screw 

and tension-spring (screwless) terminals 

for single and multi-wire conductors 

makes it possible for the installation 

engineers to select the type of connection 

that is most suitable for the respective 

application. Two separate PE rails are 

available for the separate connection of 

PE/PA and screened cables. Due to the 

optimized design, there is a large drilling 

area for fitting a large number of metal 

glands. Unused entry holes must be 

sealed safely with certified blanking plugs. 

As an alternative, a screw-on metal flange 

can be used for a wide variety of 

applications. 


● USA 

● Canada 


W 

Y 

Terminal box STB 1 

Series terminals 

PE series terminals 


STB 1, STB 2, STB 3, STB 5 and STB 6 



Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e/Ex-i terminal boxes 


Type of protection EEx e II T6/EEx e [ia] IIC T6/EEx ia IIC T6 

EC-Type Examination Certificate (complete) KEMA 99 ATEX 7894 X 

EC-Type Examination Certificate (Part cert.) KEMA 99 ATEX 7895 U 

Enclosure material Stainless steel 316L (1.4404) 


Rated voltage max. 690 V A 


Maximum number of built-in terminals Terminal cross section in mm2 Length of 

in acc. with Certificate of Conformity 2.5 4 6 10 16 terminal rail 

Enclosure STB 1 12 10 8 6 5 1 x 82 mm 

STB 2 17 15 11 9 7 1 x 110 mm 

STB 3 25 20 15 12 10 1 x 150 mm 

STB 5 55 48 35 29 24 1 x 320 mm 

STB 6 100 87 65 52 44 3 x 200 mm 

Maximum number of 

drillings and cable entries M20 M25 M32 M40 

Enclosure STB 1 7 5 2 2 

Side W/Y STB 2 10 7 4 2 

with STB 3 15 9 6 4 

flanges STB 5 34 26 14 11 

STB 6 46 27 15 12 


Type Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C Dim. H ØD Fixing dimensions 

X 

Weight 

STB 1 120 120 159 80 6 145 ca. 1.4 kg 

STB 2 150 150 189 90 6 175 ca. 1.9 kg 

STB 3 190 190 229 100 6 215 ca. 3.0 kg 

STB 5 380 160 419 120 8 405 ca. 3.7 kg 

STB 6 400 250 439 130 8 425 ca. 5.4 kg 


H 

X 

STB 5/6 

A 

ØD 

B C 


5

W 

Y 

Terminal box NEXT 

Series terminals 

PE-series terminals 


NEXT 22/15/13, NEXT 26/26/16, 

NEXT 26/26/20, NEXT 30/30/20 and 

NEXT 45/38/20 made of Stainless Steel 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

NEXT terminal boxes 



EC-Type Examination Certificate (complete) KEMA 99 ATEX 3172 X 

EC-Type Examination Certificate (Part cert.) KEMA 99 ATEX 3174 U 

Enclosure material Stainless steel 316L (1.4404) 


Rated voltage max. 690 V AC 


Maximum number of built-in terminals Terminal cross section in mm2 /terminal rail Length of 

in acc. with certificate of conformity 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 terminal rail 

Enclosure NEXT 22/15/13 24 20 15 12 10 8 1 x 149 mm 

NEXT 26/26/16 60 50 – – – – 2 x 180 mm 

NEXT 26/26/16 30 25 19 15 13 10 1 x 180 mm 

NEXT 26/26/20 60 50 – – – – 2 x 180 mm 

NEXT 26/26/20 30 25 19 15 13 10 1 x 180 mm 

NEXT 30/30/20 78 66 50 40 32 26 2 x 226 mm 

NEXT 45/38/20 136 114 86 70 58 46 2 x 378 mm 


drillings and glands M12 M16 M20 M25 

Enclosure NEXT 22/15/13 6 4 2 2 

Side W/Y NEXT 26/26/16 18 10 7 4 

with flange NEXT 26/26/20 24 15 10 8 

NEXT 30/30/20 30 18 12 9 

NEXT 45/38/20 39 24 14 10 


Type Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C Dim. H Fixing dimensions Flange Weight 

X 1 X 2 F 1 F 2 

NEXT 22/15/13 229 152 233 135 208 152 58 108 ca. 3.3 kg 

NEXT 26/26/16 260 260 341 180 316 170 80 214 ca. 5.5 kg 

NEXT 26/26/20 260 260 341 180 316 170 80 214 ca. 5.5 kg 

NEXT 30/30/20 305 305 386 206 361 203 124 261 ca. 7.0 kg 

NEXT 45/38/20 458 382 472 205 437 305 124 337 ca. 9.8 kg 


H 

F1 

11 

C 

B 

X2 A 

F2 

X1 


W 

Y 


Ex-e cable entry 


GHG 744 21, 745 22, 746 23 and 

GHG 749 24 made of Stainless Steel 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e/Ex-i terminal boxes 




Enclosure material Stainless steel V 4A 



GHG 744 21 approx. 3.5 kg 

Empty weight 






Maximum number of built-in Terminal cross section in mm2 /terminal rail Qty./ 

terminals in acc. with certificate 2.5 4 6 10 16 25 35 Length of 

of conformity terminal rail 

Enclosure GHG 744 21 40 33 25 20 17 17 – 1 x 230 mm 

GHG 745 22 82 68 52 40 17 17 14 2 x 235 mm 

GHG 746 23 188 156 118 94 40 40 32 2 x 510 mm 

GHG 749 24 296 248 188 150 126 126 102 2 x 795 mm 


drillings and glands M12 M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 

Enclosure GHG 744 21 60 36 26 18 10 7 4 3 

Side GHG 745 22 60 36 26 18 10 7 4 3 

W / Y GHG 746 23 120 72 52 36 20 14 8 6 

GHG 749 24 180 108 78 54 30 21 12 9 

Flange 46 25 20 11 8 4 3 2 

Type Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C Fixing dimensions Flange 

X 1 X 2 F 1 F 2 Qty. 

GHG 744 21 312.5 175 135 362.5 110 234 103 1 

GHG 745 22 312.5 312.5 135 362.5 247 234 103 1 

GHG 746 23 627.0 312.5 135 675.5 125 234 103 2 

GHG 749 24 941.5 312.5 135 991.5 125 234 103 3 


A 

F 1 

X 1 

X 2 

B 

F 2 

C 


5

W 

Y 

Terminal box STB 1 

W 

Y 

Terminal box NEXT 

Explosion-Protected Terminal Boxes, 

Series GHG 72 ... and GHG 74 ... 



Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 


Side Y PE - Terminal 

STB 1 4 x M20 Ex-e screw terminal 

1 x blanking plug M20 6 x 2 x 2.5 mm2 UK 3 N 

PE- terminal 

6 x 2 x 4 mm2 STB 100 0000 R0001 

NEXT 22/15/13 with flange Ex-e screw terminal 

4 x M20 6 x 2 x 2.5 mm 2 UK 3 N 

PE- terminal 

6 x 2 x 4 mm 2 NEXT 22 15 13 R0001 


1 x M25 12 x 2 x 2.5 mm 2 UK 3 N 

PE- terminal 

7 x 2 x 4 mm 2 STB 200 000 R0001 


6 x M20 12 x 2 x 2.5 mm 2 UK 3 N 

1 x M25 PE- terminal 

7 x 2 x 4 mm 2 NEX 26 26 16 R0001 


1 x M32 24 x 2 x 2.5 mm 2 UK 3 N 

PE- terminal 

13 x 2 x 4 mm 2 STB 300 000 R0001 


12 x M20 24 x 2 x 2.5 mm 2 UK 3 N 


13 x 2 x 4 mm 2 NEX 26 26 20 R0001 


1 x M40 48 x 2 x 2.5 mm 2 UK 3 N 

PE- terminal 

25 x 2 x 4 mm 2 STB 500 000 R0001 


24 x M20 48 x 2 x 2.5 mm 2 UK 3 N 


25 x 2 x 4 mm 2 NEX 30 30 20 R0001 


1 x M50 60 x 2 x 2.5 mm 2 UK 3 N 

PE- terminal 

31 x 2 x 4 mm 2 STB 600 000 R0001 


30 x M20 60 x 2 x 2.5 mm 2 UK 3 N 


31 x 2 x 4 mm 2 NEX 45 38 20 R0001 


W 

Y 


Explosion-Protected Terminal Boxes, 

Series GHG 72 ... and GHG 74 ... 




Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

GHG 745 22 with flange / without Ex-e screw terminal 

1 x 2 x 2.5 mm 2 UK 3 N 

PE- terminal 

14 x 2 x 4 mm 2 GHG 745 2201 R0001 


5

Ex-Cable Entries 

to EN 

■ Optimum non-slip wrench 

surface for good handling 

■ Iris diaphragm-type 

clamp for strain 

relief 

■ Large cable 

clamping area 

■ Integrated sealing lip 

■ Acme thread, no thread 

jumping, high torque not 

necessary 

Description 

In order to fulfil the requirements of 

DIN 46319 issued in 1989, all CEAG 

cable entries are now manufactured with 

a metric screw-in thread. 

The PG entries previously used will no 

longer be used for new installations and 

standard apparatus. They are, however, 

still available as replacements and for 

retrofitting existing installations. 

Optional or unused cable entries can be 

sealed with a new type of blanking plug. 

This blanking plug, which is also certified in 

the Certificate of Conformity for the cable 

entry, allows a flexible and economical use 

of explosion-protected apparatus. 

Modifications and extensions to existing 

installations can be carried out more easily 

at a later date. 

The outstanding characteristic of the new 

cable entry is the large cable clamping 

area. A high IP degree of protection is 

achieved, among other things, by 

means of an integrated sealing lip. Good 

mechanical properties are ensured by 

the use of high quality polyamides and 

good handling by a non-slip wrench 

surface. 


● Australia 



● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


M 32 

PG 21 

M 25 

PG 16 

M 20 

PG 13,5 

M 16 

PG 11 

M 12 

PG 9 

Ex-e cable entry 

Ex-i cable entry 

Comparsion: Diameter of cable for PGcable 

entry - metric cable entries 

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 

of permissible cable/mm 

Ex-e/Ex-i 

Cable Entries 


Ex-e/Ex-i cable entries 


Type of protection EEx e II 

EC-Type Examination Certificate 

PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X 



Material 


Polyamide 



SW 

L1 L2 

Eckmaß 

A/C dim. 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e cable entry with screw-in thread to DIN 46319 

Thread Quantity Cable SW Thread Length Weight Order No. 

per pack length L2 L1 approx. 

(pieces) Ø mm mm mm mm kg 

M12 x 1.5 1 x (20) 4- 7 15 6 19.3 0.063 GHG 960 9235 P0101 

M16 x 1.5 1 x (20) 5-10 20 6 23.0 0.125 GHG 960 9235 P0102 

M20 x 1.5 1 x (20) 5-13 24 8 25.0 0.180 GHG 960 9235 P0103 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (20) 8-17 29 8 29.5 0.340 GHG 960 9235 P0104 

M32 x 1.5 1 x (20) 12-21 36 10 35.5 0.540 GHG 960 9235 P0105 

M12 x 1.5 1 x (100) 4- 7 15 6 19.3 0.320 GHG 960 9235 P0201 

M16 x 1.5 1 x (100) 5-10 20 8 23.0 0.650 GHG 960 9235 P0202 

M20 x 1.5 1 x (100) 5-13 24 8 25.0 0.900 GHG 960 9235 P0203 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (100) 8-17 29 8 29.5 1.600 GHG 960 9235 P0204 

M32 x 1.5 1 x (100) 12-21 36 10 35.5 2.700 GHG 960 9235 P0205 

Ex-i cable entry with screw-in thread to DIN 46319 


per pack length L1 approx. 

(pieces) Ø mm mm L2 mm mm kg 

M12 x 1.5 1 x (20) 4- 7 15 6 19.3 0.063 GHG 960 9235 P0111 

M16 x 1.5 1 x (20) 5-10 20 6 23.0 0.125 GHG 960 9235 P0112 

M20 x 1.5 1 x (20) 5-13 24 8 25.0 0.180 GHG 960 9235 P0113 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (20) 8-17 29 8 29.5 0.340 GHG 960 9235 P0114 

M32 x 1.5 1 x (20) 12-21 36 10 35.5 0.540 GHG 960 9235 P0115 

M12 x 1.5 1 x (100) 4- 7 15 6 19.3 0.320 GHG 960 9235 P0211 

M16 x 1.5 1 x (100) 5-10 20 8 23.0 0.650 GHG 960 9235 P0212 

M20 x 1.5 1 x (100) 5-13 24 8 25.0 0.900 GHG 960 9235 P0213 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (100) 8-17 29 8 29.5 1.600 GHG 960 9235 P0214 

M32 x 1.5 1 x (100) 12-21 36 10 35.5 2.700 GHG 960 9235 P0215 

Cable entries with PG-thread on request 


5

PG 48 

M 63 

PG 42 

M 50 

PG 36 

M 40 

PG 29 

M 32 

PG 21 

M 25 

PG 16 

Ex-e Cable entries 

Ex-i Cable entries 

Comparsion: Diameter of cable for PGcable 

entry - metric cable entries 

10 20 30 40 50 

of permissible cable/mm 

Ex-e/Ex-i 

Cable Entries 


Ex-e/Ex-i cable entries 







Material 


Polyamide 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e cable entry with long screw-in thread 




M20 x 1.5 1 x (100) 5-13 24 13 25.0 1.030 GHG 960 9235 P0223 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (100) 8-17 29 13 29.5 1.780 GHG 960 9235 P0224 

M32 x 1.5 1 x (100) 12-21 36 15 35.5 2.900 GHG 960 9235 P0225 

M40 x 1.5 1 x (50) 16-28 46 15 39.5 2.440 GHG 960 9235 P0226 

M50 x 1.5 1 x (50) 21-35 55 16 44.0 3.750 GHG 960 9235 P0227 

M63 x 1.5 1 x (25) 27-48 68 16 47.0 2.625 GHG 960 9235 P0228 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (20) 8-17 24 13 29.5 0.360 GHG 960 9235 P0124 

M40 x 1.5 1 x (10) 16-28 46 15 39.5 0.460 GHG 960 9235 P0126 

M50 x 1.5 1 x (10) 21-35 55 16 44.0 0.730 GHG 960 9235 P0127 

M63 x 1.5 1 x (5) 27-48 68 16 47.0 0.525 GHG 960 9235 P0128 

Ex-i cable entry with long screw-in thread 




M20 x 1.5 1 x (100) 5-13 24 13 25.0 1.030 GHG 960 9235 P0233 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (100) 8-17 29 13 29.5 1.780 GHG 960 9235 P0234 

M32 x 1.5 1 x (100) 12-21 36 15 35.5 2.900 GHG 960 9235 P0235 

M40 x 1.5 1 x (50) 16-28 46 15 39.5 2.440 GHG 960 9235 P0236 

M50 x 1.5 1 x (50) 21-35 55 16 44.0 3.750 GHG 960 9235 P0237 

M63 x 1.5 1 x (25) 27-48 68 16 47.0 2.625 GHG 960 9235 P0238 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (20) 8-17 24 13 29.5 0.360 GHG 960 9235 P0134 

M40 x 1.5 1 x (10) 16-28 46 15 39.5 0.460 GHG 960 9235 P0136 

M50 x 1.5 1 x (10) 21-35 55 16 44.0 0.730 GHG 960 9235 P0137 

M63 x 1.5 1 x (5) 27-48 68 16 47.0 0.525 GHG 960 9235 P0138 


SW 

L1 L2 

Eckmaß 

A/C dim. 


Ex-e blanking plug 

Ex-e threaded plug 

Ex-e Blanking Plugs 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-e blanking plugs for cable entries 



EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X and 99 ATEX 3101 X 


Material 

Ex-e blanking plugs 

Polyamide 

Marking to 94/9/EC II 2 G/ II 2 D T80 °C 




Material 


Polyamide 


Ex-e blanking plugs for cable entries 

for cable Quantity per pack Weight Order No. 

entry (pieces) approx. 

M12 x 1.5 1 x (20) 0.018 kg GHG 960 1944 R0001 

M16 x 1.5 1 x (20) 0.025 kg GHG 960 1944 R0002 

M20 x 1.5 1 x (20) 0.032 kg GHG 960 1944 R0003 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (20) 0.055 kg GHG 960 1944 R0004 

M32 x 1.5 1 x (20) 0.092 kg GHG 960 1944 R0005 

M12 x 1.5 1 x (100) 0.100 kg GHG 960 1944 R0011 

M16 x 1.5 1 x (100) 0.125 kg GHG 960 1944 R0012 

M20 x 1.5 1 x (100) 0.160 kg GHG 960 1944 R0013 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (100) 0.275 kg GHG 960 1944 R0014 

M32 x 1.5 1 x (100) 0.460 kg GHG 960 1944 R0015 

Ex-e threaded plugs (with hexagon socket screw-in plug) 

for cable entry Quantity per pack (pieces) Weight, approx. Order No. 

M16 x 1.5 1 x (100) 0.24 kg GHG 960 1952 R0001 

M20 x 1.5 1 x (100) 0.43 kg GHG 960 1952 R0002 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (100) 0.66 kg GHG 960 1952 R0003 

M32 x 1.5 1 x (100) 1.20 kg GHG 960 1952 R0004 

M40 x 1.5 1 x (50) 1.83 kg GHG 960 1952 R0005 

M50 x 1.5 1 x (50) 2.83 kg GHG 960 1952 R0006 

Dimensions: 

Thread D A B L J 

M12 x 1.5 30.3 mm 6.0 mm 

M16 x 1.5 21.5 mm 4.0 mm 12 mm 33.0 mm 7.0 mm 

M20 x 1.5 25.5 mm 4.0 mm 13 mm 34.5 mm 8.5 mm 

M25 x 1.5 30.5 mm 4.0 mm 13 mm 36.0 mm 11.0 mm 

M32 x 1.5 37.5 mm 5.5 mm 15 mm 39.5 mm 14.0 mm 

M40 x 1.5 45.5 mm 5.5 mm 15 mm 

M50 x 1.5 55.5 mm 5.5 mm 16 mm 


D 

B J 

Thread 

A 

L 

Blanking plug 


5

Ex-e Trumpet-Shaped Cable Glands 

Ex-e Reducing Rings 


Trumpet-shaped gland 


Certificate of Conformity* PTB-No. Ex-92.C.1017 


Material 

Reducing ring 

Polyamide 



EC-Type Examination Certificate in PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X included 


Material 


Polyamide 


Ex-e trumpet-shaped cable glands 

Size Quantity per Cable L1 L2 d2 SW Weight Order No. 

pack (pieces) diameter mm mm mm mm approx. kg 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

M 20 1 x (10) 8-13 mm 64 15 47 26 1.00 GHG 960 1949 R0101 

M 25 1 x (10) 11-16 mm 65 15 51 32 1.10 GHG 960 1949 R0102 

M 32 1 x (10) 15-20 mm 80 15 68 41 1.70 GHG 960 1949 R0103 

M 40 1 x (10) 19-27 mm 86 15 81 50 2.30 GHG 960 1949 R0104 

M 50 1 x (1) 26-34 mm 95 16 96 60 0.45 GHG 960 1949 R0105 

M 63 1 x (1) 35-46 mm 105 16 107 75 0.55 GHG 960 1949 R0106 

Ex-e reducing rings 

Size 1 Size 2 Quantity per L1 L2 L3 SW Weight Order No. 

D1 D2 pack (pieces) mm mm mm mm approx. kg 

M 25 M 20 1 x (20) 14 8 8 29 0.25 GHG 960 1946 R0022 

M 32 M 20 1 x (20) 16 10 6 36 0.27 GHG 960 1946 R0006 

M 32 M 25 1 x (20) 16 10 10 36 0.26 GHG 960 1946 R0024 

M 40 M 25 1 x (10) 16 10 8 46 0.23 GHG 960 1946 R0009 

M 40 M 32 1 x (10) 16 10 10 46 0.21 GHG 960 1946 R0027 

M 50 M 32 1 x (10) 18 12 10 55 0.72 GHG 960 1946 R0012 

M 50 M 40 1 x (10) 18 12 12 55 0.65 GHG 960 1946 R0030 

M 63 M 40 1 x (5) 18 12 10 68 0.20 GHG 960 1946 R0015 

M 63 M 50 1 x (5) 18 12 12 68 0.15 GHG 960 1946 R0033 

*EC-Type Examination Certificate acc. to directive 94/9/EC applied for 


d 2 

Length 

Trumpet-shaped gland 

SW 

Thread 

D2 

L1 

L2 

D1 

L3 

Reducing ring 


SW

ADL 

ADE 

Ex-e Metal Cable Entries 


Ex-e Cable entries 

Type of protection EEx e II/EEx d IIC < 2000 cm 3 

Certificate of conformity LCIE 92 C 6125 X 


Material Nickel-plated brass 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

for unarmoured cable type ADL 

Size for cable SW A SW B L E Weight Order No. 

M .. Ø /mm /mm /mm /g 

20 4 8.5 15 24 20 15 56 GHG 905 2001 P0201 

20 6 12 19 24 22 15 38 GHG 905 2001 P0202 

20 8.5 16 24 24 25 15 45 GHG 905 2001 P0203 

25 6 12 19 30 22 15 88 GHG 905 2001 P0204 

25 8.5 16 24 30 25 15 55 GHG 905 2001 P0205 

25 12 20.5 30 30 27 15 70 GHG 905 2001 P0206 

32 12 21 30 36 27 15 100 GHG 905 2001 P0207 

32 16 27.5 41 41 34 15 150 GHG 905 2001 P0208 

40 16 27.5 41 44 34 15 175 GHG 905 2001 P0209 

40 21 34 48 48 36 15 210 GHG 905 2001 P0210 

50 21 34 48 55 36 16 245 GHG 905 2001 P0211 

50 27 41 55 55 39 16 285 GHG 905 2001 P0212 

63 33 48 64 67 41 17 400 GHG 905 2001 P0213 

63 40 56 72 72 43 17 490 GHG 905 2001 P0214 


for armoured cable type ADE 

Size Armour SW SW L E Weight Order No. 

M .. outer in mm 2 inner A B /mm /mm /g 

in mm in mm 

20 6 12 0 0.9 4 8.5 19 24 36 15 80 GHG 905 2001 P0220 

20 8.5 16 0 1.25 6 12 24 24 42 15 90 GHG 905 2001 P0221 

20 12 21 0 1.25 8.5 15.5 30 30 46 15 123 GHG 905 2001 P0222 

25 8.5 16 0 1.25 6 12 24 30 42 15 122 GHG 905 2001 P0223 

25 12 21 0 1.25 8.5 16 30 30 46 15 170 GHG 905 2001 P0224 

25 16 27.5 0 1.6 12 20.5 41 41 56 15 270 GHG 905 2001 P0225 

32 16 27.5 0 1.25 12 21 41 41 56 15 310 GHG 905 2001 P0226 

32 21 34 0 1.6 16 27.5 48 48 63 15 400 GHG 905 2001 P0227 

40 21 34 0 2 16 27.5 48 48 63 15 445 GHG 905 2001 P0228 

40 27 41 0 2 21 34 55 55 68 15 540 GHG 905 2001 P0229 

50 27 41 0 2 21 34 55 55 68 16 600 GHG 905 2001 P0230 

50 33 48 0 2.5 27 41 64 64 74 16 735 GHG 905 2001 P0231 

63 40 56 0 2.5 33 48 72 72 77 17 996 GHG 905 2001 P0232 

63 47 65 0 2.5 40 56 85 85 85 17 1480 GHG 905 2001 P0233 


A 

A x 1,1 

L E 

B 

B x 1,1 

A 

A x 1,1 

L E 

For unarmoured cable For armoured cable 

B 

B x 1,1 


5

Cable entry 

earthing washer 

D 

1,5 

L 

 

Clamping 

module 

Cable entry 

Accessories 

for Ex-e Metal Cable Entries 

Accessories 

Lead sheath earthing washer 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Type Cable entry Weight Cable in mm Quant./pack Order No. 

5 M 20 25.0 g 4.0 – 7.5 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0001 

6 M 20 / M 25 30.0 g 6.0 – 11.0 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0002 





11 M 50 380.0 g 28.0 – 39.5 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0007 

12 M 63 580.0 g 33.0 – 46.5 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0008 

13 M 63 730.0 g 40.0 – 54.5 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0009 

Clamping module for entries un- and armoured 

Type Cable entry Weight Cable in mm Quant./pack Order No. 

5 M 20 25.0 g 8.0 – 12.0 5 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0011 






11 M 50 380.0 g 33.0 – 48.0 1 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0017 

12 M 63 580.0 g 40.0 – 56.0 1 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0018 

13 M 63 730.0 g 47.0 – 65.0 1 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0019 

Shroud for cable entries 

Type Cable entry L in D in Cable in mm Quant./pack Order No. 

mm mm 

5 M 20 90 20 8.0 – 12.0 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0021 

6 M 20 / M 25 110 25 8.5 – 16.0 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0022 

7 M 20 / M 25 110 31 12.0 – 21.0 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0023 

8 M 25 / M 32 125 43 16.0 – 27.5 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0024 

9 M 32 / M 40 135 50 21.0 – 34.0 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0025 

10 M 40 / M 50 150 57 27.0 – 41.0 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0026 

11 M 50 165 67 33.0 – 48.0 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0027 

12 M 63 170 75 40.0 – 56.0 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0028 

13 M 63 190 89 47.0 – 65.0 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0029 

Earth tag 

for cable entry Connecting in mm Quant./pack Order No. 

M 20 7.0 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0031 

M 25 10.5 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0032 

M 32 12.2 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0033 

M 40 13.5 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0034 

M 50 13.5 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0035 

M 63 13.5 10 pieces GHG 905 2004 P0036 


Enlargement gland 

Multiple cable entry 

Drainage plug 

Breathing gland 

Special spanner 

Cable Entries/ 

Accessories 

Enlargement Gland/Multiple 

Cable Entry/Drainage Plug/ 

Breathing Gland 


Enlargement gland 


Certificate of conformity EEx e II 

EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X 



IP 66 to EN 60529 



EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 99 ATEX 3128 X 


Drainage plug 

IP 66 to EN 60529 


Certificate of conformity PTB-No. Ex-86/1112 



IP 65 to EN 60529 


Certificate of conformity PTB-No. Ex-95.D.3148U 



IP 54 to EN 60529 


Enlargement gland: 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Thread Quantity per pack Weight Order No. 

M16 / 20 1 x (20) 0.18 kg GHG 960 9244 P0122 

M20 / 25 1 x (20) 0.34 kg GHG 960 9244 P0123 

M25 / 32 1 x (20) 0.54 kg GHG 960 9244 R0124 

M32 / 40 1 x (10) 0.46 kg GHG 960 9244 R0125 

M40 / 50 1 x (10) 0.73 kg GHG 960 9244 R0126 

M50 / 63 1 x (5) 0.525 kg GHG 960 9244 R0127 



M32 x 1.5 for 4 x Ø 4.5-7 mm 1 x (20) 0.25 kg GHG 960 9235 P0155 

M25 x 1.5 for 2 x Ø 4.5-7 mm 1 x (20) 0.20 kg GHG 960 9235 P0154 

Drainage plug 


M25 x 1.5 1 x (20) 0.220 kg GHG 960 1927 R0102 

M25 x 1.5 1 x (100) 1.100 kg GHG 960 1927 R0104 



M25 x 1.5 1 x (20) 0.20 kg GHG 960 1954 R0001 

Accessories 

Special spanner for tightening screw caps after the cable has been fed in 

Type SW 

mm 

Pieces Weight Order No. 

1 set M12 15 1 

M16 20 1 

M20 24 1 

M25 29 1 

M32 36 1 

M40 46 1 0.825 kg GHG 960 1951 R0001 

1 set M50 55 1 

M63 68 1 0.905 kg GHG 960 1951 R0002 


5

Moulded Plastic Mounting Plates 

for Mounting on Walls, Trellis, Work, 

Pipes and Square Tubing 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Decisive cost savings 

using this mounting 

system 

Simply mount the mounting 

plates on walls, trellis work 

or pipes 

Quickly mount the new 

apparatus generation using 

snap-on technique 

Mounting plates for 

universal use 

Snap-on protective canopies 

available 

Description 

The CEAG apparatus mounting plates are 

the innovative answer to the perpetual 

problem of how to mount apparatus 

without tools. 

This intelligent and trend-setting solution 

for mounting switchgear on trellis work, 

pipes and walls was developed in close 

collaboration with our customers. 

At long last, together with the explosionprotected 

switchgear from CEAG, this 

snap-on mounting system with the simple 

fixing of apparatus brings the decisive 

advantages of cost savings. 

As can be seen in the technical data, 

there are five different sizes for mounting 

almost all types of CEAG switchgear. 

When used with the matching plug-in 

canopies, the switchgear is protected 

against direct sunlight and rain. 


The mounting plates for trellis work 

mounting can be mounted on wire 

diameters from 4.5 to 5 mm. 

After the mounting plates have been hung 

in the required position, locking pins are 

fitted to prevent them from shifting 

upwards. 

Moulded Plastic Apparatus Mounting 

Plates for Mounting on Walls, Trellis Work, 

Pipes and Square Tubing 

Mounting plates for pipe mounting can 

be fitted on all pipes with a diameter of 

1" to 2", as well as on square profiles 

measuring ca. 41 x 41 mm and U-shaped 

profiles measuring 60 x 40 mm. 

Description 

The CEAG apparatus mounting plates are 

the innovative answer to the perpetual 

problem of how to mount apparatus 

without tools. 

This intelligent and trend-setting solution 

for mounting switchgear on trellis work, 

pipes and walls was developed in close 

collaboration with our customers. 

At long last, together with the explosionprotected 

switchgear from CEAG, this 

snap-on mounting system with the simple 

fixing of apparatus brings the decisive 

advantages of cost savings. 

As can be seen in the technical data, 

there are five different sizes for mounting 

almost all type of CEAG switchgear. 

When used with the matching plug-in 

canopies, the switchgear is protected 

against direct sunlight and rain. 

Universal apparatus mounting plates in 

the sizes 4 and 5 can be individually 

adapted for any type of apparatus. 


5

Size 1 

Wall mounting 

Size 2 

Trellis mounting 

Size 3 

Pipe mounting 

Size 4 

Pipe mounting 

Size 5 

Pipe mounting 


for Mounting on Walls, Trellis Work, Pipes 

and Square Tubing 


Apparatus mounting plates for mounting on trellis work, walls and pipes, as well as for canopies 

Material used for mounting plates Plastic reinforced with glass fibre 

Material used for canopies Stainless steel V 4 A AISI 316 L 

from 27 - 30 mm (not included in scope of delivery) 

Outer diameter of pipes 

from 40 - 43 mm 

from 47 - 50 mm 

from 59 - 62 mm 

Square profile 

41 x 41 mm (e. g. Unistrut) 

U-shaped profile 60 x 40 mm 

Wire diameter from 4.5 - 5 mm 

Allocation of CEAG explosion-protected switchgear 

to mounting plates 

Apparatus 

mounting plate 

Can be snapped on Can be screwed on 

Size 1 Junction box eAZK 96 1 Installation plate GHG 273 

Terminal box GHG 791 01 Control unit P411 GHG 411 81 

Safety switch 10 A GHG 261 

Size 2 Junction box eAZK 96 2 Control unit P412 GHG 411 82 

Terminal box GHG 791 02 Control unit P413 GHG 411 82 

Control switch Ex 29 GHG 292 Control unit Ex 43 2 GHG 432 

Size 2A Terminal box 721 0 

all size 2 apparatus 

GHG 721 0 

Size 3 horiz. Terminal box 721 0 GHG 721 1* Terminal box 721 1 GHG 721 1* 

Terminal box 744 GHG 744 

Control unit Ex 44 GHG 444 

2 x Terminal box 745 GHG 745 

2 x Control unit Ex 48 GHG 448 

2 x Safety switch 40 A GHG 263 0050 

2 x Safety switch 80 A GHG 264 

Size 3 vert. Control switch Ex 29 GHG 293 Terminal box 744 GHG 744 

Safety switch 20 A GHG 262 26 Control unit Ex 44 GHG 444 

Safety switch 40 A GHG 263 23 Control unit Ex 43 4 GHG 434 

Manual motor starter GHG 635 

*only for wall or trelliswork mounting *only for pipe mounting 

Apparatus 

mounting plate 

Can be snapped on 

Size 4 new Control unit P411 GHG 411 81* 

Control unit P412 GHG 411 82* 

Control unit P413 GHG 411 83* 

Junction box eAZK 96 1 GHG 791 01* 

Junction box eAZK 96 2 GHG 791 02* 

Terminal box 791 01 GHG 791 01* 

Terminal box 791 02 GHG 791 02* 

Control switch Ex 29 P 292 GHG 292* 

Safety switch 20 A 3-pole GHG 262* 

Wall socket 16 A Zone 1 GHG 511 

Wall socket 16 A Zone 2 GHG 516 

Size 5 new 1 x Junction box eAZK 96 1 GHG 791 + 1 x safety switch 20 A 3-pole GHG 262* 

2 x Safety switch 20 A 3-pole GHG 262* 

2 x Junction box eAZK 96 1 GHG 791 01* 



1 x Manual motor starter GHG 635* 

1 x Control switch Ex 29 PA/WPA GHG 293* 

1 x Control unit Ex 43 2fach GHG 432* 

1 x Control unit Ex 43 4fach GHG 434* 

1 x Wall socket 32 A Zone 1 GHG 512 

1 x Wall socket 32 A Zone 2 GHG 517 

*can be plugged in with plug-in fasteners (see page 5/55 accessories) 


Size 2A 

Pipe mounting 

Size 3 

trellis and wall mounting 

Size 1 

wall mounting with canopy 

Canopy 

Plug-in fastener 


for Mounting on Walls, Trellis Work, Pipes 

and Square Tubing 

Ordering details - Apparatus mounting plates 

Type Application Minimum Order No. 

quantity 

Size 1 for wall mounting 10 pieces GHG 610 1953 R0001 

for pipe mounting 10 pieces GHG 610 1953 R0002 

for trellis mounting 10 pieces GHG 610 1953 R0003 




Size 2 A for wall mounting 10 pieces GHG 610 1953 R0007 






Size 4 for trellis mounting: 

universal, without fixing holes 10 pieces GHG 610 1953 R0027 

with fixing holes* 10 pieces GHG 610 1953 R0026 

Size 4 for pipe mounting: 



Size 5 for trellis mounting: 



Size 5 for pipe mounting: 



Blanking element 2 x 20 pieces GHG 610 1953 R0034 

* See list on page 5/54 for fixing holes for CEAG snap-on switchgear 

Ordering details - Canopies 

Type Application Minimum 

quantity 

Order No. 

Size 1 for size 1 mounting plates 5 pieces GHG 610 1955 R0001 

Size 2 for size 2 mounting plates 5 pieces GHG 610 1955 R0002 

Size 2A for size 2A mounting plates 5 pieces GHG 610 1955 R0003 

Size 3 for size 3 pipe-mounting plates, vert. 5 pieces GHG 610 1955 R0004 

Size 4 for size 3 trellis-mounting plates, vert 5 pieces GHG 610 1955 R0005 

Size 5 for size 3 pipe-mounting plates, horiz. 5 pieces GHG 610 1955 R0006 

Ordering details - Accessories 

Type Minimum 

quantity 

Order No. 

Label holders with type labels (blank) 50 pieces GHG 610 1953 R0012 

Mounting set for pipe mounting (27 - 30 mm) 10 pieces GHG 610 1953 R0020 

Plug-in fastener for modules 8 x 10 pieces GHG 610 1953 R0041 


5

Moulded Plastic Mounting 

Plates for Wall, Trellis, Pipe and 

Square Tube Mounting 

Mounting plates size 1 Mounting plates size 2 Mounting plates size 2A 

Trellis fixing Trellis fixing Trellis fixing 

Wall fixing Wall fixing Wall fixing 

Pipe fixing Pipe fixing Pipe fixing 

Canopy size 1 Canopy size 2 Canopy size 2A 


Mounting plate size 3 vert. for 

Wall- and trellis mounting pipe mounting 

Mounting plates, 

size 4, for wall trellis 

and pipe mounting 

Canopy size 4 

Moulded Plastic Mounting 

Plates for Wall, Trellis, Pipe and 

Rectangular Tube Mounting 

Mounting plate size 3 horiz. 

for wall and trellis mounting 

Canopy size 3 for mounting plate size 3 vert. Canopy size 3 for mounting plate size 3 horiz. 

for pipe mounting for wall and trellis mounting 


for wall and 

trellis mounting 

for 

pipe mounting 

Mounting plates, 

size 5, 

for wall trellis 

and pipe 

mounting 

Canopy size 5 


5

Ex-Control Station Enclosures 

Series P 411, P 412 and P 413 

■ Low side walls 

allow easy 

connection 

■ Quick fixing of all 

components 

■ Enclosures can be joined 

together in such a way that 

they cannot twist or turn 

■ Long-life lamps 

(100 000 hours) 

■ High chemical stability 

■ All external metal parts 

are corrosion resistant 

Description 

The standard enclosures of the control 

station programme for 1 - 3 built-in 

elements are made of a thermoplastic 

that complies with the EN requirements. 

An extremely well thought-out design 

concept not only allows optimum cable 

connection due to the low-cut side walls, 

but also installation of the enclosure when 

the cover is sealed. 

The flameproof built-in components can 

be clipped on to a DIN profile rail that is 

moulded into the enclosure base. 

According to requirements, cable entries 

can be provided top and bottom for 

2 cables from 8 - 17 mm or for 1 cable 

from 12 - 21 mm in diameter. Standard 

enclosures can be joined together in such 

a way that they cannot twist or turn by 

means of an enclosure coupler piece. 

Any metal parts are corrosion resistant. 

The high chemical stability rounds off the 

requirements for this range of control 

stations. 

In addition to the standard control stations 

illustrated here, other designs are available 

on request. 



● Australia 



● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


Size: P 411 

Control Units 

P 411, P 412 and P 413 


Control units P 411, P 412 and P 413 




IP 66 to EN 60529 

with double pushbutton IP 65 



Cable entries 1 x M25 x 1,5 for cable Ø 8-17 mm 

Connection terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2 PE-terminal 4 x 4 mm2 *EC-Type Examination Certificate applied for directive 94/9/EC 


Connection Description of built-in Weight Order No. 

diagram components 

( ) 

1 pushbutton 1NO + 1NC 0.4 kg GHG 411 8100 R0001 

incl. labels 

" 0, I, START, STOP " 

1 mushroom-head pushbutton 0.4 kg GHG 411 8100 R0002 

1 NO 1 NC, Inscription 

"NOT-AUS" and 

"EMERGENCY STOP" 

1 mushroom-head pushbutton 0.5 kg GHG 411 8101 R0012 

1 NO 1 NC, with key release 

Inscription: 

"NOT-AUS" and 


1 double pushbutton 0.4 kg GHG 411 8100 R0009 

1 NO + 1 NC, incl. labels 

"0, I, START, STOP" 

1 control switch 0.4 kg 

1 change-over, Inscription 

HAND AUTO GHG 411 8100 R0003 

0 I GHG 411 8100 R0004 

I I I GHG 411 8100 R0005 

1 control switch 0.4 kg 

2 NO, Inscription 

HAND 0 AUTO GHG 411 8100 R0006 

I 0 I I GHG 411 8100 R0007 

LOCAL REMOTE AUTO GHG 411 8100 R0008 

See page 5/60 for dimensions drawings and accessories. 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 


5

Size: P 412 

Size 1 

Design: Wall fixing 

Size 2 


Control Units 

P 411, P 412 and P 413 


Connection Description of built-in Weight Order No. 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Dual control unit with: 

2 pushbuttons, each 1 NO + 1 NC 0.54 kg GHG 411 8200 R0001 

incl. designation labels 


Dual control unit with: 

1 double pushbutton, 1 NO + 1 NC 0.65 kg GHG 411 8200 R0003 



1 signal lamp, 230 V AC 

incl. coloured lens covers 

in white, red, green and yellow 


Type Application Type GHG 411.. Order No. 

Size 1 for wall mounting 8100... GHG 610 1953 R0001 

for trellis mounting 8100... GHG 610 1953 R0003 

for pipe mounting 8100 GHG 610 1953 R0002 

Size 2 for wall mounting 8200.../8300... GHG 610 1953 R0004 

for trellis mounting 8200.../8300... GHG 610 1953 R0006 

for pipe mounting 8200.../8300... GHG 610 1953 R0005 




115 

85 

85 

38 

75 

52 

155 

125 

85 

38 

75 

40 

92 

195 

165 

75 

P 411 P 412 P 413 

85 77.5 

38 

5 

40 

40 


132 

5.6 

22

Size: P 413 

Control Units 

P 411, P 412 and P 413 


Conncetion Description of built-in Weight Order No. 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Triple control unit with: 

2 pushbuttons, 1NO + 1NC 0.76 kg GHG 411 8300 R0001 


"0, I START, STOP" 

1 signal lamp 230 V AC 


in white, red, green and 

yellow 

Triple control unit with: 0.80 kg GHG 411 8300 R0003 

1 signal lamp 230 V AC 


in white, red, green and 

yellow 

1 double pushbutton, 

1 NO + 1 NC, incl. 

designation labels 


1 mushroom-head pushbutton 

1 NO + 1NC, with manual 

release 

Inscription: "NOT-AUS" and 



1 measuring instrument 0.92 kg GHG 411 8300 R0023 

AM 72, 

instrument trans. connection 

n/1A, scale 0 - 100 / 150 % 

1 control switch, 1 NO + 1 NC, 

engaging-engaging-spring 

return, switch mechanism 8 

Inscription: " 0 - I " 


1 signal lamp 230 V AC, 0.80 kg GHG 411 8300 R0004 

incl. coloured lens covers in 

white, red, green and yellow 

1 double pushbutton, 1 NO + 

1 NC, incl. designation labels 

"O; I; START; STOP" 

1 control switch, 

1 change-over, switch 

mechanism 6 

Inscription: "HAND - AUTO" 

See page 5/60 for dimensions drawings and accessories. 


5

P 411 

P 412 

P 413 

Type Size 1. Mounting area 2. Mounting area 

P 41. 

Ordering Codes for Individual Designs 

Code A B C D E Code A B C D E 

Pushbutton DRT Code A 

D R T O 

B C 

Codes see page 5/81-5/83 

Double pushbutton Code A 

D D T O 

B C up D down 


Key operated Code A B C 

pushbutton 

S L T O 


Mushroom-head Code A B C D E 

pushbutton 

S G T 


Signal lamp Code A B C 

S I L 


Example: P 412 with 1 x M25 plastic, bottom 

2 pushbuttons 1 NO + 1 NC, STOP, START 

Ordering code: P 412 DRTO 15 06/DRTO 15 07/21 00 


3. Mounting area KLE 

Code A B C D E up down 

Potentiometer Code A B 

P O T 


Measuring instrument AM 72 Code A B C 

M 7 2 


Switch Code A B C D 

S C T 


Terminals 6 x 2 x 4 mm2 Code A B 

K L M 


0 0 

no 

2 1 

1 x M25 KLE 

2 4 

2 x KLE M25 

1 0 

Flange, metal 

2 x M20 hole 

1 x PE 

2 5 

1 x M32 KLE 


5

Measuring instrument AM 72 

Interchangeable scale 

Measuring Instruments 

in Enclosure P 412 


Measuring instrument enclosure series 


Certificate of Conformity* PTB No. Ex-87.B.1009 


Measuring range see ordering details 

Type of current Direct and alternating 

Movement Moving-iron principle 

Exactitude of measurement Class 2.5 

Operating position vertical 

Overload range 1 : 1.5 (indicated) 

Zero adjustment Adjustment screw on instrument 

Rated current marking Red indicator 

Connection terminals 2 x 4 mm2 Cabel entries 1 x M25 for cables Ø 8 - 17 mm 



Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Movement, direct measurement Weight Order No. 

0 - 1 / 1.5 A 0.7 kg GHG 411 8281 R0002 

0 - 2.5 / 3.75 A 0.7 kg GHG 411 8281 R0003 

0 - 5 / 7.5 A 0.7 kg GHG 411 8281 R0004 

0 - 10 / 15 A 0.7 kg GHG 411 8281 R0005 

0 - 16 / 24 A 

0 - 20 mA (Ri = 320 Ohm) 

0.7 kg GHG 411 8281 R0007 

0 - 100 / 120 % 

4 - 20 mA (Ri = 320 Ohm) 

0.8 kg GHG 411 8285 R0033 

0 - 100 / 120 % 0.8 kg GHG 411 8286 R0035 

Movement for C.T. connection 

0 - 1 / 1.5 A Scale 0 -100 / 150 % 0.7 kg GHG 411 8282 R0002 

Other designs n/1A 0.8 kg GHG 411 8282 R00 

Code for interchangeable scales: 

Code Scale Code Scale Code Scale 

02 0 - 1 / 1.5 A 10 0 - 40 / 60 A 17 0 - 250 / 375 A 

03 0 - 2.5 /3.75 A 11 0 - 50 / 75 A 18 0 - 300 / 450 A 

04 0 - 5 / 7.5 A 12 0 - 60 / 90 A 19 0 - 400 / 600 A 

05 0 - 10 / 15 A 13 0 - 75 / 112.5 A 20 0 - 500 / 750 A 

06 0 - 15 / 22.5 A 14 0 - 100 / 150 A 21 0 - 600 / 900 A 

08 0 - 20 / 30 A 15 0 - 150 / 225 A 

09 0 - 30 / 45 A 16 0 - 200 / 300 A 

See page 5/108 for interchangeable scales 


125 

155 

85 

75 

73 

92 

5,6 

5 

22 

77.5 


73


5

Universal Ex-Control 

Station Range in 

New GHG 43 Design 

■ International approvals 

guarantee worldwide 

application possibilities 

■ Up to 4 control and indicating 

units can be installed 

■ All external metal parts are 

corrosion resistant 


■ Enclosures made of 

non-combustible materials 

to UL 94-V0 

■ Large drilling surface for 

2 x M25 metal cable entries 

Description 

The new Ex 43 control station range has 

up to 4 mounting spaces for the installation 

of command and control units. With this 

series it is also possible to screw two metal 

entries up to size M25 into an earthed 

gland plate. 

Almost all requirements for small controls 

can be fulfilled with two basic sizes 

(sizes 2 and 4), together with the various 

cable entry designs and the control 

elements that are based on the requirements 

of the specific application. Large 

indicating instruments (72 mm x 72 mm) 

make it easy to read the measured values. 

Control switches with large switch toggles 

and padlocking facilities for control units 

round off the product range. Thus, this 

new product range provides an excellent 

addition to the well proven P 411, P 412 

and P 413 control station ranges. 

High quality materials provide a multitude 

of application possibilities, even in the 

off-shore field of industry. They are not 

only impact resistant, but also fulfil the 

requirements to UL 94-VO for noncombustible 

materials. 

The internationally valid approvals to 

EN and UL, as well as to AS, allow them 

to be used throughout the world in accordance 

with the requirements for zone 

classifications. 



● Australia 



● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 






Control units Ex 43 2 and Ex 43 4 


Certificate of Conformity* PTB Ex 87.B.1009 


IP 66 to EN 60529 




Cable entries Moulded plastic: max. 2 x M25 x 1.5 for cables Ø 8-17 mm 

(KLE) with 1 blanking plug 

max. 1 x M32 x 1.5 for cables Ø 12-21 mm 

Metal, earthed: 2 x M20 x 1.5 threaded entries 

2 x M25 x 1.5 threaded entries 

Connection terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2 PE-terminal 4 x 4 mm2 * EC-Type Examination certificate acc. to directive 94/9/EC applied for 


Connection Description of built-in 


1 x mushroom-head 

pushbutton 

1NO + 1NC spring return 


pushbutton 

1NO + 1NC with locker 

1 x control switch EX 23 

HAND - AUTO 


O - I 

Cable 

entries 

1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 

Blanking plate inside 

with 2 x M20 

threaded entries 

1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 

Brass plate inside 

with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 

Internal plate brass 

with 2 x M20 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Order No. 

GHG 432 0001 R0001 

GHG 432 0002 R0001 

GHG 432 0001 R0002 

GHG 432 0002 R0002 

GHG 432 0001 R0003 

GHG 432 0002 R0003 

GHG 432 0001 R0004 

GHG 432 0002 R0004 


5








HAND - 0 - AUTO 


I - 0 - II 

2 x pushbutton 1NO + 1NC 

0, I, START, STOP 

1 x double pushbutton 

1NO + 1NC, 


1 x signal lamp 230 V AC 

with lens cover white, red, 

yellow and green 


pushbutton 1NO + 1NC 

spring return 


1NO + 1NC 


Cable 

entries 

1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Order No. 

GHG 432 0001 R0005 

GHG 432 0002 R0005 

GHG 432 0001 R0006 

GHG 432 0002 R0006 

GHG 432 0011 R0001 

GHG 432 0012 R0001 

GHG 432 0011 R0002 

GHG 432 0012 R0002 

GHG 432 0011 R0003 

GHG 432 0012 R0003 








1 x measuring instrument 

AM 72, instrument trans. 

connection n / 1A 

scale 0 - 100 / 150 % 




scale 0 - 100 / 150 % 


1NO + 1 NC 





scale 0 - 100 / 150 % 


AUS - BETRIEB - EIN 










scale 0 - 100 / 150 % 


1NO + 1NC 



pushroom 1NO + 1NC 

spring return 

Cable 

entries 

1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Order No. 

GHG 432 0011 R0004 

GHG 432 0012 R0004 

GHG 432 0011 R0005 

GHG 432 0012 R0005 

GHG 432 0011 R0006 

GHG 432 0012 R0006 

GHG 434 0111 R0001 

GHG 434 0112 R0001 

GHG 434 0111 R0002 

GHG 434 0112 R0002 


5










scale 0 - 100 / 150 % 

1x mushroom-head 


spring return, 


AUS - BETRIEB - EIN 








spring return 


1NO + 1NC 








1 x double mushroom-head 





spring return 


HAND - AUTO 

Cable 

entries 

1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


1 x M25 KLE / 

1 x M25 KLE + 

blanking plug 


with 2 x M20 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Order No. 

GHG 434 0111 R0003 

GHG 434 0112 R0003 

GHG 434 1111 R0004 

GHG 434 1112 R0004 

GHG 434 1111 R0005 

GHG 434 1112 R0005 

GHG 434 1111 R0006 

GHG 434 1112 R0006 


Wall mounting 

size 2 with canopy 

Pipe mounting 

size 3 

Accessories: 

Ex-Control Station Range 

GHG 43 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Type Application for enclosure Order No. 

Size 2 for wall mounting Ex 43 2 GHG 610 1953 R0004 

for trellis mounting Ex 43 2 GHG 610 1953 R0006 

for pipe mounting Ex 43 2 GHG 610 1953 R0005 

Size 3 for wall mounting Ex 43 4 GHG 610 1953 R0018 

for trellis mounting Ex 43 4 GHG 610 1953 R0018 

for pipe mounting Ex 43 4 GHG 610 1953 R0010 

Canopy Protection against 

Size 2 environmental influence Ex 43 2 GHG 610 1955 R0001 

Canopy 3 Protection against 

vertical pipe environmental influence Ex 43 4 GHG 610 1955 R0004 

mounting 

Size 3 Protection against 

vertical environmental influence Ex 43 4 GHG 610 1955 R0004 

channel 

mounting 

10 adapter piece for pipe mounting 27 - 30 mm (1’’) GHG 610 1955 R0020 

50 label holder with designation label (blank) GHG 610 1953 R0012 

Accessories 

Description Quantity per pack Order No. 

Blank designation label, 

can be engraved 

10 GHG 410 1953 R0001 

Tool for tightening 1 GHG 410 1914 R0001 

lock nuts 

Blanking element 10 GHG 410 1920 R0001 



158 

X 98 

100 90 

X 88 

245 

X 188 

100 

X 88 

Ex 43 2 Ex 43 4 


90 

5

GHG 43/Size 2 

Mounting area 

2 

1 

GHG 43/Size 4 

Mounting area 

4 

3 

2 

1 

Ordering Codes for Individual Designs 

Type Size 1. Mounting area 2. Mounting area 

GHG 43 

Code A B C D E Code A B C D E 

Pushbutton DRT Code A 

D R T O 

B C 


Double pushbutton Code A 

D D T O 

B C up D down 


Key-operated Code A B C 

pushbutton 

S L T O 


Mushroom-head Code A B C D E 

pushbutton 

S G T 


Signal lamp Code A B C 

S I L 


Example: GHG 43 size 2 with 2 x M25 plastic cable gland, bottom 

1. Mushroom-head pushbutton with yellow actuator, 1NO + 1NC, 

function auto-manual, ”NOT AUS“ 

2. Signal lamp 230 V AC, lens cover yellow 

Order code: GHG 43 2, SGT 15 12 08/SIL 2 01/01 00 


3. Mounting area 4. Mounting area Cable entries 

Code A B C D E Code A B C D E up down 

Potentiometer Code A B 

P O T 


Measuring instrument AM 72 Code A B C 

M 7 2 


Switch Code A B C D 

S C T 


Control switch Ex 23 10 A Code A B C D E 

E x 2 3 


Terminals 6 x 2 x 4 mm2 Code A B 

K L M 


0 0 

no 

0 1 

1 x M25 KLE 

1 x M25 KLE with 

blanking plug 

0 2 

1 x brass plate 

inside with 

2 x M20 threaded 

entries 

0 3 

1 x brass plate 

inside with 

2 x M25 threaded 

entries 

0 4 

1 x M32 KLE 


5

Ex-Control Station 

Enclosure Series GHG 44 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Installation of 1 to 54 built-in 

components 

Standard dimension of front 

actuator elements Ø 30.5 mm 

Clip-on coloured lens covers 

and pushbutton labels 

Enclosures can be joined 

together 

Built-in apparatus mounted 

on rails 

Quick mounting due to 

snap-on built-in components 

All metal parts are corrosion 

resistant 

Robust enclosure made of 

polyester reinforced with 

glass fibre 

Description 

The explosion-protected control stations of 

the series GHG 444, GHG 448, GHG 449 

and GHG 447 are made of impact-resistant 

polyester reinforced with glass fibre. 

All metal parts are corrosion resistant. 

The enclosure covers and flanges feature 

foamed-in silicone seals. 

Screwless flanges can easily be exchanged 

or fitted via the flange openings of the 

enclosures using quick-fit connectors. 

Similarly, the quick-fit connectors can be 

used for joining control stations to each 

other, as well as to terminal boxes of the 

series GHG 744, GHG 745, GHG 746 and 

GHG 749 to form large distributions. 

With the standard distance of 40 mm from 

the centre of one component to the centre 

of the next, as many as 54 components 

can be built into the control stations. These 

built-in components are snapped on to 

NS 35/7.5 rails according to DIN 50022. 

Cams on the components and notches in 

the rails ensure that the built-in components 

are mounted in the certified 

positions. Unused mounting spaces can 

be fitted with blanking elements in our 

works, thus making it possible to use them 

at a later point in time. 

The rails are mounted on a hinged framework. 

This allows the user to connect 

up the terminals situated underneath the 

rails without any difficulties. 


● USA 

● Canada 



● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


GHG 444 

GHG 448 


GHG 444 and GHG 448 


Ex-control station GHG 444 


Type of protection EEx de IIC T6 or T5 




IP 66 to EN 60529 


Weight, incl. hinged framework approx. 1.7 kg 

Mounting arrangement Distance between centres 40, 50 and 60 mm / 

1-6 mounting spaces 

72 72 

72 72 

5 6 

3 4 

1 2 

13 14 15 16 17 18 

7 8 9 10 11 12 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

M72 

+ + 

Ex28 







IP 66 to EN 60529 


Weight, incl. hinged framework approx. 2.3 kg 





134 

X 110 

271 

X 247 


GHG 444 

136 

116 

11 

M72 + + + 

+ + + + + + 

Ex28 + + + 

271 

X 247 

271 

X 247 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

GHG 448 

136 

116 


5

GHG 449 

GHG 447 


GHG 449 and GHG 447 

72 72 


72 72 

25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 

13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 

37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 

19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-Control station GHG 449 






IP 66 to EN 60529 


Weight, incl. hinged framework approx 4.3 kg 









IP 66 to EN 60529 


Weight, incl. hinged framework approx 6.6 kg 

Mounting arrangement 


Distance between centres 40, 50 and 60 mm / 



544 

X 520 

271 

X 247 

GHG 449 


136 

116 

817 

X 793 

X 273 

271 136 

X 247 

116 

GHG 447 


Explosion Protected Control Stations 

Series GHG 444 35, GHG 448 35, GHG 449 35 

and GHG 447 35 made of Stainless Steel 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Enclosures for 1 to 54 

built-in components 

Standard 30.5 mm 

actuator elements 

Clip-on coloured lens covers 

and pushbutton labels 

Enclosures can be joined one 

below the other or next 

to each other 

Built-in apparatus mounted 

on DIN rails 

Quick mounting 

of snap-on 

components 

V4A AISI 316 stainless steel 

with ground surface finish 

Highly resistant silicone 

seals 

Optional use of flanges 

Description 

The new explosion-protected control 

stations of the series GHG 444 35, GHG 

448 35, GHG 449 35 and GHG 447 35 

made of stainless steel (V4A, AISI 316) with 

ground surfaces were especially designed 

for control unit combinations. The large 

number and variety of individual components 

make it possible to build individual 

combinations to suit any application 

required. 

The robust design with corrosion-resistant 

cover screws made of stainless steel 

provides a high degree of safety for 

offshore applications and in places where 

particularly adverse chemical, mechanical 

and climatic operating conditions prevail 

within the hazardous areas. Foamed-in 

silicone seals in the enclosure cover 

provide durable protection against the 

ingress of water. 

Flange openings in the enclosures mean 

that flanges can be replaced or fitted easily. 

Similarly, the control stations can be 

combined to former large control stations, 

whereby they are joined one below the 

other or next to each other. 

The enclosures accommodate up to 54 

built-in components with a grid dimension 

of 40 mm. These built-in components are 

snapped onto mounting rails of the type 

NS 35/7.5 to DIN EN 5022. To ensure the 

safe positioning of the built-in components 

in acc. with the approvals there are positioning 

aids on both the components and 

the rails. Unused mounting spaces can be 

fitted in the factory with blanking elements 

to allow component installation at a later 

date. 

The rails are mounted on a hinged mounting 

frame. This facilitates the connection 

of the series terminals located underneath 

the rails. 



● Australia 



● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


5

Control station Ex 44 - GHG 448 

Explosion Protected Control Units 

Series GHG 444 35, GHG 448 35, 

GHG 449 35 and GHG 447 35 



Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Control station Ex 44, Ex 48, Ex 49, Ex 47 


Type of protection EEx de II C T5 or T6 




Rated voltage max. 690 V AC (dep. on built in apparatus) 

Ex 44 - GHG 444 35 approx. 3.5 kg 

Empty weight 

Ex 48 - GHG 448 35 

Ex 49 - GHG 449 35 



Ex 47 - GHG 447 35 approx. 16.5 kg 

Ex 44 - GHG 444 35 6 components 

No. of built in Ex 48 - GHG 448 35 18 components 

components Ex 49 - GHG 449 35 36 components 

Ex 47 - GHG 447 35 54 components 



X 2 

B 

X 1 

Type Dim. A Dim. B Dim. C Fixing dimensions 

X 1 X 2 

GHG 444 35 312.5 175 135 362.5 110 

GHG 448 35 312.5 312.5 135 362.5 247 

GHG 449 35 627.0 312.5 135 675.5 125 

GHG 447 35 941.5 312.5 135 991.5 125 

C 

A 


Pushbutton 

Double pushbutton 

Long-life signal lamp LLD 

Potentiometer 


Components for 

Control Stations 


Pushbutton and double pushbutton: 


Type of protection EEx de IIC 

EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 97 ATEX 1081U 

Rated voltage upt o 500 V~ 

Rated current 16 A 

to AC11: 230 V 6 A 

400 V 4 A 

Switching capacity (for L/R 100 ms) 

Connection terminals 2 x 2.5 mm 2 

to DC11: 24 V 6 A 

60 V 0.8 A 

110 V 0.5 A 

220 V 0.2 A 

Long-life signal lamp, LLD: 





12 V – 240 V AC with 50 – 60 Hz 

12 V – 110 V DC 

Power consumption 1.2 W 

Lamp output 0.6 W 

Service life 100 000 hours 

Connection terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2 Potentiometer: 




Rated voltage 250 V~ 

Power consumption 1.0 W 

Resistance 100 – 10 000 Ω 

Angle of rotation 270° 

Scale 0 - 100 % 


Measuring instruments AM 72/AM 45: 




Movement Moving iron 


Measuring range 0 –16 A direct, C.T. n/1 A 

Connection terminals 2 x 4 mm 2 


Scale interchangeable for C.T. n/1 A 


Zero adjustment at instrument 

Rated current marking red indicator 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 


5

Control switch Ex 23 

Control and selection switch Ex 29 

Terminal MXK 4-Ex 

Terminal UK 3-Ex 


Control Stations 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 







AC 1: 500 V / 10 A 

AC 11: 230 V / 6 A; DC 11: 24 V / 6 A 

Switching capacity to 500 V / 6 A 48 V / 4 A 

60 V / 0.8 A 

110 V / 0.5 A 

220 V / 0.4 A 


Ex 29 control and selection switch 






AC 15 DC 13 up to 60 V 2 A 

Switching capacity up to 230 V 6 A up to 110 V 0.6 A 

up to 400 V 4 A up to 230 V 0.5 A 

Connection terminals up to 1 x 6 mm 2 or 2 x 2.5 mm 2 

Terminals MXK 4-Ex 


Certificate of Conformity* PTB-No.: Ex-94.C.3145U 


Terminal cross section 4 mm 2 

Terminal width 6.2 mm 

End plate width 1.5 mm 

Terminals UK 3-Ex 


BASEEFA Certificate* No.: Ex-88.B.3197U 


Terminal width 5.2 

End plate width 1.8 

Terminal cross section Fine wire 2.5 mm 2 ; I= 15 A 

Single wire 4 mm 2 ; I= 21 A 



Pushbutton 


Key-operated pushbutton 


Individual Controls 

Orderng details 

Pushbutton DRT 

D R T 0 

Code A B C 

Contact system 

Code B 13 14 15 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Inscription O I II STOP START NOT-AUS LANGSAM 

Code C 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 

Inscription SCHNELL EMERGENCY STOP ARRET MARCHE 

Code C 10 11 12 14 15 

Double pushbutton D D T 0 

Code A B C top D bottom 


Code B 43 44 45 


Code C / D 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 


Code C / D 10 11 12 14 15 

Key-operated 

pushbutton SLT 

S L T 0 

Code A B C 


Code B 23 24 25 

Pushbutton Key 

Not Lockable yes yes yes no no yes 

depressed Key removable yes yes no no yes yes 

Depressed Lockable yes no yes yes auto yes 

Key removable no no yes yes yes yes 

Code C 1 2 3 4 5 6 


5

Mushroom-head pushbutton 

Signal lamp 

Terminals 6 x 2 x 4 mm 2 

Potentiometer 




Signal lamp SIL 

S I L 

Code A B C 

Terminals KLM 

K L M 

Code A B 

Potentiometer P O T P O T 

Code A B 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Mushroom-head pushbutton SGT S G T 

Code A B C D E 

Function Code D 13 

Contact system Code B 

14 15 

Without 

interlock 1 

Pull 

to 2 

release 

Key-operated 

3 

Colour of pushbutton red yellow black 

Code C 1 2 3 


Code E 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 


Code E 10 11 12 14 15 

Coloured lens cover white yellow red green 

Code B 1 2 3 5 

Voltage 230 V~ 12 V~ 24 V~ 42 V~ 48 V~ 60 V~ 110 V~ 120 V~ 240 V~ 

Code C 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 

Voltage 10 – 33 V ~ = 40 – 70 V= 80 – 110 V= 20 – 30 V = SPS 

Code C 31 32 33 34 

Terminal 6 x 2 x 4 mm 2 Blanking element 6 terminals 2 x 4 mm 2 

only and blanking element 

Code B 10 61 

Power consumption 1 W 

Resistance Ω 1.000 2.200 4.700 10.000 

Code B 4 7 5 6 



Switch 




Measuring instrument AM 45 M 4 5 

Measuring instrument AM 72 M 7 2 

Code A B C 

Movement direct n/1 A 0 – 20 mA 4 – 20 mA 

Code B 1 2 5 6 

Movements 0 - 20 mA and 4 - 20 mA are only available with 0-100/120 % scale 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Code C Movement Scale 

02 Direct measuring 0 – 1 / 1.5 A 

03 0 – 2.5 / 3.75 A 

04 0 – 5 / 7.5 A 

05 0 – 10 / 15 A 

07 0 – 16 / 24 A 

02 C.T. connection n/1A 0 – 1 / 1.5 A 

03 0 – 2.5 / 3.75 A 

04 0 – 5 / 7.5 A 

05 0 – 10 / 15 A 

06 0 – 15 / 22.5 A 

08 0 – 20 / 30 A 

09 0 – 30 / 45 A 

10 0 – 40 / 60 A 

11 0 – 50 / 75 A 

12 0 – 60 / 90 A 

13 0 – 75 / 113.5 A 

14 0 – 100 / 150 A 

15 0 – 150 / 225 A 

16 0 – 200 / 300 A 

17 0 – 250 / 375 A 

18 0 – 300 / 450 A 

19 0 – 400 / 600 A 

20 0 – 500 / 750 A 

21 0 – 600 / 900 A 

22 0 – 100 / 150 % 

Switch SCT 

S C T 

Code A B C D 

Switch mechanism 

Code B 4 5 6 7 8 

Code C Inscription 

01 O I 

02 I II 

03 STOP START 

04 HAND AUTO 

05 SENKEN HEBEN 

06 REMOTE LOCAL 

07 I O II 


engaging 

spring return 

Code B Inscription 

08 AUS BETRIEB EIN 

09 AUS O EIN 

10 AUF O AB 

11 ENTRIEGELT O VERRIEGELT 

12 OUT OFF HAND 

13 LOCAL REMOTE AUTO 

14 STOP O START 

15 HAND O AUTO 

Code D: 1 2 3 4 5 7 


5

Ex 23 10 A 

Ex 29 16 A 




Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 


E x 2 3 

Ex 29 

E x 2 9 

Code A B C D E 

Code B Inscription Code B Inscription 

01 O I 

17 HAND AUS AUTO 

02 

03 

04 

05 

06 

07 

08 

09 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

16 

I II 

STOP START 

HAND AUTO 

SENKEN HEBEN 

REMOTE LOCAL 

I O 

AUS BETRIEB 

AUS O 

AUF O 

ENTRIEGELT O 

OUT OFF 

LOCAL REMOTE 

STOP O 

HAND O 

AUF AUS 

II 

EIN 

EIN 

AB 

VERRIEGELT 

HAND 

AUTO 

START 

AUTO 

ZU 

18 

19 

20 

21 

22 

23 

24 

25 

26 

27 

28 

29 

30 

31 

32 

O 

AUS 

AUS 

ÖRTLICH 

START 

OFF 

HAND 

O 

MAN 

START 

HEBEN 

OFF 

AUS 

HAND 

ON 

I II 

AUTO EIN 

HAND AUTO 

AUS FERN 

NORMAL STOP 

O ON 

OFF AUTO 

IN START 

AUTO 

STOP 

SENKEN 

ON 

EIN 

AUTO 

OFF 

Code C Contact system 

00 

01 

02 

03 

05 

07 

08 

Switch 

mechanism 

Code D 4 5 6 7 8 

Padlocking facility 

Code C Contact system 

Code E 0 1 2 3 

09 

10 

11 

12 

13 

14 

15 

engaging 

spring return 


1 

2 

3 

4 

Accessories for 

Ex-Control Stations and 

Units 

Accessories 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Item Description Quantity per pack Order No. 

1 Blank designation label, 

can be engraved 

10 GHG 410 1953 R0001 

2 Combination piece 1 GHG 410 1921 R0001 

3 Tool for tightening 1 GHG 410 1914 R0001 

lock nuts 

4 Blanking element 10 GHG 410 1920 R0001 

Mounting plates 

No. of Plates 

Type Application GHG 444 GHG 448 Order No. 

Size 3 for wall mounting 1 GHG 610 1953 R0018 

for trellis mounting 1 GHG 610 1953 R0018 

for pipe mounting 1 2 GHG 610 1953 R0010 




5

Ex-Control Switches and 

Ex-Control Switches with 

Measuring Instrument 

■ Decisive cost saving 

with the CEAG 





■ Cable connection 

range up to 6 mm 

■ 

■ 

2 

Integrated padlocking 

facility 

Forced guided contact 

on request 

Description 

The distinguishing characteristic of the new 

Ex 29-control switch series is the easyto-install 

and easy-to-connect design. 

This control switch can be used with as 

many as 6 contacts and for 2 to 5 switch 

positions. This means that almost all 

applications of modern control engineering 

can be covered. Contacts are protected 

against contact to VBG 4 and have a 

terminal cross section of up to 6 mm 2 for 

the connection of single and multi-wire 

conductors. The rated current of the 

control switch at 500 V is 16 A. The 

external contours of the enclosure allow 

easy access to the connection terminals 

and, as a result, problem-free installation. 

Further installation advantages result from 

the switch contact block and the 

measuring instrument that can be snapped 

in and out. 

A labyrinth seal in the cover guarantees the 

degree of protection IP 66. The impactresistant, 

glass-fibre reinforced polyester 

material used for the enclosure is a 

prerequisite for withstanding even the most 

extreme industrial operating conditions. 

The switch can be locked with a padlock 

using the integrated padlocking facility. 

The locking position is marked with a red 

pin. An interchangeable equipment 

designation label and a neutral switch 

position label are supplied with each 

switch. 

With the CEAG installation system the 

control switches can be installed in an 

economical way. 

If required, the control switches are also 

available with clip-in metal or moulded 

plastic flanges. 



● Australia 



● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


GHG 292 

Size 2 


Ex 29 Control and 

Selection Switch 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Control and selection switch Ex 29 


Type of protection EEx ed IIC T6 


Enclosure material Impact-resistant polyester, reinforced 




AC 15 DC 13 up to 60 V 2,0 A 

Switching capacity up to 230 V 6 A up to 110 V 0,6 A 

up to 400 V 4 A up to 230 V 0,5 A 

Connection terminals up to 1 x 6 mm2 or 2 x 2.5 mm2 Standard 1 x M25 for cable diameters 8-17 mm 

Cable entry gland plate in brass design for metal 

cable entries on request 

Weight 




Contact arrangement Code Order No. 




110 

X 96 

6062 GHG 292 1000 R0001 

6065 GHG 292 1000 R0002 

4067 GHG 292 1000 R0003 

8067 GHG 292 1000 R0004 

4037 GHG 292 2000 R0002 

8037 GHG 292 2000 R0003 

5024 GHG 292 2000 R0004 







X 150 

170 

129 


5


140 

X 123-126 

X 197 

225 


GHG 293 

Size 3 


156 

Ex 29 Control and 

Selection Switch with 

Measuring Instrument 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex 29 control and selection switch with measuring instrument for ct connection n/1A 








AC 15 DC 13 up to 60 V 2.0 A 

Switching capacity up to 230 V 6 A up to 110 V 0.6 A 

up to 400 V 4 A up to 230 V 0.5 A 

Connection terminals up to 1 x 6 mm2 or 2 x 2.5 mm2 Measuring range- see order details 

Type of current DC and AC 

Accuracy Class 2.5 

Measuring instrument Movement ct connection 

Scale standard 0 - 100 / 150% 


Terminals up to 2 x 4 mm2 Cable entry 

Standard 1 x M32 for cable diameters 12-21 mm 

gland plate in brass design for metal 

cable entries on request 

Weight 1.9 kg 

It is standard for control switches with measuring instruments for direct readings to be supplied with 2 looping 

terminals + PE, as well as additional M32 and M25 cable entries. 


Contact arrangement Code Order No. 

See page 5/89 for other designs 

Other contacts arrangements, cable entries and flanges on request. 


6062 GHG 293 1000 R0001 

6065 GHG 293 1000 R0002 

4067 GHG 293 1000 R0003 

8067 GHG 293 1000 R0004 

4037 GHG 293 2000 R0002 

8037 GHG 293 2000 R0003 

5024 GHG 293 2000 R0004 





Label holder with designation label (blank) Qty. per pack = 50 GHG 610 1953 R0012 



Measuring instruments 

Switch position ring 


Selection Codes for Switch 

Mechanism, Contact Arrangement 

and Measuring Instrument for 

Ex 29 Control and Selection Switch 

45O 45O 45O 45O 45O 45O 45O 45O 90O Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Order code GHG 29 • / • / • • • / • • / • • – • / • • • 

A Code Type 2 = without measuring instrument 

3 = with measuring instrument 

B Code Switch mechanism 

C Code Contact arrangement 

D Code Inscription label 

E Code Measuring instrument and scale 

F Code Terminals 0 = without looping terminals 

1 = with looping terminals 

G Code Cables / flanges as ordered 

B Code 4 

Switch 

5 6 7 8 9 

mechanism Special switch mechanism 

C Code 

contact arrangement 065 063 024 

contact arrangement 067 037 062 

D code Inscription labels 

01 0 I 

02 I II 

03 AUS EIN 

04 OFF ON 

05 STOP START 

06 HAND AUTO 



09 I 0 II 


11 AUF 0 AB 

12 AUS AUTO EIN 

13 OFF AUTO ON 

14 HAND 0 AUTO 

15 0 I II 


17 0 IN START 

18 STOP 0 START 

99 Text as ordered 

E Code Measuring instruments Measuring instruments 

direct reading ct connection n / 1A 

99 without measuring instrument 10 without measuring instrument 

01 0 - 1 / 1.5 A 11 0 - 2.5 / 3.75 A 

02 0 - 2.5 / 3.75 A 12 0 - 5 / 7.5 A 

03 0 - 5 / 7.5 A 13 0 - 10 / 15 A 

04 0 -10 / 15 A 14 0 - 15 / 22.5 A 

05 0 -16 / 24 A 15 0 - 25 / 37.5 A 

06 0 - 25 / 37.5 A 16 0 - 50 / 75 A 

07 0 - 20 / 24 mA (0-100/120%) 17 0 - 100 / 150 A 

08 4 - 20 / 24 mA (0-100/120%) 18 0 - 150 / 225 A 

19 0 - 200 / 300 A 

20 0 - 300 / 450 A 

21 0 - 400 / 600 A 

22 0 - 500 / 750 A 

23 0 - 600 / 900 A 

24 0 - 100 / 150 % 


5

Ex-Safety Switches 

■ Decisive cost saving with 

the CEAG installation 

system 




■ Isolating properties to 

DIN EN 60947-3 

■ Full AC 3 motor switching 

capacity to IEC 157 

■ Integrated padlocking 

facility 

■ EMERGENCY STOP mode 

to EN 60 204-1 available if 

required 

Description 

Safety switches are used for isolating 

the electrical power supply of electrical 

installations during maintenance, cleaning 

and repair work. 

The distinguishing characteristic of the new 

safety switches is the easy-to-install and 

easy-to-connect design. 

The safety switches feature an AC 3 motor 

switching capacity and isolating properties 

to DIN EN 60947-3. The customer can 

choose between the standard or 

EMERGENCY STOP versions with 

compulsory opening main current contacts 

to EN 60 024-1. The safety switches can 

be locked with 3 padlocks using the 

integrated padlocking facility. 

The external contours of the enclosure 

allow easy access to the connection 

terminals and, as a result, problem-free 

installation. 








control switches can be installed in an 

economical way. 

If required, the safety switches are also 

available with clip-in metal or moulded 

plastic flanges. 



● Australia 



● Hungary 

● Russia 

● Poland 


10 A 3-pole 

Ex-safety switch 

10 A 3-pole 

in EMERGENCY STOP mode 

Size 1 



10 A 3-Pole 


Ex-safety switch 10 A 3-pole 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 



Enclosure material Impact-resistant polyamide 




Aux. contact 

NO, making - lagging, 

breaking - leading 

Motor switching capacity AC 3 


230 V 10 A 

400 V 10 A 

500 V 10 A 

Short-circuit back-up fuse max. 20 A (400 V), max. 16 A (500 V) 

Cable entries 

M25 for cable Ø 8-17 mm 


Connection terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2 Weight 0.55 kg 


Type Cable entries Order No. 

Safety switch, 10 A 3-pole 2 x M25, 1 x M20 GHG 261 0005 R0009 

standard version 

Safety switch, 10 A 3-pole 2 x M20 GHG 261 0005 R0005 


Safety switch, 10 A 3-pole 2 x M25, 1 x M20 GHG 261 0005 R0010 









* EC-Type Examination Certificate acc. to directive 94/9/EC applied for 



102 

X 61.5 

84 

X 68.5 

Ø 8,5 

Ø 5,5 

112 

80 


5

3-pole 

6-pole 

20 A 3-pole 


20 A 6-pole 



20 A 3-Pole and 

20 A 6-Pole 


Ex-safety switch, 20 A 3-pole and 20 A 6-pole 








AC 3 motor switching capacity 

230 V 20 A 500 V 16 A 

400 V 20 A 690 V 10 A 

Short-circuit back-up fuse max. 35 A (400 V), 25 A (690 V) 

1 NO - making - lagging 

Aux. contact breaking - leading 

1 NO (only 6-pole) 

Connection terminals 2 x 4 mm2 Cable entries 

3-pole M32 for cable Ø 12-21 mm 


6-pole M20 for cable Ø 5-13 mm 

Weight 


approx. 1.48 kg (3-pole) 

approx. 2.43 kg (6-pole) 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 


Safety switch 20 A 3-pole 2 x M32, 1 x M25 GHG 262 2301 R0001 

standard version 2 x M20 GHG 262 2301 R0007 

Safety switch 20 A 3-pole 2 x M32, 1 x M25 

in EMERGENCY STOP mode GHG 262 2301 R0002 






Type Application 3-pole 6-pole Order No. 









GHG 610 1953 R0012 


170 

X 150 

110 

X 96 


3-pole 

140 

6-pole 

129 

X 123-126 

7 13 

225 

X 197 


7 

8 

156

3-pole 

40 A 3-pole 


40 A 3-pole 



40 A 3-Pole 


Ex-safety switch 40 A 3-pole 








AC 3 motor switching capacity 

230 V 40 A 500 V 40 A 

400 V 40 A 690 V 32 A 


Aux. contact 

1 NO - making - lagging 


Connection terminals 2 x 16 mm2 Connection terminals aux. contacts 2 x 4 mm2 Cable entries 

M40 for cables Ø 16-28 mm 

M25 for cables Ø 8-17 mm 

Weight 




Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 














X 123-126 


225 

X 197 

7 

156 


5

6-pole 

40 A 6-pole Ex-safety switch 

40 A 6-pole 



40 A 6-Pole 


Ex-safety switch, 40 A 6-pole 


Certificate of Conformity* PTB-No. Ex-93.C.1029 


Degree of protection IP 65 up to EN 60529 



Aux. contact 




230 V 40 A 

Switch ratings 400 V 40 A 

500 V 40 A 

690 V 32 A 


Cable entries 



Connection terminals 2 x 16 mm2 Connection terminals aux. contacts 2 x 4 mm2 Weight approx. 6.5 kg 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Type 

Safety switch, 40 A 6-pole 

Cable entries Order No. 

standard version 4 x M40, 1 x M25 GHG 263 0050 R0001 

4 x M25 GHG 263 0050 R0006 



4 x M40, 1 x M25 GHG 263 0050 R0002 


Type Application No. of Plates Order No. 



*EC-Type Examination Certification acc. to directive 94/9/EC applied for 



271 

X 247 

271 

X 247 

Ø 12 

Ø 7 

6-pole 

275 

11 211 


3-pole 

6-pole 


80 A 3-pole 


80 A 6-pole safety switch 

80 A 6-pole 



80 A 3-Pole and 6-Pole 


Ex-safety switch, 80 A 3-pole and 6-pole 




Impact-resistant polyester, 

reinforced with glass fibre 

Degree of protection IP 65 ot EN 60529 



Aux. contact 




230 V 80 A 

Switch ratings 400 V 80 A 

500 V 80 A 

690 V 80 A 


2 x M50 for cable Ø 21-35 mm 

Cable entries 1 x M25 for cable Ø 8-17 mm 

M32 for cable Ø 12-21mm 

Connection terminals 2 x 25 mm2 Connection terminals aux. contacts 2 x 4 mm2 Weight 

3-pole approx. 6.5 kg 

6-pole approx. 9 kg 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Type 


Cable entries Order No. 



2 x M32 GHG 264 0020 R0006 



2 x M50, 1 x M25 GHG 264 0020 R0002 



4 x M50, 1 x M25 GHG 264 0021 R0001 

in EMERGENCY STOP mode 4 x M50, 1 x M25 GHG 264 0021 R0002 


Type Application No. of Plates Order No. 



* EC-Type Examination Certification acc. to directive 94/9/EC applied for 


X 247 

271 

271 

X 247 


Ø 12 

Ø 7 

275 

11 211 

X 247 

271 

271 

X 247 

Ø 12 

Ø 7 

3-pole 6-pole 

295 

11 211 


5


125 A 3-pole 



180 A 3-pole 



125 A 3-Pole and 

180 A 3-Pole 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Ex-safety switch, 3-pole, 125 A / 180 A 





Impact-resistant polyester, 

reinforced 

Degree of protection IP 65 up to EN 60529 


Rated current 125 A / 180 A 

Aux. contact 

NO, making - lagging 



125 A 180 A 


230 V 125 A 

400 V 125 A 

230 V 180 A 

400 V 180 A 

500 V 125 A 500 V 150 A 

690 V 110 A 690 V 125 A 

125 A 180 A 

Short-circuit back-up fuse max. 200 A (400 V) max. 250 A (400 V) 

max. 160 A (690 V) max. 200 A (690 V) 

125 A 180 A 

Cable entries 

M63, 27 - 48 mm 

M40, 16 - 28 mm 

M63, 27 - 48 mm 

M40, 16 - 28 mm 

M25, 8 - 17 mm M25, 8 - 17 mm 


125 A 

1 x 50 / 70 mm 

180 A 

2 1 x 120 mm2 Connection terminals aux. contacts 2 x 4 mm2 Weight 

125 A 

approx. 16 kg 

180 A 







2 x M40 GHG 265 0010 R0005 



2 x M63, 1 x M25 GHG 265 0010 R0002 



2 x M63, 1 x M25 GHG 266 0006 R0001 

in EMERGENCY STOP mode 2 x M63, 1 x M25 GHG 266 0006 R0002 




544 

X 520 

271 275 

X 247 

211 

11 

Ø 12 

Ø 7 


20 A / 40 A / 80 A 

20 A Ex-safety switches 

40 A and 80 A Ex-safety switch 

Ex-Bereich 

Ex Area 

Sicherheitsschalter 

Safety Switch 

ON position OFF position 


for Variable Speed, 

Three-Phase Drives 


Ex-safety switches for variable speed, three-phase drives, 20 A / 40 A / 80 A 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 


20 A: PTB-No. Ex-88.B.1048 

Certificate of Conformity* 40 A: PTB-No. Ex-93.C.1029 

80 A: PTB-No. Ex-85.B.1056 


Impact-resistant moulded plastic, 

reinforced 




20 A 40 A 80 A 


230 V 

400 V 

20 A 

20 A 

40 A 

40 A 

80 A 

80 A 

500 V 16 A 40 A 80 A 

690 V 10 A 32 A 80 A 

Aux. contact 

NO: making - lagging, 


20 A: 2 x M32 (from Ø 12 to 21 mm) 

2 x M25 (from Ø 8 to 17 mm) 

Cable entries 

40 A: 2 x M40 (from Ø 16 to 28 mm) 

2 x M25 (from Ø 8 to 17 mm) 

80 A: 2 x M50 (from Ø 21 to 35 mm) 

2 x M25 (from Ø 8 to 17 mm) 


Type Short circuit Terminals Weight Order No. 

back-up fuse 

Safety switch, 20 A max. 50 A 2 x 4 mm 2 1.6 kg GHG 262 0014 R0001 












X = fixing dimensions 20 A 40 A + 80 A 

200 = 40 A 

275 = 80 A 


5

Ex-Power Circuit Breakers 

and Manual Motor Starters 

GHG 635/25 A 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

Decisive cost saving 

with the CEAG 





Isolating properties to 

DIN EN 60947-3 

Full AC 3 motor 

switching capacity 

Clear indication of 

switch position 

Phase failure protection 

Integrated padlocking 

facility 

Description 

Manual motor starters are mostly used for 

protecting explosion-protected motors of 

all protection categories against overload 

and phase failure. The CEAG circuit breaker 

and manual motor starter feature both 

phase failure protection and thermal and 

electromagnetic trips. The respective 

switch position is clearly indicated by 

the switch handle. 

The distinguishing characteristics of the 

manual motor starter are the AC 3 motor 

switching capacity and the isolating 

properties to IEC 157. Compulsory 

opening of the main current contacts and 

a padlocking facility with 3 padlocks are a 

matter of course. 

Terminals to VBG 4 are protected against 

accidental contact. They have a terminal 

cross section of up to 10 mm 2 for the 

connection of single or multi-wire 

conductors. 

The external contours of the enclosure 

allow easy access to the connection 

terminals and, as a result, problem-free 

installation. 








circuit breakers and manual motor starters 

can be mounted on pipes in an economical 

way. 

If required, the circuit breakers and manual 

motor starters are also available with clipin 

metal or moulded plastic flanges. 




● Russia 

● Poland 


Motor starter unit 

GHG 635 

Ex-Power Circuit Breakers 

and Manual Motor Starters 

GHG 635/25 A 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

GHG 635/25 A 


Type of protection EEx ed IIC T5 - T6 


Enclosure material Impact-resistant polyester reinforced 


Rated voltage up to 690 V AC 

Rated current up to 25 A 

Rated current, aux. contact 2 A 

AC 3 motor switching capacity up to 690 V/25 A 

Short-circuit See table below 

Undervoltage trip 

Tripping at 15 %-75 % UC 

Switching-on poss. at U > 80% UC 

Connection terminals up to 10 mm2 Connection terminals, aux. contact 2 x 2.5 mm2 Cable entries 

0.1 - 6.3 A 2 x M 25 for cable Ø 8 - 17 mm 

6.3 - 25 A 2 x M 32 for cable Ø 12 - 21 mm 



Short-circuit protection up to 100 kA and max. back-up 

Setting range 230 V AC 400 V AC 500 V AC 690 V AC Temp. 

Ics gl, aM Ics gl, aM Ics gl, aM Ics gl, aM class 

kA A kA A kA A kA A 

0.1 A ... 0.16 A T6 

1.0 A ... 1.6 A T6 

1.6 A ... 2.5 A short-circuit proof, 40 25 T6 

2.5 A ... 4.0 A no back-up fuse 40 35/40 10 40 T6 

4.0 A ... 6.3 A required 30 50 3 40 T6 

6.3 A ... 9.0 A 30 80 3 50 T6 

9.0 A ... 12.5 A 50 80 20 80 3 50 T6 

12.5 A ... 16.0 A 50 100 20 100 3 50 T5 

16.0 A ... 20.0 A 50 100 20 100 2 50 T5 

20.0 A ... 25.0 A 50 125 50 125 20 125 2 50 T5 

Connection diagram 


5

GHG 635 

Ex-Circuit Breakers and Manual 

Motor Starters GHG 635/25 A 

Ordering details for standard versions 

225 

X 197 

140 

X 123-126 

7 

8 

156 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Setting range of rated current Order No. 

0.1 A - 0.16 A GHG 635 1101 R0101 

0.16 A - 0.25 A GHG 635 1101 R0102 

0.25 A - 0.40 A GHG 635 1101 R0103 

0.40 A - 0.63 A GHG 635 1101 R0104 

0.63 A - 1.0 A GHG 635 1101 R0105 

1.0 A - 1.6 A GHG 635 1101 R0106 

1.6 A - 2.5 A GHG 635 1101 R0107 

2.5 A - 4.0 A GHG 635 1101 R0108 

4.0 A - 6.3 A GHG 635 1101 R0109 

6.3 A - 9.0 A GHG 635 1101 R0110 

9.0 A - 12.5 A GHG 635 1101 R0111 

12.5 A - 16 A GHG 635 1101 R0112 

16 A - 20 A GHG 635 1101 R0113 

20 A - 25 A GHG 635 1101 R0114 

Selection code for special versions 

1 = Standard versions 

0 = Without undervoltage trip 

1 = Undervoltage tripping voltage 230 V 

2 = Undervoltage tripping voltage 400 V 

1 = Without aux. contact 

2 = With aux. contact 1 NO + 1 NC 











Ex-Control Units 

Program for 

Panel Mounting 

■ Standard dimension of the front 

actuator elements Ø 30.5 mm 

■ Snap-on coloured lens cover 

■ Bayonet catch for front actuator 

and built-in component 

■ Full certification of the 

built-in components 

Description 

Due to the fact that the front actuator 

elements for built-in apparatus for panel 

mounting have a standard diameter of 30.5 

mm, they can be used for all purposes. 

They can be fitted in switch panels with a 

wall thickness of up to 5 mm by means of 

a lock nut. 

Within a matter of seconds, lamps, 

pushbuttons, potentiometers and switch 

components can be connected to the 

pre-mounted front actuator element by 

means of a bayonet catch using one hand 

only. 

All built-in apparatus for panel mounting 

can be fitted with a slip-on protective cap 

with strain relief. When a protective cap 

is used, built-in apparatus for which a 

Component Certificate has been issued 

then has Certificate of Conformity 

approval. 

In addition to this, measuring instruments 

for direct or indirect measurement are 

available for various current ranges. 

Interchangeable scales can be fitted to 

measuring instruments that feature an 

instrument transformer connection, thus 

allowing easy adaptation of the scale 

range to suit other current ranges. 



● Australia 


● Hungary 

● Russia 


5

65 

40 

Pushbutton 


30,3 +0,2 

Minimum distances 

3,1 +0,1 

31,5 +0,2 

Pushbuttons 

for Panel Mounting 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Pushbutton 

Marking to 94/9/EC II 2 G ( II 2 D*) 

Type of protection EEx de IIC (T6) 

Open design: PTB 97 ATEX 1081U 

EC-Type Examination Certificate Compl. with cap: PTB 99 ATEX 1034 

(see accessories, page 5/107, for cap) 



Switching capacity to AC 11 250 V 6.0 A 400 V 4.0 A 

Switching capacity to DC 11 (L/R 100 ms) 

24 V 6.0 A 

110 V 0.5 A 

60 V 

220 V 

0.8 A 

0.2 A 

Connection terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2 Weight 




Pushbutton 

Type Contact system Labels Order No. 

Open design 1 NO + 1 NC 0; I; START; STOP GHG 418 8115 R0001 

Other designs GHG 418 811 R00 

A Code for contact system –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 

B Code for designation labels ––– –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– –––––––––– 



Open design 1 NO + 1 NC 0; I; START; STOP GHG 418 8145 R0001 

Other designs GHG 418 814 R 

A Code for contact system –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 

B Code for designation labels bottom ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 

top –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 

Contact systems 

A Code 3 4 5 

Designation labels, white 

Inscription LANGSAM SCHNELL ARRET MARCHE 

B Code 05 09 10 12 14 15 


68 

14 

5 

77 

57 

38 

Double pushbutton without proctective cap Pushbutton with protective cap 

Ø 38 

140 

126 


57 

10

65 

Mushroom-head push-buttom 

40 

30,3 +0,2 

Minimum distance 

3,1 +0,1 

31,5 +0,2 

Mushroom-Head 

Pushbuttons for 

Panel Mounting 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 






(see accessories, page 5/107 for cap) 



Switching capacity to AC11 250 V 6.0 A 400 V 4.0 A 

Switching capacity to DC11 (L/R 100 ms) 

24 V 6.0 A 

110 V 0.5 A 

60 V 

220 V 

0.8 A 

0.2 A 






Open design 1 NO + 1 NC NOT-AUS and GHG 418 8155 R1200 

without lock EMERGENCY-STOP 

Open design 1 NO + 1 NC NOT-AUS and GHG 418 8155 R1300 

with lock, CEAG 

cylinder lock with 2 keys 

EMERGENCY-STOP 

Other designs GHG 418 815 R 

A Code for contact system ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 

B Code for colour of pushbutton –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 

C Code for function ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 

D Code for designation labels ––– –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 

Contact systems Code A 

Function 

Without 

Code C 3 4 5 

interlock 

Pull to 

1 

release 2 

Key 

operated 3 

Colour of pushbutton red yellow black 

Code B 1 2 3 

Designation labels, white 

Inscription LANGSAM SCHNELL ARRET MARCHE 

D Code 05 09 10 12 14 15 


56 

57 

5 38 

77 

without protective cap 

30 

126 

with protective cap 

10 

57 


5

65 


40 

30,3 +0,2 


3,1 +0,1 

31,5 +0,2 

Key-Operated Pushbuttons 



Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 









Switching capacity to AC11 250 V 6.0 A 400 V 4.0 A 

Switching capacity to DC11 (L/R 100 ms) 

24 V 6.0 A 

110 V 0.5 A 

60 V 

220 V 

0.8 A 

0.2 A 





Type 

Open design, lock can be locked 

in both positions and key removed 

CEAG cylinder lock 

Contact system Order No. 

with 2 keys 1 NO + 1 NC GHG 418 8125 R0001 

Other designs GHG 418 812 R00 

A Code for contact system ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 

B Code for function ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 


A Code 3 4 5 

Function 

Pushbutton 

not depressed 

Pushbutton 

depressed 


56 

5 

Lockable yes yes yes yes no no 

Key removable yes yes yes no no yes 

Lockable yes yes no yes yes autom. 

Key removable yes no no yes yes yes 

B Code 10 11 12 13 14 15 

77 

57 


38 

126 



57 

10


27 

24 

5 

65 

40 

Control Switch 

77 

126 

57 



30,3 +0,2 


3,1 +0,1 

57 

10 

38 

31,5 +0,2 

Control Switches 




Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Control switches 





(see accesories, page 5/107, for cap) 



Switching capacity to AC 11 250 V 6.0 A 400 V 4.0 A 

Switching capacity to DC 11 (L/R 100ms) 

250 V 6.0 A 

110 V 0.5 A 

60 V 0.8 A 

220 V 0.2 A 





Contact system control switch Inscription Order No. 

I II GHG 418 8190 R6002 

0 I GHG 418 8190 R6201 

I II GHG 418 8190 R6102 

I 0 II GHG 418 8190 R5307 

I 0 II GHG 418 8190 R5507 

0 I GHG 418 8190 R8701 

Other designs 

A Code for switch mechanism 

B Code for contact system 

GHG 418 8190 R 

C Code for inscription 

engaging 

Switch mechanism 

spring return 

A Code 4 5 6 7 8 

Code B: 1 2 3 4 5 7 

C code Inscription 

01 0 I 

02 I II 

03 STOP START 

04 HAND AUTO 



07 I 0 II 

C code Inscription 


09 AUS 0 EIN 

10 AUF 0 AB 

11 ENTRIEGELT 0 VERRIEGELT 

12 OUT OFF HAND 


14 STOP 0 START 

15 HAND 0 AUTO 


5

65 

Long-life signal lamp 

40 

30,3 +0,2 

3,1 +0,1 


31,5 +0,2 

Long-Life Signal Lamps 



Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Long-life signal lamps 







12 – 240 V AC 

12 – 110 V DC 

Frequency 50–60 Hz 

Power consumption < 1.2 W 


Service life 100 000 hours 

Connection terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2 Weight approx. 0.2 kg 



Rated voltage Rated current mA Order No. 

42 V~ 30 GHG 418 8170 R0004 

60 V~ 25 GHG 418 8170 R0006 

110 V~ 13 GHG 418 8170 R0007 

230 V~ 6 GHG 418 8170 R0001 

240 V~ 6 GHG 418 8170 R0009 

12 – 33 V ˜= AC 75 – 90 / DC 35 – 70 GHG 418 8170 R0031 

40 – 70 V= 30 GHG 418 8170 R0032 

80 – 110 V= 1) 25 GHG 418 8170 R0033 

12 – 30 V= SPS 35 – 70 GHG 418 8170 R0035 

Incl. lens covers in yellow, red, green and white 

1) Type 80 - 110 V DC temperature class T4 


17,5 

5 

77 

57 


38 

126 



57 

10

65 

40 

Potentiometer 

30,3 +0,2 


3,1 +0,1 

31,5 +0,2 

Potentiometers 



Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Potentiometers 





Compl. with cap: PTB 99 ATEX 1034 

Angle of rotation 270° 

Rated voltage/Power consumption up to 250 V~ / 1 W 

0-100 % 

Scale 

Connection terminals 2 x 2.5 mm2 1 

2 




Resistance 

Ω 

Power input Order No. 

1000 1 W GHG 418 8131 R0014 

4700 1 W GHG 418 8131 R0015 

10000 1 W GHG 418 8131 R0016 

Accessories 


Protective cap with strain relief and seal (5 pieces), 

incl. dismantling tool (1 piece) 

GHG 410 1939 R0002 

The protective caps are required for the full certification of panel-mounting components 

which normally are only certified with U-Certificates 

( ) Values in brackets only for complete units 


24 

57 

5 38 

77 


126 


57 

10 


5


Measuring instrument socket 


Measuring Instruments 



Measuring instruments for panel mounting 




Measuring range See ordering details 

Type of current DC and AC 

Movement Moving iron 


Operating position Vertical 


Zero adjustment Adjustment screw on instrument 

Rated current marking Red indicator 

Connection terminals 2 x 4 mm2 Cable entries 1 x M25 for cables Ø 8 - 17 mm 

*EC-Type Examination Certificate applied for directive 94/9/EC * II 2 D applied for 


Movement Scale Weight Order No. 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

n / 1A 0 - 100 / 150 % 0.8 kg GHG 412 8282 R0031 

0 - 20 mA (Ri = 320 Ohm) 0 - 100 / 120 % 0.8 kg GHG 412 8285 R0033 

4 - 20 mA (Ri = 320 Ohm) 0 - 100 / 120 % 0.8 kg GHG 412 8286 R0035 

Other designs 

Code for movement: 

0.8 kg GHG 412 828 R00 

1 = direct measurement 2 = instrument transformer connection, n / 1A 

Code for interchangeable scales: 

Direct measurement Interchangeable 

Code Scale Code Scale Code Scale Code Scale 

02 0 - 1 / 1.5 A 02 0 - 1 / 1.5 A 09 0 - 30 / 45 A 16 0 - 200 / 300 A 

03 0 - 2.5 / 3.75 A 03 0 - 2.5 / 3.75 A 10 0 - 40 / 60 A 17 0 - 250 / 375 A 

04 0 - 5 / 7.5 A 04 0 - 5 / 7.5 A 11 0 - 50 / 75 A 18 0 - 300 / 450 A 

05 0 - 10 / 15 A 05 0 - 10 / 15 A 12 0 - 60 / 90 A 19 0 - 400 / 600 A 

07 0 - 16 / 24 A 06 0 - 15 / 22.5 A 13 0 - 75 / 112.5 A 20 0 - 500 / 750 A 

08 0 - 20 / 30 A 08 0 - 20 / 30 A 14 0 - 100 / 150 A 21 0 - 600 / 900 A 

15 0 - 150 / 225 A 

Accessories 

Interchangeable scales Quantity per pack Weight Order No. 

for AM 72 n/1A 10 pieces 0.1 kg GHG 410 1928 R00 

Code Scale Code Scale Code Scale 

01 0 - 1 / 1.5 A 08 0 - 40 / 60 A 15 0 - 250 / 375 A 

02 0 - 2.5 /3.75 A 09 0 - 50 / 75 A 16 0 - 300 / 450 A 

03 0 - 5 / 7.5 A 10 0 - 60 / 90 A 17 0 - 400 / 600 A 

04 0 - 10 / 15 A 11 0 - 75 / 112.5 A 18 0 - 500 / 750 A 

05 0 - 15 / 22.5 A 12 0 - 100 / 150 A 19 0 - 600 / 900 A 

06 0 - 20 / 30 A 13 0 - 150 / 225 A 

07 0 - 30 / 45 A 14 0 - 200 / 300 A 


160 

173 

95 

73 

147 

22 

62 

26 

73 


148 

86 

Necessary cutout

0 


Switchgear and 

Distributions in Plastic 

and Metal Enclosures 


6

Moulded Plastic 

Ex-Distributions in 

Modular Design 

■ Assembled using modular 

design technique 

■ Simple actuation of 

protective modules via 

lockable flaps 

■ Easy replacement of 

clip-on components 


■ Screwless connection 

method allows easy 

extension of boards at 

any time 

Description 

Ex-d moulded plastic distribution boards 

are mainly used for the protection of 

lighting, heating, motor and socket circuits 

in potentially hazardous areas. 

These distribution boards consist of 

flameproof encapsulated components 

and impact resistant enclosures made of 

polyester in the type of protection 

“Increased Safety”. 

The flameproof encapsulated components, 

such as MCBs, fuses etc., provide thermal 

and magnetic protection and can be 

snapped individually onto DIN rails. 

The system comprises three polyester 

enclosures in modular design that can 

easily be combined to form larger 

distributions using screwless coupling 

elements. The enclosures are flameretardant 

acc. to UL 94 VO. 

Clip-in gland plates made of polyester or 

brass allow enclosures and cable entries 

to be added as required. 

The distribution board system includes: 

• main switches up to 180 A 

• NH fuses up to 125 A 

• MCBs and RCDs up to 40 A 

• contactors up to 11 KW 

• over-current protection components 

up to 25 A, various relays and timers, 

that make it possible to fulfil all customer 

specifications. 

The use of lockable flaps allows the easy 

actuation of the protective modules during 

operation without having to open the 

enclosure. 

Fuse and MCB distributions provide 

economical solutions and, at the same 

time, they fulfil all the requirements 

imposed by the chemical, petro-chemical 

and off-shore industries. 





The enclosures are mounted on standardized 

wall-mounting or free-standing frameworks and 

can be combined to form large distributions. 

The frameworks have uniform fixing dimensions 

to match those of the enclosures and can be 

extended as required. 

If the distributions are installed in the open, 

it is advisable to use canopies for sun or rain 

protection. 

Small distributions are mounted on flat- or 

U-rails. 

The frameworks are all made of galvanized 

steel. 


6




Combined with a screwless, clip-in mounting 

technique, the modular design principle provides 

an economical and clearly arranged method 

for assembling distribution boards. 

The enclosures and the main switch modules 

have uniform fixing dimensions and are joined 

together via flange openings in the enclosures. 

With this screwless, clip-in system, both brass 

or moulded plastic gland plates can be fitted to 

the enclosures. 

This clip-in gland plate technique not only 

makes it possible for the user to fit cable entries 

to the gland plates in a quick and simple way, 

but it also provides him with an economical way 

to carry out any modifications or extensions. 

The use of a bus bar system allows the quick 

and economical connection of the various 

circuits. 





Clip-fit built-in components can be mounted in 

position quickly and safely, thus allowing the 

customer to exchange components in a rational 

way. 

Similarly, with this clip-in technique, expanding 

the circuitry does not pose any problems. 

MCBs and RCDs can be actuated via flaps in 

the enclosure cover without opening the 

enclosure. 

The switch position of the protective modules 

can be seen easily from the outside through a 

large window. 

If required, the flaps can be locked using 

standard locking facilities. As many as 6 size 1, 

built-in components can be installed under one 

flap. 


6

Standard Moulded Plastic 

Ex-d MCB Distributions 


See pages 6/21 - 6/26 for technical data. 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Complete MCB distributions 


Type of protection EEx ed IIC T4 / T6 dep. on built-in apparatus 


Degree of protection IP 66 to IEC 529 

Rated voltage 690 V AC 


Terminal cross section up to 240 mm 2 


Ordering details: MCB distributions for lighting circuits 

Type Main MCB, 2-pole Cable entry Order No. 

switch C-charac- 

4-pole teristic 

1 1 x 40 A 8 x 16 A 1 x M40; 8 x M25 EXKO 214 600 G0000 



The fuse and mcb distributions are completely wired, ready for connection to terminals by the 

customer. See below for circuit diagram. 


Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 


zu 

F6 

bis 

F... 



Ex-d Distributions for 

Heating Circuits 


See pages 6/21 - 6/26 for technical data. 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Complete for heating circuits distributions 








Enclosure material Polyester, reinforced with glass fibre (GRP) 

Ordering details: MCB distributions for heating circuits 

Type Main MCB with Cable entry Order No. 

switch 

4-pole 

RCD 

1 1 x 40 A 8 x C 16 A 1 x M40; 8 x M25 EXKO 214 600 G 0003 



The distributions for heating circuits are completely wired, ready for connection to terminals by the 



Type 1 


Type 2 Type 3 

zu 

F4 bis 

F.. 


6

1st mounting space, 

height 190 mm 

2rd mounting space, 

height 190 mm 


height 190 mm 

Size 4 enclosure module 

with 3 mounting spaces 

Individual MCB 

and Trace Heating Distributions 

in Modular Design 

Examples of possible built-in components 

in enclosures 2, 3 and 4, also with built-in 

components under the actuating flap 

(available mounting width = 213 mm) 

2 x Size 4 component 

Width of encl. = 106 mm 

40 A main switch, 4-pole 

1 mounting space 



NH 00 fuse 




6 x Size 1/0 component 






Selection criteria for the planning of small distribution boards 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

10 kA MCB, C-characteristic, max. 440 V AC 

1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole 

Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 

Code SIA 001 SIA 002 SIA 003 SIA 004 SIA 

Please state rated current on ordering: 0.5 A to 40 A 

If other characteristics are required, please state on ordering ("K", "B") 

Optional: with auxiliary contact SAH 001 

with signal contact (In the case of MCBs with signal contacts, SAS 001 

the next largest component size is used) 

RCD with 10 kA MCB, C-characteristic, 30 mA, max. 440 V AC 

1-pole + N 2-pole 

Size 2 Size 4 

Code FSS 002 FSS 004 FSS 

Please state rated current on ordering: 6.0 A to 40 A 

If other characteristics are required, please state on ordering: ("K", "B") 

Optional: 300 mA FSO 300 

with auxiliary contact FSH 001 

with signal contact in Size 4 component FSS 001 

RCD, 30 mA, max. 440 V AC 

2-pole 4-pole 

Size 2 Size 4 

Code FES 002 FES 004 FES 

Please state rated current on ordering: 25 A to 63 A 

Optional: 300 mA with auxiliary contact FEO 300 

FEH 001 

40 A main switch, 4-pole, 690 V AC 

Space requirement 


Code HSC 040 HSC 040 

Main switch 80 A, 125 A and 180 A see page 6/22 

NH-00 main fuse, 3-pole, up to 125 A, 690 V AC 

Space requirement 


Code NH0 001 NH0 001 

Please state the rated current of fuse inserts on ordering. 

Enclosure modules, size 2, 3 and 4 

Dimension drawing see page 6/17 

Order Code 

Module 2 Module 3 Module 4 

1 mounting space 2 mounting spaces 3 mounting spaces 

Code GEH 002 GEH 003 GEH 004 GEH 


6


Ex-d Motor Starters 


Direct circuit Reversing circuit 

See pages 6/21-6/26 for technical data 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Complete motor starters distributions 









Ordering details: direct on-line starters 

Type Motorcapacity 

to AC 3 

Cable entry Order No. 

1 4 kW 3 x M25 EXKO 208 900 A0001 

2 5.5 kW 3 x M25 EXKO 208 900 A0002 

2 7.5 kW 3 x M25 EXKO 208 900 A0003 

Ordering details: reversing starters 


to AC 3 


2 4 kW 3 x M25 EXKO 208 900 B0001 

2 5.5 kW 3 x M25 EXKO 208 900 B0002 

2 7.5 kW 3 x M25 EXKO 208 900 B0003 



Type 1 

Type 2 



Ex-d Motor Starters 


544 

544 

X 520 

271 

271 

X 247 

817 

817 

X 793 

X 273 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 










Ordering details: star-delta starters 


to AC 3 


2 4 kW 4 x M25 EXKO 208 900 C0001 

2 5.5 kW 4 x M25 EXKO 208 900 C0002 

2 7.5 kW 4 x M25 EXKO 208 900 C0003 

3 11 kW 1 x M32 + 3 x M25 EXKO 208 900 C0004 

The distributions for motor starters are completely wired, ready for connection to terminals by the 




Star-delta circuit 

See pages 6/21-6/26 for technical data 

Type 2 

271 

271 

X 247 

Type 3 


6


height 190 mm 


height 190 mm 


height 190 mm 



Individual Motor 

Starter Distributions 


Examples of possible built-in 

components in enclosures 2, 3 and 4. 


max. 12 controland 

indicator units 


Individual Motor 

Starter Distributions 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Selection criteria for the planning of small distribution boards Order Code 

16 A air-break contactor, 4 kW for 400 V AC 3, 3 NO contacts State coil voltage on ordering LUS 001 

Size 3 Optional: Aux. contact, 1 NC + 1 NO LHK 001 

Aux. contact, 2 NO LHK 002 

20 A installation contactor, 1,3 kW for 230 V AC 3, 1NO + 1NC State coil voltage on ordering IS1 001 

Size 0 Optional: Contact 2 NO IS1 002 

Contact 2 NC IS1 003 

24 A installation contactor, 4 kW for 400 V AC 3, 4 NO contacts State coil voltage on ordering IS2 001 

Size 3 Optional: Contact 2 NO + 2 NC IS2 002 

Contact 3 NO + 1 NC IS2 003 


40/63 A installation contactor, 400 V AC 3, 4 NO contacts State coil voltage on ordering 

Size 4 40 A 11 kW S4 001 

63 A 15 kW IS4 002 

25 A manual motor starter, 22 kW for 690 V AC 3, 3NO State rated current of motor on ordering. 

Setting range from 0.1 A to 25 A Optional: Under-volt. trip 230 VAC MUS 230 

Under-volt. trip 400 VAC MUS 400 

Aux. contact 1 NO + 1 NC MHK 001 

Size 4 

3 A thermal over-current trip, 690 V AC, 1NO + 1NC State rated current of on ordering. TSA 003 

Tripping range from 0.1 A to 11.5 A 

Size 3 

10 A star-delta time relay, 690 V AC, 1NO + 1NC State coil voltage SDZ 001 

Time range from 1.5 sec. to 30 sec. 

State range on ordering 

Size 1 

Details of other control components and Ex-e transformers up to 1200 VA are available on request. 

Control and indicating units Signal lamps 

Pushbuttons Double pushbuttons white SIL 001 

1 NO + 1 NC DTT 001 1 NO + 1 NC DDT 001 red SIL 002 

2 NO DTT 002 2 NO DDT 002 green SIL 003 

2 NC DTT 003 2 NC DDT 003 yellow SIL 004 

EMERG-STOP mushroom- 

Key-operated pushbuttons Control switches head pushbuttons 

1 NO + 1 NC SLT 001 Please state switch 1 NO + 1 NC SGT 001 

2 NO SLT 002 arrangement and 2 NO SGT 002 

2 NC SLT 003 inscription on ordering 2 NC SGT 003 

See page 6/17 for enclosures 

See pages 6/21-6/26 for technical data. 


6

Enclosure 

Size 1 

Terminals 

Flange socket 

Explosion-Protected Moulded Plastics 

Small Distribution Boards in 



in small enclosures with modules 

of size 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4 

14 14 

12,5 12,5 

I 

0 

A 16 A 16 

Cable entry 

1 x Size 4 

1 x Size 3 

2 x Size 2 

3 x Size 0/1 

Example of small distribution board 

OFF OFF 

O 

OFF OFF 

O 


Z 

Closed 

Actuating flap 

(small size) 

Auf 

Open

Dimension drawing see page 6/17 

Explosion-Protected Moulded Plastics 

Small Distribution Boards in 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Selection criteria for the planning of small distribution boards Order Code 

10 kA MCB, C-characteristic, max. 440 V AC 

1-pole 2-pole 3-pole 4-pole 

Size 1 Size 2 Size 3 Size 4 

SIA 001 SIA 002 SIA 003 SIA 004 Code SIA 

RCD with 10 kA MCB, C-characteristic, 30 mA, max. 440 V AC 

1-pole + N 2-pole 

Size 2 Size 4 

FSS 002 FSS 004 Code FSS 

RCD, 30 mA, max. 440 V AC 

2-pole 4-pole 

Size 2 Size 4 

FES 002 FES 004 Code FES 

16 A air-break contactor, 4 kW for 400 V AC 3, 3 NO contacts State coil voltage on ordering LUS 001 

Size 3 Optional: Aux. contact 1 NC + 1 NO LHK 001 

Aux. contact, 2 NO LHK 002 

24 A installation contactor, 4 kW for 400 V AC 3, 4 contacts State coil voltage on ordering IS2 001 

Size 3 Optional: Contact 2 NO + 2 NC IS2 002 

Contact 3 NO + 1 NC IS2 003 


40/63 A installation contactor, 400 V AC 3, 4 contacts State coil voltage on ordering 

Size 4 40 A 11 kW S4 001 

63 A 15 kW IS4 002 

25 A manual motor starter, 22 kW for 690 V AC 3, 3 contacts State rated current of motor on ordering 

Setting range from 0.1 A to 25 A Optional: Under-volt. trip 230 VAC MUS 230 

Under-volt. trip 400 VAC MUS 400 

Aux. contact 1 NO + 1 NC MHK 001 

Size 4 

Empty enclosures 

Variants: on 

– Actuating flap with large window request 

– Terminals up to 10 x 2.5 mm 2 

– Flange with cable entries up to M63 

– Flange socket see page 5/9-5/13 

Further configurations on request 


6

Main switch 

Bus bar systems 

Actuating flap (lage size) 

Clip-fit coupling pieces 

Cable entries 

Supplement Sheet to Individual 

Moulded Plastic Distributions in 


■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

■ 

80 A, 125 A and 180 A main switch, 4-pole, 690 V AC 

in size 3 enclosure modules 

Bus bar systems up to 180 A 

Actuating flap 

Clip-fit coupling pieces with seal part 

Cable glands from M12 to M63 


Gland plate 

Supplement Sheet to Individual 

Moulded Plastic Distributions in 


■ 

Gland plate 

• in brass design 

• in moulded plastic design 

Maximum number of cable entries into Ex-e enclosures 

(from underneath) 

Wall-mounting framework (acc. to number of enclosures) 

Standard framework (acc. to number of enclosures) 

Canopy (acc. to number of enclosures) 

Size 3 

Size 2 

Size 4 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Enclosures 

Size 1, Gland 

M12 M16 M20 M25 M32 M40 M50 M63 

plate size 1, brass – – 3 3 1 – – – 

Plastic 

Size 2, 3, 4, Gland 

11 6 4 3 2 1 1 – 

plate size 2, brass – – 12 9 5 4 3 2 

Plastic 46 25 20 11 8 4 3 2 

Ex-e moulded plastic enclosures 


544 

X 520 

271 

X 247 

134 

X 110 

Size 1 

271 

X 247 

136 

116 

136 

116 

271 

X 247 

817 

X 793 

X 273 

271 

X 247 


136 

116 

271 136 

X 247 

116 


6

Explosion-Protected Fuse and MCB Distribution 

Boards made of Stainless Steel, Series GHG 619 

■ Enclosures of modular 

design 

■ Hinged flaps facilitate 

actuation of protective 

modules 

■ Snap-on 

components for 

easy replacement 

■ Type of protection IP 65 

■ Boards can be easily 

expanded 

■ Ground stainless steel finish, 

type V4A AISI 316 

■ Highly resistant 

silicone seals 

■ Metal flanges available 

on request 

Description 

Distribution units made of stainless steel 

can be employed in hazardous areas for 

the connection of lighting, heating, motor 

and socket outlet power circuits. 

Stainless steel enclosures of V4A AISI 316 

have a ground surface and are fitted with 

corrosion resistant stainless steel cover 

screws. 

They are highly resistant to chemical and 

mechanical stress and are particulary 

suited for use in hazardous locations in 

offshore areas, in chemical plants or under 

the extreme climatic conditions of the 

tropics, subtropics or arctic zone. 

The distribution boards accommodate 

flameproof components for the control and 

safeguarding of power circuits, such as 

contactors, fuses, thermostatic switches 

etc. Each element can be snapped onto 

DIN mounting rails. The system consists of 

modular boards in four sizes, that can be 

flanged together and combined into larger 

distribution systems. The following 

components are available to tailor boards 

to the individual needs of customers: 

● Main switches up to 180 A 

● NH fuses up to 125 A 

● MCBs and RCDs up to 40 A, 1- to 

4-pole 

● Contactors up to 11 kW 

● Overcurrent protective devices 

up to 25 A 

● Various relays and time relays 

The protective modules can be easily 

accessed during operation through 

hinged flaps without opening the 

enclosure. 


GHG 619 

Explosion-Protected Fuse and 

MCB Distribution Boards made 

of Stainless Steel, Series GHG 619 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Explosion-protected fuse and MCB distribution boards 


Type of protection EEx de II C T4 or T6 




Rated voltage max. 690 V AC (dep. on built-in apparatus) 


Cross section up to max. 240 mm2 size 1 approx. 3.5 kg 

Empty weight 

size 2 

size 3 



size 4 approx. 16.5 kg 

2 components size 4 

Number of components 3 components size 3 

below single actuating flap 4 components size 2 

6 components size 1 and 0 




312,5 

X 247 

941,5 

X 876 

X 225 151 

175 135 

Size 1 Size 2 

X 362,5 151 

312,5 135 

312,5 

X 247 

627 

X 561,5 

X 362,5 151 216 

312,5 135 210 

X 362,5 151 216 

312,5 135 210 

Size 4 Size 3 


6


height 190 mm 


height 190 mm 


height 190 mm 







in enclosures 2, 3 and 4, also built-in 

components under the actuating flap 




40 A main switch, 4-pole 




NH 00 fuse 




6 x Size 1/0 component 



MCB 4-pole 

Size 4 

MCB 

with RCD 1-pole + N 

Size 2 

Ex-Components 

in Moulded Plastic 

for Distributions 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Complete distributions 


Type of protection EEx ed IIC T4 / T6 dep. on built-in apparatus1) EC-Type Examination Certificate PTB 99 ATEX 1044 




Terminal cross section up to 240 mm2 Enclosure material 


Polyester reinforced with glass fibre (GRP) 

1-pole, 2-pole, 3-pole and 4-pole MCBs 


Type of protection EEx ed IIC 


Rated operating voltage up to max. 440 V AC 

Rated current 0,5 A to 40 A 

Rated switching capacity 10 kA 

Tripping characteristic „C“ (other characteristics on request) 

Main contacts 2 x 10 mm2 Terminal cross section 

Aux. contact/signal contact 2 x 2.5 mm2 Optional Aux. contact/signal contact 



MCBs with signal contact are built into components of the next largest size. 

MCBs with RCD, 1-pole + N and 2-pole 




Rated operating voltage bis max. 440 V AC 

Rated current 0,5 A bis 40 A 



Tripping current 30 mA (300 mA on request) 

Main contact 2 x 10 mm2 Terminal cross section 




MCBs with RCD and signal contact are built into components of the next largest size. 

1) According to mounting of RCDs: 

up to 20 A rated current: T6 

over 20 A rated current: T4 


6

RCD, 4-pole 

Size 4 

125 A main switch 

NH 00 - main fuse 

Ex-Components 




Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

RCD, 2-pole and 4-pole 





Rated current 16 A to 63 A 



Tripping current 30 mA (300 mA on request) 

Main contacts 2 x 10 mm2 Terminal cross section 




RCDs with signal contact are built into components of the next largest size. 

1) According to mounting of RCDs: 

up to 20 A rated current: T6 

over 20 A rated current: T4 

40 A, 80 A, 125 A and 180 A main switch, 4-pole 



EC-Type Examination Certificate 40 A PTB 99 ATEX 1031U 

Certificate of Conformity* 80 A PTB-No. Ex 85.B.1055 U 

EC-Type Examination Certificate 125 / 180 A PTB 99 ATEX 1044U 


Typ 230 V 400 V 500 V 690 V 

Motor switching 

40 A 40 A 40 A 40 A 32 A 

capacity AC 3 

Terminal cross section 

80 A 80 A 80 A 80 A 80 A 

125 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 125 A 

180 A 180 A 180 A 150 A 125 A 

40 A 2 x 16 mm 2 

80 A 1 x 35 mm 2 

125 A 1 x 50 / 70 mm 2 

180 A 1 x 120 mm 2 

*EC-Type Examination Certificate to directive 94/9/EC applied for 

NH 00 - main fuse, 3-pole 


Type of protection EEx ed IIC T4 / T6 (dep. on rated current) 


Rated operating voltage up to max 500 V AC 

Current Temp.class Min. cross sect. 

up to 25 A T6 4 mm2 up to 35 A T5 6 mm2 up to 50 A T4 10 mm2 Rated current 

up to 63 A T4 25 mm2 up to 80 A T4 35 mm2 up to 100 A T4 50 mm2 up to 125 A T4 70 mm2 NH 00 main fuses with signal contact available on request 


20 A air-break contactor, 3-pole 

Size 3 

20 A installation contactor, 

1 NO + 1 NC 

Size 0 

Ex-Components 



Technical 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

20 A air-break contactor, 3 NO 




Rated voltage up to max. 690 V AC 


Switching capacity AC 3 

230 V 

2,2 kW 

400 V 

4 kW 

690 V 

4 kW 

Actuating voltage 230 V AC (other voltages on request) 

Terminal cross section 2 x 10 mm2 / aux. contacts 2 x 2.5 mm2 Aux. switch 

optional 1S/1O, 2S or 2O, 

1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO or 2 NC 


20 A installation contactor, 1 NO + 1 NC 






Switching capacity 

AC 3 230 V / 1.3 kW 

AC 1 230 V / 4 kW 


Terminal cross section 2 x 10 mm2 / aux. contacts 2 x 2.5 mm2 Contacts optional 1 NO + 1 NC, 2 NO or 2 NC 


6

24 A installation contactor, 4 NO 

Size 3 


Size 4 

Ex-Components 




Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 








AC 3: 230 V / 2,2 kW 400 V / 4 kW 

AC 1: 230 V / 9 kW 400 V / 16 kW 


Terminal cross section 2 x 10 mm2 / aux. contacts 2 x 2.5 mm2 Contatcts optional 2 NO + 2 NC, 4 NO or 3 NO + 1 NC 








AC 3 230 V/5.5 kW 

AC 1 230 V/16 kW 

400 V/11 kW 

400 V/26 kW 


Terminal cross section max. 2 x 10 mm2 / aux. contacts 2 x 2.5 mm2 Contacts 4 NC 


25 A manual motor starter 

Thermal over-current relay 

Size 3 

Star-delta timer relay 

Size 1 

Ex-Components 




Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Manual motor starter up to 25 A, 3-pole 




Rated voltage 690 V AC / 440 V DC 

Rated current up to 25 A 


AC 3 230 V 

7 kW 

400 V 

12.5 kW 

500 V 

16 kW 

690 V 

22 kW 

1 x 10 mm2 / 2 x 4 mm2 Terminal cross section 

/ aux. contacts 

2 x 2.5 mm2 Min. terminal cross section Setting range Temp. class 

0.75 mm2 0.1 A - 0.16 A T6 

0.75 mm2 1.0 A - 1.6 A T6 

1.5 mm2 1.6 A - 2.5 A T6 

1.5 mm2 2.5 A - 4.0 A T6 

1.5 mm2 4.0 A - 6.3 A T6 

1.5 mm2 6.3 A - 9.0 A T6 

2.5 mm2 9.0 A - 12.5 A T6 

2.5 mm2 12.5 A - 16.0 A T5 

2.5 mm2 16.0 A - 20.0 A T5 

4 mm2 20.0 A - 25 A T5 

Thermal tripping characteristic T II 

Tripping time at 6 x Ie > 5 sec. 

Under-voltage trip 230 V up to 690 V 50 / 60 Hz 

Drop-out value UC = 35 - 75 % UN 

Optional 

Pick-up value 

Aux. contacts 

UC > 0.8 % UN 

1 S + 1 Ö 

Rated voltage 230 V AC 60 V DC 

Rated current 2 A 2.5 A 

Thermal over-current relay 




Rated operating voltage 690 V AC 

Tripping current from 0.1 A to 11.5 A 

Function 

thermal tripping with phase failure protection, 

manual reset 

Terminal cross section max. 2 x 10 mm2 / aux. contacts 2 x 2.5 mm2 Aux. contacts 1NO + 1NC 

Rated voltage 230 V AC (other voltages on request) 


Star-delta timer relay 




Rated operating voltage 

240 V AC 

(other voltages on request) 


Time setting range 

from 1.5 sec. to 30 sec. 

variable, can be set from outside 

Terminal cross section 2 x 2.5 mm2 Contacts 1 changeover 


6

Pushbutton contact block 

Switch contact block 

Signal lamp contact block 

AM 72 measuring instrument 

Ex-Components 




Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Pushbuttons and switches 




Rated voltage up to max. 400 V AC 


AC 11 250 V / 6 A 400 V / 4 A 

Switching capacity DC 11 24 V / 6 A 60 V / 0.8 A 

DC 11 110 V / 0.5 A 220 V / 0.2 A 

Terminal cross section 2 x 2.5 mm 2 

Contacts 1 NO + 1 NC or 2 NO or 2 NC 

Signal lamps 




Rated voltage 

12 V AC - 240 V AC 

12 V DC - 110 V DC 

Power consumption < 1,2 W 


Terminal cross section 2 x 2.5 mm2 AM 72 measuring instrument 




Mechanism moving iron 

Class 2.5 

Measuring range 

0 - 16 A direct 

CT connection n / 1A 

Scale interchangeable, for CT connection n/1A 

Overload range 1 : 1.5 (indicating) 

Overload range at instrument 

Rated current marking red marker 


Terminal cross section 2 x 4 mm2 CEAG Sicherheitstechnik GmbH 6/26


6

Metal Ex-d Enclosures 

and Distributions 

■ Modular design 

■ Rated current up to 630 A 

■ Generously dimensioned 

terminal compartment 

■ Powder coating resistant to 

tropical and marine climates 

■ Cable entries via removable 

flanges 

■ Main switch can be 

actuated from outside 

■ Any metal parts that are 

not painted made of 

corrosion-resistant material 

Description 

In order to be able to use apparatus that 

gives off arcs, such as MCBs, fuses, 

contactors, etc., in potentially hazardous 

areas, it is necessary to use EEx-d 

distributions. 

For this purpose CEAG supplies distribution 

systems consisting of flameproof 

aluminium enclosures and sheet steel 

Ex-e terminal boxes with a polyester 

powder coating that is resistant to both 

tropical and marine climates. 

The enclosures are available in seven 

different sizes. They can be combined 

according to requirements to form larger 

distributions and allow the use of built-in 

components up to 630 A and 690 V. 

To simplify the construction of large 

installations, bus bar systems up to 630 A 

are used. 

Distributions to suit customer specifications 

are engineered on an individual 

basis, taking the explosion protection into 

consideration. 

If required, explosion-protected signal 

lamps, indicating and control components 

are built into connection and bus bar 

boxes. 

Alternatively, these boxes can be supplied 

as separate terminal and control boxes. 

The explosion-protected metal 

distributions from CEAG fulfil all the 

requirements imposed by the chemical, 

petro-chemical and off-shore industries. 


Ex-Distributions in Modular 

Design with Flameproof Light 

Alloy Enclosures and Sheet 

Steel Ex-e Connection Boxes 

The enclosures are mounted on standardized 

wall-mounting or free standing frameworks and 

can be put together to form large distributions. 

The frameworks have uniform fixing dimensions 

to match those of the enclosures and can 

be extended as required. 

If the distributions are installed in the open, 

it is advisable to use canopies for sun or rain 

protection. 

Small distributions are mounted on flat or 

U-rails. 

The frameworks are all made of galvanized steel. 


6

Ex-Distributions in Modular 

Design with Flameproof Light 

Alloy Enclosures and Sheet 

Steel Ex-e Connection Boxes 

The modular design provides an economical and 

clearly arranged method of putting together 

distributions on the building block principle using 

connection and bus bar boxes in the type of 

protection “Increased Safety”. 

The flameproof, individual distribution enclosures 

are joined together via the flange openings of 

the Ex-e connection boxes and the bus bar boxes. 

It is also possible to put together distributions 

that are completely flameproof using flameproof 

cable entries. 

The flameproof enclosures are also available as 

empty enclosures with and without Ex-e connection 

boxes, as well as with and without main switches, 

for equipping by the customer. 

Here it is necessary to bear in mind that, according 

to the national standards, a special inspection by 

an authorized expert must be carried out. 

In addition to this, if required, single or multi-wire 

bushings with connectors can be mounted on 

the distributions. 

Alternatively, these leads can be connected to a 

terminal rail. 

Any conventional industrial switch gear that gives 

off arcs or sparks during operation can be built 

into these flameproof enclosures. 

The power dissipation must not exceed the 

values stated in the PTB certificate. 

The various circuits can be connected quickly 

and economically via a bus bar system. 

If required, individually encapsulated control and 

indicating units, such as pushbuttons, control 

switches or Ex-e measuring instruments, as well as 

Ex-i digital indicating instruments, can be built into 

the Ex-e connections or bus bar boxes. 


Direct motor starters 11 kW, type 1 


Standard Ex-d Motor Starters 

in Flameproof Light Alloy Enclosures 


Direct on-line circuit 


Reversing circuit 

See pages 6/36 and 6/37 for technical data. 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Complete motor starter distributions 


Type of protection EEx ed IIC T5 / T6 dep., on built-in apparatus 


Degree of protection IP 54 to IEC 529 (IP 55 on request) 



Terminal cross section up to max. 240 mm2 Enclosure material 


light alloy pressure casting 


Type Motor- Main Cable entry Order No. 

capacity switch 

to AC 3 4-pole 

1 11 kW 25 A 3 x M25 EXKO 7150 F 1) 

2 15 kW 40 A 2 x M32 / 1 x M25 EXKO 7150 H 1) 

4 22 kW 40 A 2 x M32 / 1 x M25 EXKO 7150 K 1) 

Ordering details: reversing starters 




1 11 kW 25 A 3 x M25 EXKO 7151 F 1) 

2 15 kW 40 A 2 x M32 / 1 x M25 EXKO 7151 H 1) 

4 22 kW 40 A 2 x M32 / 1 x M25 EXKO 7151 K 1) 

The motor starters are completely wired on terminals for connection by the customer. 

Pushbuttons and signal lamps in accordance with the circuit diagram are included with the delivery. 

See below for circuit diagram. 

Motor starters for 630 A rated current available on request. 

1) Please specify rated voltage and rated current for order 


6

Star-delta motor starter 

39 kW, type 5 


in Flameproof Light Alloy Enclosures 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 









Enclosure material light alloy pressure casting 





2 7.5 kW 40 A 4 x M25 EXKO 7152 B 1) 

2 12.5 kW 40 A 4 x M25 EXKO 7152 D 1) 

4 18.5 kW 40 A 3 x M32 / 1 x M25 EXKO 7152 F 1) 

4 30 kW 63 A 3 x M32 / 1 x M25 EXKO 7152 H 1) 

5 37 kW 100 A 1 x M40/2 x M32/1 x M25 EXKO 7152 K 1) 

5 55 kW 100 A 1 x M40/2 x M32/1 x M25 EXKO 7152 M 1) 

The motor starters are completely wired on terminals for connection by the customer. 

Pushbuttons and signal lamps in accordance with the circuit diagram are included with the delivery. 

See below for circuit diagram. 

Motor starters for 630 A rated current available on request. 

1) Please specify rated voltage and rated current for order 




Star-delta circuit 



Size 4 enclosure 

with main switch 

Individual Distributions in 

Building Block Design 

In accordance with the respective circuit diagrams, standard 

industrial switch gear is built into the appropriate flameproof 

enclosures or put together to form distributions and wired to 

terminal blocks in the Ex-e connection boxes. If you wish, we 

can engineer your individual 

- machine controls 

- SPS 

- instrumentation systems 

- motor controls 

- weighing systems and much more besides. 

Empty flameproof light alloy enclosures without/with main switch, 4-pole, 

from 40 A to 630 A (dep. on size of enclosure) 

Size 1 Size 2 Size 4 

Size 5 

Size 6 


Size 7 


6



Ex-e sheet steel connection boxes for light alloy flameproof enclosures 

Size 1 Size 2 

Size 4 Size 5 

Ex-e sheet steel bus bar boxes 250 A / 400 A / 630 A 

for light alloy flameproof enclosures 


Size 6 

Size 1 Size 2 

Size 3 Size 4 


Window 80 mm 

Multiple bushing 

Blanking plug 



Control and indicating units (built into Ex-e connection or bus bar boxes) 

Pushbutton Double pushbutton Signal lamp 

Key-operated pushbutton Control switch EMERGENCY STOP 

mushroom-head pushbutton 

Measuring instrument 

Window for flameproof light alloy enclosure, diameter 80 and 150 mm 

Flameproof cable bushing for light alloy enclosures 

Multiple bushing for up to 20 wires, individual bushings for cross section up to 70 mm 2 

Flameproof blanking plug for light alloy enclosures 

Wall-mounting framework (acc. to the number of enclosures) 

Free-standing framework (acc. to the number of enclosures) 

Canopy (acc. to the number of enclosures) 


6

Ex-d Metal Distributions 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 








Terminal cross section up to max. 240 mm 2 


Flameproof enclosures, sizes 1, 2, 4, 5, 7 and 6 






Size 1 2 4 5 7 6 

Rated current, max 125 A 260 A 400 A 400 A 400 A 630 A 

Permissible power dissipation in temp. class T6 80 W 150 W 210 W 300 W 300 W 700 W 

in temp. class T5 120 W 210 W 280 W 420 W 420 W 975 W 

Weight 8 kg 16 kg 23 kg 40 kg 55 kg 195 kg 

Enclosure material light alloy pressure casting 

Paint finish 

polyester powder coating, 

resistant to tropical and marine climates 

Colour RAL 7032 

Connection boxes, sizes 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6 


Type of protected EEx e IIC T4 / T6 





Size 1 2 4 5 6 

Weight 4.3 kg 7.0 kg 9.5 kg 11.5 kg 23.5 kg 

Number of control units that can be installed 4 15 15 21 52 

Length of terminal rail in mm 1 x 190 2 x 300 3 x 300 3 x 410 3 x 630 

Enclosure material sheet steel enclosure 

Paint finish 






Ex-d Metal Distributions 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Zone 21/ 

Zone 22 

Bus bar boxes, sizes 1, 2, 3 and 4 


Type of protection EEx e IIC T4 / T6 




Rated current up to max. 630 A 

Bus bar 2 x 20 x 5 mm, 3 x 20 x 5 mm, 2 x 30 x 10 mm 

Test current 250 A 400 A 630 A 

Test short-circuit current 35 kA 53 kA 85,8 kA 

Overall length of unit max. 6 m 

Size 1 2 4 5 

Weight 11 kg 15 kg 23 kg 31 kg 

Number of control units that can be installed 20 28 52 72 

Length of terminal rail in mm 1 x 295 2 x 405 2 x 625 2 x 845 

Enclosure material sheet steel enclosure 

Paint finish 





Flameproof cable bushings 


Type of protection EEx d II 


Rated voltage 

Multiple bushing 

690 V AC 

Rated current 8 A 15 A 20 A 25 A 33 A 

Cross section 

20 x 14 x 14 x 6 x 6 x 

0.75 mm 2 1.5 mm 2 2.5 mm 2 4 mm 2 6 mm 2 

Single bushing 

Rated current 78 A 104 A 137 A 168 A 210 A 260 A 

Cross section 10mm 2 16mm 2 25mm 2 35mm 2 50mm 2 70mm 2 

Weight (without cable) 0.2 kg 


6


with Metal EJB Enclosures 

for Gases of Explosion Group II B 

■ Modular design 

■ Rated current up to 800 A 

■ Large terminal 

compartment 

■ Powder coating for use in 

tropical and maritime climates 

■ Depending on requirements, 

use of cable glands or seals 

for cable entry 

■ The apparatus can be operated 

from outside 

Description 

In order to be able to use apparatus that 

produces sparks, arcs or temperatures 

rises, e.g. MCBs, fuses, etc. in hazardous 

areas, it is necessary to use Ex-d 

enclosures. 

CEAG offers a comprehensive range of 

metal enclosures for Gas Group IIB for 

use in Zone 1 and Zone 2 hazardous areas 

that fulfil the requirements of the European 

Standards EN 50014, EN 50018 and 

EN50019. 

The different enclosure sizes make it 

possible to build a variety of distribution 

installations with built-in electrical 

components. 

The design of the distributions and the 

built-in apparatus depends on the electrical 

requirements of the customer, whereby 

the components used comply with the 

specifications of the official certificates. 

The distributions fulfil the requirements 

of the chemical and petro-chemical 

industries, as well as of other industries 

with hazardous areas. 





The distributions and built-in components 

are built to customer specifications for wall 

mounting or for free-standing frameworks, 

depending upon the respective 

requirements. 

The free-standing frameworks are 

designed according to the distributions or 

the special built-in apparatus and they are 

fitted with standard U-rails. If the 

distributions are installed in the open, it is 

advisable to use canopies for sun or rain 

protection. 

The frameworks all feature an epoxy resin 

finish in grey that is identical to that of the 

EJB enclosures. Hot-galvanized steel is 

available on request. 


6




The modular design makes it possible to 

put together distributions and built-in 

components using standardized enclosure 

sizes. 

The enclosures are joined together with the 

aid of cable bushings and/or bus bars and 

they are designed in such a way that the 

allocation of bus bars is facilitated when 

putting distributions together. 

All the electrical components built into the 

enclosures can be operated using actuator 

elements that are mounted on the front 

plates from the outside. 

Ex-d cable entries must be used where 

required. 

The enclosures are all made of copper-free 

aluminium (


AMD 9/12/16 


in EJB Enclosures for 

Gases of Explosion Group II B 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 


Type of protection EEx de IIB T6 

Certificate of Conformity LOM 93.C.0002X 


Rated voltage -20 °C to +55 °C 

Rated current 690 V WS 

Terminal cross section Aluminium, grey epoxy resin paint finish 

Further data see table 


Type 1 Motor Terminal Cable Weight Order No. 

capacity to cross entry 

AC 3 to 400 V section 

AMD 9D (2) 4.0 kW on request 2 x 3 /4” 4.0 kg NOR 000 007 010 259 

AMD 9 (2) 4.0 kW on request 2 x 3 /4” 12.0 kg NOR 000 007 010 183 

AMD 12 5.5 kW on request 2 x 3 /4” 12.0 kg NOR 000 007 010 191 


AMD 26 12.5 kW on request 2 x 1” 17.2 kg NOR 000 007 010 216 


1) Further apparatus on request 

The motor starters are wired ready for use at terminals, with the exception of (2). 

Pushbuttons and signal lamps according to wiring diagram are part of the delivery. 

See below for wiring diagram. 

AMD 9D AMD 9/12/16 AMD 26/30 


6

AMD 16/25/30 


in EJB Enclosures for 

Gases of Explosion Group II B 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 


Type of protection EEx de IIB T6 



Ambient temperature -20 °C to +55 °C 


Enclosure material Aluminium, grey epoxy resin paint finish 

Further data see table 


Type 1 Motor Terminal Cable Weight Order No. 

capacity to cross entry 

AC 3 bis 400 V section 




1) Further apparatus on request 

The motor starters are wired ready for use at terminals, with the exception of (2). 

Pushbuttons and signal lamps according to wiring diagram are part of the delivery. 

See below for wiring diagram. 



EJB 12A 

EJB 14R 

EJB 23R 

EJB 110 

EJB 120 

EJB 130 

EJB 241 M1 


with Metal Enclosures for Gases of 

Explosion Group II B 


Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Complete distribution 

Type of protection EEx de IIB (see table) 



Ambient temperature -20 °C to +55 °C 

Rated voltage 690 V WS 


Enclosure material Aluminium, grey, epoxy resin paint finish 


Flameproof light alloy enclosure EEx d IIB 


Aluminium, with exception of front panel 

EJB 241 M1 and M2 made of cast iron 

Coating grey, epoxy 


Material of window Borosilicate glass 


Ordering details: empty enclosures 

Type le, max. power dissipation Weight Order No. 

max. T6 T5 T4 

EJB 12 R 40 A 30 W 60 W 100 W 3.0 kg NOR 000 001 170 438 

EJB 12 A 40 A 30 W 60 W 100 W 3.6 kg NOR 000 001 170 446 



EJB 110 160 A 125 W 170 W 295 W 22.0 kg NOR 000 001 170 496 

EJB 120 300 A 150 W 270 W 480 W 28.5 kg NOR 000 001 170 503 

EJB 120 M3 300 A 150 W 270 W 480 W 29.0 kg NOR 000 001 170 601 


EJB 121 350 A 150 W 280 W 500 W 32.0 kg NOR 000 001 170 511 

EJB 130 450 A 200 W 340 W 590 W 35.3 kg NOR 000 001 170 529 

EJB 131 500 A 200 W 350 W 610 W 39.0 kg NOR 000 001 170 537 

EJB 240 800 A 250 W 400 W 700 W 52.3 kg NOR 000 001 170 545 

EJB 241 850 A 250 W 400 W 700 W 56.8 kg NOR 000 001 170 553 



1) Other ambient temperatures on request 


6

Pushbutton 


Key-operated mushroom-head pushbutton 

Signal lamp 

Ex-d Distributions and Frameworks with 

Metal Enclosures for Gases of Explosion 

Group II B 


Pushbutton 


Ith2 10 A 

Terminals 2 x 2.5 mm 2 

Switching capacity AC 11: 220 V/ 10 A 

380 V/ 7.5 A 

500 V/ 5 A 

DC 11: 24 V/ 8 A 

60 V/ 4 A 

110 V/ 1 A 

220 V/ 1 A 

Operating buttons (1) various types 

Material of body Aluminium 

Ex-e-actuators stainless steel 

Signal lamp 


Power input 3 W 

Lamp holder Ba 9 s 

Terminals 2 x 2.5 mm 2 

Operation of the lamp directly via transformer or resistor 

Material of body (1) Aluminium 

Material of window Polycarbonate, white, yellow, red or green 

1) If required can be fitted on bottom 


Control switch > 25 A ≤ 63 A 

Control switch > 63 A ≤ 250 A 

Inspection glass 

Size 150 B 

Ex-d Distributions and Frameworks with 

Metal Enclosures for Gases of Explosion 

Group II B 


Rotary actuators 

Actuators for Switches and MCB’s 

4 sizes of actuators dep. on the apparatus ≤ 25 A 

rated current > 25 A ≤ 63 A 

> 63 A ≤ 250 A 

> 250 A ≤ 800 A 

Locking facility On request by padlock 

1) On front of enclosure for apparatus up to 40 A. With apparatus > 40 A they are built into the 

enclosure base 

Windows 

Measurement apparatus, displays 

Application 

etc. 

Material Aluminium, grey epoxy resin paint finish 

Window material Borosilicate glass 

60 x 60 mm 

75 x 75 mm 

Dimensions of windows 

110 x 50 mm 

110 x 75 mm 

Cable bushings (for interconnection of enclosures) (1) 

Material Hexagonal steel, bicromatized 

Cable sealing 

Compound with a high thermal and 

chemical resistance 

For 4 x 10 mm2 + 1 x 6 mm2 Size 50 A/ 3 /4” 

Up to 9 x 1.5 mm2 + acc. to requirements 

For 4 x 16 mm2 + 1 x 10 mm2 Size 75 A/1” 

Up to 19 x 1.5 mm2 + acc. to requirements 

For 4 x 50 mm2 + 1 x 10 mm2 Size 150 A/11 /2” 

Up to 47 x 1.5 mm2 + acc. requirements 

(1) Only one bushing for the enclosure connection 


6

150 A ≤ 350 A 

> 630 A ≤ 800 A 

Ex-d Distributions in 

EJB Enclosures 


Bus-bar (interconnection of enclosures) 

≤ 150 A 

> 150 A ≤ 350 A 

> 350 A ≤ 500 A 

> 630 A ≤ 800 A 

Zone 1/ 

Zone 2 

Up to 3P + N + PE 

Bushing size 150 A/11 /2” 


Aluminium coupler 208 x 102 mm 

consisting of: 

4 bars 350 A (3P + N) 

1 bushing max. 19 x 1.5 mm2 1 PE bar 




4 bars 500 A (3P + N) 

1 bushing max. 19 x 1.5 mm2 1 PE bar 




7 bars 500 A (3P + N) 

1 bushing aux. max. 19 x 1.5 mm2 1 PE bar 

Built-in electrical components 

Ex-d enclosures of the series EJB are suited for the installation of standard electrical 

switchgear that fulfils the technical requirements laid down in the relevant Certificates 

of Conformity for such apparatus. 

Ue ≤ 690 V WS /Ie-bus bars ≤ 800 A. 

The following switchgear can be built into the enclosures: 

● Bus bars 

● Terminals 

● Instrument and protective transformers 

● Measuring instruments 

● Capacitors with discharge resistor for t < 3s, 

● Plugs and sockets 

● Electronic components 

● Various switch units, such as switches, pushbuttons, signal lamps, that are normally 

● built into the front panel 

Due to these characteristics, the EJB enclosures can be used for the 

development and manufacture of switchgear and switch panels that fulfil the 

special demands made on materials for the distribution, protection and 

operation of electrical components for use in Zone 1 and Zone 2 hazardous 

areas. 


Crouse-Hinds ® and CEAG offices 

throughout the world: 

In more than 40 countries 

For detailed information please contact: 

CEAG Offices and 

Production Facilities 

America Cooper Industries Inc. 

Crouse-Hinds 

Wolf & 7th North Streets 

P.O. Box 4999 

Syracuse, NY 13221-4999 

Phone +1315/4775787 

Fax +1315/4775118 

Far East CEAG Crouse-Hinds 

Asia Pacific Pte. Ltd. 

#15-324 The Plaza 

7500A Beach Road 

Singapore 199591 

Phone +65/2974849 

Fax +65/2974819 

Middle East CEAG Middle East L.L.C. 

P.O Box 30861 

Al Fatan Building 

Next to Sana 

UAE Dubai 

Phone +9714/342519 

Fax +9714/342640 


in Germany: 

Soest 

Senator-Schwartz-Ring 26 

59494 Soest 

Phone +492921/69-871 

Fax +492921/69-636 

E-Mail info@ceag.de 

Eberbach 

Neuer Weg – Nord 49 

69412 Eberbach 

Phone +496271/81-02 

Fax +496271/81-476 

Production facilities: 

Barcelona, Spain 

Bühl, Germany 

Eberbach, Germany 

Mexico, Mexico 

Mumbai, India 

Soest, Germany 

Sydney, Australia 

Syracuse, USA 

® Crouse-Hinds is a registered 

trademark of Cooper Industries Inc., 

Houston, USA 

C E A GS i c h e rheitstechnik GmbH


CH 6500 

1275/15/05.00/LD 

Technical details subject to alteration. 

Catalogue valid from May 2000. 

Senator-Schwartz-Ring 26 Neuer Weg – Nord 49 

D-59494 Soest D-69412 Eberbach 

Phone +49(0)29 21/69-8 71 Phone +49(0)62 71/81-02 

Fax +49(0)29 21/69-6 36 Fax +49(0)62 71/81-4 76 

Internet http://www.ceag.de 

e-Mail info@ceag.de

Explosion Protected Products

Create successful ePaper yourself

Delete template?

Save as template?